Cad Wor x Spec Editor Users Guide

CADWorx Spec Editor User's Guide Version 2018 (18.0) September 2017

Copyright Copyright © 2012-2017 Hexagon AB and/or its subsidiaries and affiliates. All rights reserved. Including software, documentation, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright law, trade secret law, and international treaty, and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization from Hexagon AB. BricsCAD® is commercialized by Bricsys NV. Bricsys NV is a fully owned subsidiary of Menhirs NV. All copyrights are the property of Menhirs NV.

U.S. U.S. Government Government Restri cted Rights Legend Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth below. For civilian agencies: This was developed at private expense and is "restricted computer software" submitted with restricted rights in accordance with subparagraphs (a) through (d) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights clause at 52.227-19 of the Federal Acquisition Regulations ("FAR") and its its successors, and is unpublished and and all rights are reserved reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. For units of the Department of Defense ("DoD"): This is "commercial computer software" as defined at DFARS 252.227-7014 and the rights of the Government are as specified at DFARS 227.7202-3. Unpublished - rights reserved under the copyright l aws of the United States. Intergraph Corporation 305 Intergraph Way Madison, AL 35758

Documentation Documentation shall mean, whether in electronic or printed form, User's Guides, Installation Guides, Reference Guides, Administrator's Guides, Guides, Customization Guides, Guides, Programmer's Guides, Guides, Configuration Guides Guides and Help Guides delivered delivered with a particular software product.

Other Documentation Documentation Other Documentation shall mean, whether in electronic or printed form and delivered with software or on Intergraph Smart Support, SharePoint, or box.net, any documentation related to work processes, workflows, and best practices that is provided by Intergraph as guidance for using a software product.

Terms of Use a.

Use of a software software product and Documentation Documentation is subject to the Software Software License Agreement ("SLA") ("SLA") delivered delivered with the software software product unless the Licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation. If the Licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation, the valid signed license shall take precedence and govern the use of this software product and Documentation. Subject to the terms contained within the applicable license agreement, Intergraph Corporation gives Licensee permission to print a reasonable number of copies of the Documentation as defined in the applicable lic ense agreement and delivered with the software product for Licensee's internal, non-commercial use. The Documentation may not be printed for resale or redistribution.

b.

For use of Document Documentation ation or Other Other Documenta Documentation tion where where end user user does not receive receive a SLA SLA or does not have have a valid license license agreement with Intergraph, Intergraph grants the Licensee a non-exclusive license to use the Documentation or Other Documentation for Licensee’s internal non-commercial use. Intergraph Corporation gives Licensee permission to print a reasonable number of copies of Other Documentation for Licensee’s internal, non-commercial use. The Other Documentation may not be printed for resale or redistribution. This license contained in this subsection b) may be terminated at any time and for any reason by Intergraph Corporation by giving written notice to Licensee.

Disclaimer of Warranties Except for any express warranties as may be stated in the SLA or separate license or separate terms and conditions, Intergraph Corporation disclaims any and all express or implied warranties including, but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose and nothing stated in, or im plied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a modification or amendment of such disclaimer. Intergraph believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its publication date. The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable technical product descriptions. Intergraph Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document. The software, Documentation and Other Documentation discussed in this document are furnished under a license and m ay be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of this license. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.

CADWorx Spec Editor User's Guide

2

Intergraph is not responsible for the accuracy of delivered data including, but not limi ted to, catalog, reference and symbol data. Users should verify for themselves that the data is accurate and suitable for their project work.

Limitation of Damages IN NO EVENT WILL INTERGRAPH CORPORATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL CONSEQUENTIAL INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES, INCLUDING INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOSS OF USE OR PRODUCTION, LOSS OF REVENUE OR PROFIT, LOSS OF DATA, OR CLAIMS OF THIRD PARTIES, EVEN IF INTERGRAPH CORPORATION HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. DAMAGES. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL INTERGRAPH CORPORATION’S LIABILITY EXCEED THE AMOUNT THAT INTERGRAPH CORPORATION HAS BEEN PAID BY LICENSEE UNDER THIS AGREEMENT AGREEMENT AT THE TIME THE CLAIM IS MADE. EXCEPT WHERE PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE APPLICABLE LAW, NO CLAIM, REGARDLESS OF FORM, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE BROUGHT BY LICENSEE MORE THAN TWO (2) YEARS AFTER THE EVENT GIVING RISE TO THE CAUSE OF ACTION HAS OCCURRED. IF UNDER THE LAW RULED APPLICABLE ANY PART OF THIS SECTION IS INVALID, THEN INTERGRAPH LIMITS ITS LIABILITY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT ALLOWED BY SAID LAW.

Export Controls Intergraph Corporation’s commercial-off-the-shelf commercial-off-the-shelf software products, customized software and/or third-party software, including any technical data related thereto (“Technical Data”), obtained from Intergraph Corporation, its subsidiaries or distributors, is subject to the export control laws and regulations of the United States of America. Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited. To the extent prohibited by United States or other applicable laws, Intergraph Corporation software products, customized customized software, Technical Data, and/or third-party software, or any derivatives thereof, obtained from Intergraph Corporation, its subsidiaries or distributors must not be exported or re-exported, directly or indirectly (including via remote access) under the following circumstances: a.

To Cuba, Iran, Iran, North Korea, Korea, the Crimean region of Ukraine, or Syria, or any any national of of these countries countries or territories.

b.

To any person person or entity listed on any any United States States government government denial list, list, including, but but not limited to, the United States States Department of Commerce Denied Persons, Entities, and Unverified Lists, the United States Department of Treasury Specially Designated Nationals List, and the United States Department of State Debarred List (https://build.export.gov/main/ecr/e (https://build.export.gov/main/ecr/eg_main_023148). g_main_023148).

c.

To any entity entity when Customer Customer knows, knows, or has reason to know, the end use of of the software software product, product, customized software, Technical Data and/or third-party software obtained from Intergraph Corporation, its subsidiaries or distributors is related to the design, development, production, or use of missiles, chemical, biological, or nuclear weapons, or other un-safeguarded or sensitive nuclear uses.

d.

To any entity entity when Customer Customer knows, knows, or has reason to know, that an illegal reshipment reshipment will take place.

Any questions regarding regarding export/re-export export/re-export of relevant Intergraph Corporation Corporation software product, product, customized customized software, Technical Technical Data and/or third-party software obtained from Intergraph Corporation, its subsidiaries or distributors, should be addressed to PPM’s Export Compliance Department, Department, 305 Intergraph Way, Madison, Alabama 35758 USA or at exportcompliance@intergraph [email protected]. .com. Customer shall hold harmless and indemnify PPM and Hexagon Group Company for any causes of action, claims, costs, expenses and/or damages resulting to PPM or Hexagon Group Company from a breach by Customer.

Trademarks

Intergraph®, the Intergraph logo ®, Intergraph Smart ®, SmartPlant®, SmartMarine, SmartSketch®, SmartPlant Cloud®, PDS®, FrameWorks®, I-Route, I-Export, ISOGEN ®, SPOOLGEN, SupportManager ®, SupportModeler ®, TANK, PV-Elite, CADWorx®, CADWorx DraftPro ®, GTSTRUDL®, and CAESAR II ® are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intergraph Corporation or its affiliates, parents, subsidi aries. Microsoft, and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Oracle, JD Edwards, PeopleSoft, and Retek are registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation, and/or its affiliates. AutoCAD, ObjectARX, and RealDWG are trademarks of Autodesk. HOOPS is a trademark of Tech Soft 3D, L.L.C. Other brands, and product names are trademarks of their respective owners. CADWorx Design Review contains Autodesk® RealDWG by Autodesk, Inc., copyright © Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved. Autodesk, Inc., Inc., 111 McInnis Parkway, Parkway, San Rafael, Rafael, California 94903 ("Autodesk") is a third-party beneficiary beneficiary to this Agreement Agreement to the extent that the Software Product contains RealDWG, and to the extent that the provisions herein relate to Licensee’s use of the Software Product containing RealDWG. Such provisions are made expressly for the benefit of Autodesk, and are enforceable by Autodesk in addition to Intergraph. Intergraph. BricsCAD is a registered trademark trademark of Bricsys NV. NV. Chapoo is a registered registered trademark trademark of Chapoo NV.


3

Contents Intergraph CADWorx Catalog and Specification Editor .......................................................................... 7

What's New in Spec Editor.................................................................................................................... 10 Keywords .............................................................................................................................................. 10 Quick Access Toolbar ........................................................................................................................... 12 Status Bar ............................................................................................................................................. 13 Help ....................................................................................................................................................... 13 File ............................................................................................................................................................... 14

Upgrade Previous Version Project and Catalog Files.................... Files............................. .................. ................. ................. .................. .................. ........... .. 15 New Catalog................................... ................ ................... .................. .................. ................... .................. .................. ............ 15 New Project Projec t ................. ................... .................. .................. ................... .................. .................. ............ 16 New Pipe Support Libraries .................................................................................................................. 18 Open ..................................................................................................................................................... 19 Save ...................................................................................................................................................... 19 Save As.................. .................. .................. ................... .................. .................. ................... ................. 19 Save As Pipe Support Libraries ............................................................................................................ 19 Recent Files .......................................................................................................................................... 20 About ................. .......................... .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. ................. ................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. ................ .......20 Exit Spec Editor..................................................................................................................................... 20 Home Catalog Tab ..................................................................................................................................... 21

Clipboard Clipboa rd Panel................. Panel ................. ................... .................. .................. ................... .................. .................. ...... 21 Paste............................................................................................................................................... 21 Copy ............................................................................................................................................... 22 Cut .................................................................................................................................................. 23 Other Editing Features .......................................................................................................................... 23 Undo ............................................................................................................................................... 23 Remove Row ................. ................... .................. .................. ................... .................. .................. ... 23 Add Table Panel................. Panel......................... ................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. ................. ........23 Edit Table Features ........................................................................................................................ 24 Size Table ................. .................. .................. ................... .................. .................. ................... ........ 29 Bolt Diameter Table ........................................................................................................................ 31 Bolt Length Table ........................................................................................................................... 34 Material Table ................. .................. .................. ................... .................. .................. ................... .. 37 Schedule Schedu le Table ................. ................... .................. .................. ................... .................. .................. 39 Thickness Table ............................................................................................................................. 41 New End Type ................................................................................................................................ 42 End Type Table .............................................................................................................................. 49 New Category Categor y ................. .................. .................. ................... .................. .................. ................... .. 53 New Group Table ........................................................................................................................... 53 Data Table .................. ................... .................. .................. ................... .................. .................. ...... 54 IndexCode Table ............................................................................................................................ 94 DBCode Table .................. ................... .................. .................. ................... .................. .................. 95 End Prep Table ................. ................... .................. .................. ................... .................. .................. 97


4

Contents Legacy Catalog Data Panel .................................................................................................................. 99 Import By Spec ............................................................................................................................. 100 Import From Data File ................................................................................................................... 101 Import Pipe Support Legacy From Assembly File ................ ......................... ................. ................. .................. .................. .................. ............ ... 104 Import Pipe Support Legacy From Data File ................................................................................ 105 Transfer Data Panel ............................................................................................................................ 107 Catalog Data ................... .................. .................. ................... .................. .................. ................... 108 Project Projec t Data ................. .................. .................. ................... .................. .................. ................... ... 109 Support Data ................................................................................................................................ 110 Export Data Panel ............................................................................................................................... 112 Export Table To Text Excel .......................................................................................................... 112

View Catalo g Tab .................. ........................... .................. .................. .................. .................. ................. ................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. ................. ........ 113

Display Displa y Panel ................. ................... .................. .................. ................... .................. .................. ....... 113 Catalog Data ................... .................. .................. ................... .................. .................. ................... 113 Base Catalog Data ....................................................................................................................... 115 Properties ..................................................................................................................................... 115 Component Componen t Tables ................. ................... .................. .................. ................... .................. .......... 119 EndType Tables ........................................................................................................................... 120 Component Types ........................................................................................................................ 120 Data Table List Mode Panel ................................................................................................................ 121 Hom e Proj ect Tab ................. .......................... .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. ................. ................. .................. .................. .................. .................. ................. ........122

Specification Panel ............................................................................................................................. 122 Add Specification .................. .......................... ................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. ............... ......123 New and Edit Component Pane ................................................................................................... 125 Add Group Component............ Component..................... ................. ................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. ............ ... 133 Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes ........................ ................................. .................. .................. ................ .......134 Add single new component to a spec.................. ........................... .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. ........... 136 Add Multi Component Pane .......... ................... ................. ................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. ............... ......139 Add multiple new components to a spec .................. ........................... ................. ................. .................. .................. .................. .................. ............... ......140 Assign selection codes to components without without catalog defaults .................. ........................... .................. .................. ............. ....142 PLANT 3D Size Table Tabl e Detail Dialog Dialo g Box................. ................... .................. .................. .............. 142 Edit Project Specs features feature s................. ................... .................. .................. ................... .................. .... 143 Import AutoPLANT Specification Data ......................................................................................... 144 Import AutoCAD Plant 3D Specification Data ................. .......................... .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. ................ .......147 Import Specification From SRD File ............................................................................................. 152 Pipe Support Panel ............................................................................................................................. 154 Add Pipe Support Library .................. ........................... .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. ................. ................. .................. ........... .. 154 Import Legacy Pipe Support Library ............................................................................................. 156 Catalog Panel.................. Panel .................. .................. .................. ................... .................. .................. ................... ...... 157 Update From Catalog ................................................................................................................... 157 Review Table Links ...................................................................................................................... 158 Legacy Specification Panel ................................................................................................................. 160 Import Legacy Specification ......................................................................................................... 160 Export/Import Export/Im port Data Panel ................. ................... .................. .................. ................... .................. ....... 161 Export to Excel ............................................................................................................................. 161 Export to Text ............................................................................................................................... 172 Import Update From Excel ........................................................................................................... 172


5

Contents Editing Editin g Panel ................... .................. .................. ................... .................. .................. ................... ...... 174 Find and Replace ......................................................................................................................... 174

View Proj ect Tab ................. .......................... .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. ................. ................. ........... 176

Display Displa y Panel ................. ................... .................. .................. ................... .................. .................. ....... 176 Project Specs ............................................................................................................................... 176 Project Catalog Data .................................................................................................................... 176 Pipe Support Library .................. ................... .................. .................. ................... .................. ....... 177 Properties ..................................................................................................................................... 192 Spec List Mode Panel ......................................................................................................................... 209 Pipe Supp or t Li br ary Fil e Home Tab ..................... ............................. ................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .........210 Pipe Supp or t Li br ary Fil e View Tab .............. ....................... ................. ................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .........211

Display Displa y Panel ................. ................... .................. .................. ................... .................. .................. ....... 211 Properties ..................................................................................................................................... 211 Prop ert y Descr ip ti on s ................. .......................... .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .........217

Project Properties................................................................................................................................ 217 Specificatio Specifi cation n Properties Properti es ................................... ................ ................... .................. .................. ................... .................. .... 218 Pipe Support Libraries Properties ....................................................................................................... 221 Pipe Support Library Properties ................................................................................................... 222 Catalog Properties .............................................................................................................................. 225 Size Tables Properties ................................................................................................................. 226 Material Tables Properties ........................................................................................................... 228 Schedule Tables Properties ......................................................................................................... 229 Thickness Tables Properties ........................................................................................................ 230 End Type Tables Properties ......................................................................................................... 231 Data Tables Properties ................................................................................................................. 236 IndexCode Tables Properties ....................................................................................................... 294 DBCode Tables Properties ........................................................................................................... 295 End Prep Tables Properties ......................................................................................................... 296 Updat e Hist or y .................. ........................... ................. ................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. ............ ... 297 Glossary ................................................................................................................................................... 303 Index ......................................................................................................................................................... 321


6

SECTION 1

Intergraph CADWorx Catalog and Specification Editor The CADWorx Catalog and Specification Editor views, edits, and creates specifications and catalog data loaded with CADWorx. The Specification Editor a lso imports legacy data, and specs from all versions of CADWorx. Your project administrator needs to review and update the catalog (.cat) and project (.prj) file in the Specification Editor before modeling begins. Catalog File

Contains all the size, bolt di ameters, bolt lengths, materials, schedules, thickness, end types, categories, component data, index codes, database codes, and end prep data for all the components in CADWorx. This is a .cat file, located in [Product Folder]\Plant\Spec, and can only be accessed through the Specification Editor. The catalog file works in conjunction with the project (.prj) file to allow CADWorx to build models. The areas highlighted in red are referenced throughout this manual. Windows such as the Catalog Data window are referenced by the window name. Please take a moment to get familiar with the interface.

The View tab is explained in View Catalog Tab (on page 113).


7

Intergraph CADWorx Catalog and Specification Editor Project File

Contains the specifications for CADWorx. This is a .prj file, located in [Product Folder]\Plant\Spec, and can only be accessed through the Specification Editor. These specifications can be updated by changing the base catalog attached to the project. You can also update the individual components using the Edit Component dialog box. CADWorx uses the project file for specifications and si zes when creating a model. The areas highlighted in red are referenced throughout this manual. Windows such as the Project Specs window are referenced by the window name. Please take a moment to get familiar with the interface. The Component tab is the default tab when, you open the Main Spec List View.

The View tab is explained in View Project Tab (on page 176).


8

Intergraph CADWorx Catalog and Specification Editor Pipe Support Libraries File

Contains a separate pipe support libraries file for CADWorx. This is a .psl file, located in the [Product Folder]\Plant\Spec folder, and can only be accessed through the Specification Editor. CADWorx Spec Editor can use the pipe support libraries file in the Pipe Support Libraries Path to include that libraries file in CADWorx for building pipe support assemblies or to insert pipe supports. This allows you to have more than one set of libraries attached to your specification. You can also build assemblies to add to these pipe support libraries files in CADWorx. The areas highlighted in red are referenced throughout this manual. Windows such as the Pipe Support Library are referenced by the window name. Please take a moment to get familiar with the interface.

The View tab is explained in Pipe Support Library File View Tab (on page 211).


9

Intergraph CADWorx Catalog and Specification Editor

What's New in Spec Editor Version 2018 (18.0) No changes were made to CADWorx Spec Editor for this release. For information on earlier releases, see Update History (on page 297).

Keywords Keywords can be used in specification descriptions that allow information to be automatically inserted during placement of a component. Keywords can be used anywhere within the Tag, Short Description, and Long Description fields. Keywords can also be used in the Index Code data file. Keywords are: 

MAIN



RED



SPEC



MAINTHK



REDTHK



LENGTH



BORE



MAINACT



REDACT



TAG



MAINDEC



REDDEC



MAINACTDEC



REDACTDEC



PIPETHK



PIPETHKRED



LINENUM



SPECINFONOMINALRATING



SPECINFOTEMPERATURE



SPECINFOPRESSURE



SPECINFOPIPINGMATERIAL



SPECINFOGASKETMATERIAL



SPECINFOSTUDMATERIAL



SPECINFOBOLTMATERIAL



CWDBCODE


10

Intergraph CADWorx Catalog and Specification Editor The keywords {BORE}, {PIPETHK} and {PIPETHKRED} are calculated from the pipe data file in the specification instead of the component's data file. F or example, for a 4"x1" reducer, {PIPETHK} would get the values from the 4" pipe data file as lis ted in the specification. {PIPETHKRED} would get values from the 1" pipe data file. A 4"x1" reducer with {MAINTHK} or {REDTHK} would get the keyword values from the reducer data file as listed in the specification. Olet data files do not have any thickness values listed. Olet {MAINTHK} or {REDTHK} values are always read from the appropriate pipe data file. The {BORE} keyword is a calculation of the inside diameter of the main pipe size. It is calculated using the following formula: {BORE} = [ (Pipe Outside Diameter of Main Size) - (2*Pipe W all Thickness of Main Size) ]. Some ways in which keywords can be used are below:     





PIPE, {MAIN} {MAINTHK}" API-5L GR.B DSAW, PSL2 FLANGE, {MAIN} ANSI 150 RFWN {BORE}" BORE ASTM A105, ASME B16.5 NIPPLE, PIPE {MAIN} x {LENGTH} XS ASTM A106 GR.B WELDOLET, {MAIN} {MAINTHK}" x {RED} {REDTHK}" ASTM A105, ASME B31.8 VALVE, PLUG {MAIN} ANSI 150 WE API 6D TWT {PIPETHK}" API-5L GR.B PIPE REG PAT LO GASKET, INSULATING KIT {MAIN} ANSI 600, RF, B={BORE}, PIKOTEK VCS WITH ZINC PLATED WASHERS, GRE INSULATING WASHERS AND SLEEVES BOLT, STUD {MAIN} x {LENGTH} ALLOY STEEL ASTM A193 CL 2A GR B7 W/2 HEX NUTS ASTM A194 CL 2B GR 2H (FOR {MAINDEC}" 150# FLG.)

User Defined Keywo rds:

User defined keywords are now associated with user defined colum ns inside Spec Editor and can be created in catalog tables and projects by Custom Data in Properties .

Keyword Formatting: The numeric values are formatted based on the SystemMeasure. The tables below explain the different formatting for each of the keywords. The Alph aSizeCo nt ro l is read from the current configuration file. Keyword

SystemMeasure English/Inch

MAIN, RED

AlphaSizeControl

MAINACT, REDACT

AlphaSizeControl

MAINDEC, REDDEC Always 3 decimal places MAINACTDEC, REDACTDEC

Always 3 decimal places

MAINTHK, REDTHK


BORE, PIPETHK, PIPETHKRED


LENGTH

Based on DIMLUNIT, DIMDEC, DIMLFAC

SPEC

Specification filename without extension


11

Intergraph CADWorx Catalog and Specification Editor Keyword

SystemMeasure Metric/Inch

MAIN, RED

AlphaSizeControl

MAINACT, REDACT

LUPREC and DIMZIN control number of decimals



MAINTHK, REDTHK




LENGTH


SPEC


Keyword

SystemMeasure Metric/Metric

MAIN, RED

AlphaSizeControl

MAINACT, REDACT

AlphaSizeControl



MAINTHK, REDTHK




LENGTH


SPEC


Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar is located in the upper left-hand corner next to File

.

Main tools available Open

Opens the Open File dialog box and allows you to select a file to open.


12

Intergraph CADWorx Catalog and Specification Editor Save

Saves the project or catalog that you are currently working in. Undo

Undoes the work you previously did in case you make a mistake. Redo

Redoes the work you just did in case you change your mind and want the information back. Ab ou t

Displays the Ab ou t box, which displays information about your copy of the software, including version number and the copyright, legal, and licensing notices. Customize Quick Access Toolbar

Enables you to add other features to the Quick Access Toolbar.

Customize Quick Access Toolbar features New Catalog

Starts a new catalog. New Project

Starts a new project. More Commands

Allows you to add commands in the Spec Editor to the Quick Access toolbar with the Customize dialog box. Show Below the Ribbon

Moves the Quick Access toolbar below the ribbon. Minimize the Ribbon

Minimizes the ribbon.

Status Bar Located at the bottom of the Spec Editor, displa ying the word Ready as well as whether the caps lock (CAP ), number lock (NUM), or scroll lock (SCRL ) is active. When you select an item, the bar's Ready status changes to the amount of items selected, such as 13 items selected. When you select an item in the Main Table List View, the item with its value displays in the status bar next to CAP.

Help Click the question mark in the upper ri ght corner of the Spec Editor to open the help file. Help - Displays the help file.


13

SECTION 2

File The File menu commands are used to create, save, and open catalogs and projects in the specification editor. New Catalog - Creates a new catalog. For m ore information, see New Catalog (on page 15). New Project - Creates a new project. For m ore information, see New Project (on page 16). New Pipe Support Libr aries - Creates a new pipe support library enabling you to design specific pipe supports. For more information, see New Pipe Support Libraries (on page 18). Open - Opens previously created projects or catalogs. For more information, see Open (on page 19). Save - Saves current project or catalog. For more information, see Save (on page 19).

Save As - Saves current project or catalog with a new name. For more information, see Save As (on page 19). Save As Pipe Support Libr aries - Saves the pipe support data into a separate libraries file. You can rename the fil e, and select where the file saves. For more information, see Save As Pipe Support Libraries (on page 19). Recent Files - Opens recently opened fil es. For more information, see Recent Files (on page 20). Ab ou t - Displays information about the Spec Editor. For more information, see About (on page 20). Exit Spec Editor - Exits the Spec Editor. For m ore information, see Exit Spec Editor (on page 20).


14

File

Upgrade Previous Version Project and Catalog Files In CADWorx 2016, you can upgrade CADWorx 2014 and CADW orx 2015 project and catalog files. When you open a previous version catalog or project file, the software prompts you with the Open Catalog or Open Project upgrades message box. These boxes enable you to upgrade to the current version of the CADWorx Specification Editor. Upgrade

Upgrades the selected file and makes it incompatible with older versions of the Specification Editor and CADWorx Plant. This upgrade places the new features into the original file. For example, the Material Assignment Setup transfer to the new Material Assignment Setup, but you can now assign them by com ponent and size. Save backup & Upgrade

Saves a backup of the original f ile and upgrades the selected file to the current CADWorx Specification Editor version. You can continue to use the original file by removing the .bak from the file extension.

New Catalog CADWorx Spec Editor File: New Catalog Creates a new catalog with a specific l ayout for sizes, thicknesses, materials, schedules, end types, and components for a customer. Name

Specifies the name of the new catalog. Type

Specifies the type of catalog. The following catalog options are available: 

Company Catalog

Builds a catalog for a specific company. 

Global Catalog

Builds a catalog for an entire industry. This catalog is the base catalog. Global catalogs are used when an entire industry, such as the oil industry, has all the same information. 

Industry Catalog

Builds a catalog for a specific industry. Base Catalog

Specifies the catalog that this new catalog pulls its information from. Description

Specifies the description of the catalog. Location

Specifies the folder where this catalog is saved.


15

File Units

Specifies the units of measure that are to b e used in this catalog. T he following unit options are available: 





English/Inch Uses the imperial system with nominal inch input. Metric/Inch Uses the metric system with nominal inch input. Metric/Metric Uses the metric system with metric input. 

1.

Click File > New Catalog

.

The New Catalog dialog box displays.

2.

Type the name of the catalog in the Name box.

3.

Select a catalog type from the Type list: Company Catalog, Global Catalog, or Industry Catalog .

4.

For a company or industry catalog, click the Base Catalog ellipsis, select the necessary base catalog, and then click OK . For global catalogs, skip to s tep 5. Global Catalogs are the base catalog.

5.

Type a description of the catalog in the Description box.

6.

Define the location to save the new catalog. Click the Location ellipsis, select the necessary base catalog, and then click OK .

7.

Select a unit type from the Units list: English/Inch , Metric/Inch, or Metric/Metric. The base catalog you select must use the same units you specify in the Units list.

8.

Click OK to create the new catalog. The catalog list is created and displays under Catalog Data on the left side of the spec editor, in the Main List View.

New Project CADWorx Spec Editor File: New Project Creates a new project enabling you to d esign specifications for companies or customers. Name

Specifies the name of the project. Default Catalog

Specifies a default catalog to attach to the project. DBCode Table

Specifies the database code table for the project. This database code comes from the DBCode Tables in the Default Catalog.


16

File BOM type

Specifies the Bill of Material (BOM) type for the project. There are four material types: Fabrication , Erection , Offshore, and Miscellaneous . Long Desc Format Setup

Specifies the appearance of the long d escription attached to the components. Short Desc Format Setup

Specifies the appearance of the short description format attached to the components. Tag Format Setup

Specifies the appearance of the tag format attached to the com ponents. Part Number Format Setup

Specifies the appearance of the part number attached to the components. For more on the Format Setups , see Description Format Dialog Boxes (on page 193). Layer Manager

Specifies the layers for the project. For more information, see Layer Manager Dialog Box (on page 196). Description

Specifies the description of the project. Location

Specifies the folder location where the project saves. 1.

Click File > New Project

.

The New Project dialog box displays.

2.

Type the name of the project in the Name box.

3.

Click the Default Catalog ellipsis, select the necessary catalog, and then click Open .

4. Select the database code table, when applicable, from the DBCode Table list. 5. Select the Bill of Material type from the BOM type list. 6. Click Long Desc Form at, edit the long description format, and then click OK . 7. Click Part Number Format, edit the part number format, and then click OK . 8. Click Short Desc Format, edit the short description format, and then click OK . 9. Click Tag Format, edit the tag format, and then click OK . 10. Click Layer Manager , add the layers you need, and then click OK . For more information, see Layer Manager Dialog Box (on page 196). 11. Type a description of the project in the Description box. 12. Click the Location ellipsis to browse, select a location to save the new project, and then click OK . 13. Click OK to create the project. The project creates and displays under Project Specs on the left side of the Spec Editor in the Main List View.


17

File

New Pipe Support Libraries CADWorx Spec Editor File: New Pipe Support Li braries Creates a new pipe support libraries file enabling you to design specific pipe supports. Name

Specifies the name of the pipe support libraries file. Default Catalog

Specifies a default catalog to attach to the pipe support libraries file. BOM type

Specifies the Bill of Material (BOM) type for the pipe support libraries file. T here are four material types: Fabrication , Erection , Offshore, and Miscellaneous . Long Desc Format Setup

Specifies the appearance of the long d escription attached to the pipe support assemblies and components. Short Desc Format Setup

Specifies the appearance of the short description format attached to the pipe support assemblies and components. Tag Format Setup

Specifies the appearance of the tag format attached to the p ipe support assemblies and components. Part Number Format Setup

Specifies the appearance of the part number attached to the pipe support assemblies and components. Description

Specifies the description of the pipe support libraries file. Location

Specifies the folder location where CADWorx Spec Editor saves the pipe support libraries file. 1. Click File > New Pipe Support L ibraries . The New Pipe Support Li braries dialog box displays. 2. Type the name of the pipe support libraries file in the Name box. 3. Click the Default Catalog ellipsis, select the necessary catalog, and then click Open . 4. Select the Bill of Material type from the BOM type list. 5. Click Long Desc Format, edit the long description format, and then c lick OK . 6. Click Part Number Format, edit the part number format, and then click OK . 7. Click Short Desc Form at, edit the short description format, and then click OK . 8. Click Tag Format, edit the tag format, and then click OK . 9. Type a description of the pipe support libraries file in the Description box. 10. Click the Location ellipsis to browse, select a location to save the new project, and then click OK . 11. Click OK to create the project. The pipe support libraries file creates and displays under Pipe Support Library on the left side of the Spec Editor in the Main List View.


18

File

Open CADWorx Spec Editor File: Open Opens an existing project or catalog. 1.

Click File > Open

.

2.

Select the project or catalog to open, and then click Open . If prompted to update the project from the base catalog, select Yes or No . Selecting Yes updates the project from the base catalog. Selecting No does not update the project from the base catalog. This prompt only happens when you have made a change to the base catalog. The project or catalog opens for editing.

Save CADWorx Spec Editor File: Save Saves the catalog or project changes. This command is only available if you make changes to a product or catalog. Click File > Save



.

The project or catalog is saved with the defined file name and location.

Save As CADWorx Spec Editor File: Save As Saves the catalog or project, but gives you the option to rename the file, a nd select where the file saves. You can save a previous version of the file for use in a previous version of the CADWorx Specification Editor and CADWorx Plant. If you save in a previous version, the Required Changes To Contin ue message displays describing modifications required with the previous version. Show Details

Displays the data changes required by the s oftware to save the project as a different version. For example, Save As needs to remove the Default OTAP SKEY from the Specification and Project properties for the project to s ave.

Save As Pipe Support Libraries CADWorx Spec Editor File: Save As Pipe Support Li braries Saves the pipe support data into a separate libraries file. You can rename the file, and select where the file saves.


19

File

Recent Files CADWorx Spec Editor File: Recent Files Provides a list of previously opened files. This command enables you to reopen files you have previously worked with. Click File, and then select a Recent Files from the list.



The selected file opens.

Ab out CADWorx Spec Editor File: Ab ou t Displays the version and copyright date for the CADWorx Spec Editor.

Exit Spec Editor CADWorx Spec Editor File: Exit Spec Editor Exits the software. Click File, and then click Exit Spec Editor .



If prompted to Save File, select Yes, No, or Cancel . The Spec Editor closes unless you click Cancel.


20

SECTION 3

Home Catalog Tab Gives you access to the features in an open catalog. Clipboard - Enables you to edit the fields within the S pec Editor. For more information, see Clipboard Panel (on page 21). Ad d Tab le - Enables you to add tables to a catalog. F or more information, see Add Table Panel (on page 23). Legacy Catalog Data - Enables you to import legacy data. For more information, see Legacy Catalog Data Panel (on page 99). Transfer Data - Enables you to transfer project, catalog, and pipe support data. For more information, see Transfer Data Panel (on page 107). Export Data Panel - Enables you to export data to either a text document or a n Excel document. For more information, see Export Data Panel (on page 112). Exit Spec Editor - Closes the Intergraph CADWorx Catalog and Specification Editor.

Clipboard Panel CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Clipboard Paste - Pastes text from the clipboard i nto the project or catalog. For m ore information, see Paste (on page 21). Copy - Copies highlighted text from the project or catalog text areas to the cli pboard. For more information, see Copy (on page 22). Cut - Cuts highlighted text from the project or catalog text areas and places it o n the clipboard. For more information, see Cut (on page 23).

Paste CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Clipboard > Paste Keyboard: CTRL+V Pastes text into the project or catalog after using Cut (on page 23) or Copy (on page 22). 

Right-click the row where you want the text, and then select Paste. Alternatively, click the Home tab, and then click Paste


on the Clipboard panel.

21

Home Catalog Tab

Copy CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Clipboard > Copy Keyboard: CTRL+C Copies highlighted text from the project or catalog. Use Paste (on page 21) to place copied text when required. 

Highlight the text to be copied, right-click it, and then select Copy . Alternatively, click the Home tab, and then click Copy on the Clipboard panel.

Right click Copy in Catalog Data Copies a selected table to Catalog Data. 

Select a table to copy, right click it, and then select Copy. The table pastes below the previous table.

This only works on the tables themselves and not on the table folders.

Right click Copy in Project Specs Copies a selected specification to Project Specs . 

Select a specification to copy, right click it, and then select Copy. The specification pastes at the end of the list of specifications.

Right click Copy in the component list Copies selected components from the components list in the Main Spec List View. For more information on Main Spec List Vie w, see Intergraph CADWorx Catalog and Specification Editor (on page 7). 

Select a group of components to copy, right click, and then select Copy. The software pastes the components at the end of the list for that component.

Copy information from Br anch Table to another branch table Copies a selected range of rows and c olumns from one branch table and enables you to paste it to another branch table. 1.

Select the range of rows and columns you want to copy, and then click Copy Clipboard panel.

on the

2.

Open the specification within the same project or a different project, and then select the Branch tab.

3.

Select the rows and columns where you want to paste the information, and then click Paste on the Clipboard panel. Alternatively, you can use CTRL-V on the keyboard to paste the information in the branch table. The branch table information pastes in the rows and columns selected.


22

Home Catalog Tab

Cut CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Clipboard > Cut Keyboard: CTRL+X Cuts highlighted text from the project or catalog. Use Paste (on page 21) to place cut text. 

Highlight the text to be cut, right-click it, and then select Cut . Alternatively, click the Home tab, and then click Cut on the Clipboard panel.

Other Editing Features These features can be used throughout the Spec Editor, but are not located on the Clipboard panel.

Undo Undoes a change in the proj ect or catalog. 

Right-click the row in properties, and then select Undo . Undo is only available by rightclicking when in the Properties window, otherwise you must use the ke yboard control. Spec Editor supports Undo using CTRL+Z. Undo is not available on the Clipboard

panel.

Remove Row Removes rows from the table. 

Right-click the row to be removed, and then select Remove Row .

Remove Row is only available by right-clicking on a row and is unavailable on the Clipboard panel.

Ad d Table Panel CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Ad d Tab le Enables you to create the information for a catalog. All options are d isabled until you start a new catalog or open an existing catalog. The first row of each table must be filled out for the program to function properly. Size Table - Adds a new size table file to the Size Tables folder in Catalog Data. For more information, see Size Table (on page 29). Bolt Diameter Table - Adds a bolt diameter table to the Size Tables folder in Catalog Data. For more information, see Bolt Diameter Table (on page 31). Bolt Length Table - Adds a bolt length table to the Size Tables folder in Catalog Data. For more information, see Bolt Length Table (on page 34). Material Table - Adds a new material table file to the Material Tables folder in Catalog Data. For more information, see Material Table (on page 37).


23

Home Catalog Tab Schedule Table - Adds a new schedule table file to the Schedule Tables folder in Catalog Data. For more information, see Schedule Table (on page 39). Thickness Table - Adds a new thickness table file to the Thickness Tables folder in Catalog Data. For more information, see Thickness Table (on page 41). New End Type - Adds a new custom end type to the End Type Tables folder in Catalog Data. For more information, see New End Type (on page 42). End Type Table - Adds a new end type table file to the End Type Tables folder in Catalog Data. For more information, see End Type Table (on page 49). New Category - Adds a new category to the Data Tables folder in Catalog Data. For more information, see New Category (on page 53). Data Table - Adds a data table file to a Data Tables selected category in Catalog Data. For more information, see Data Table (on page 54). IndexCode Table - Adds an index code table to the IndexCode Tables folder in Catalog Data. For more information, see IndexCode Table (on page 94). DBCode Table - Adds a database codes table to the DBCodes Tables folder in Catalog Data. For more information, see DBCode Table (on page 95). End Prep Table - Adds an end prep table to the Miscellaneous folder in Catalog Data. For more information, see End Prep Table (on page 97).

Edit Table Features Right-click Menu Ad d B ol t Diam eter Tabl e

Adds a bolt diameter table to the Size Tables folder. This option enables you to assign part numbers to each bolt diameter. For more information, see Bolt Diameter Table (on page 31). Ad d B ol t L eng th Tabl e

Adds a bolt length table to the Size Tables folder. This option enables you to assign part numbers to each bolt length. For more information, see Bolt Length Table (on page 34). Ad d Cu st om End Typ e

Adds a new custom end type to the EndType Tables folder and to the list of available end types. This option enables you to create n ew end types for you components. For more information, see New End Type (on page 42). New Group Data Table

Adds a new group to the Data Tables folder in Catalog Data. You can only access this option if you have the Data Table List Mode set to Group List Mode in the View tab. For more information, see New Group Table (on page 53).


24

Home Catalog Tab New Category

Adds a new category to the Data Tables folder in Catalog Data. You can only access this option if you have the Data Table List Mode set to Category List Mode in the View tab. For more information, see New Category (on page 53). New User Shape Table

Adds a new user shape table to a group table folder in the Data Tables of Catalog Data. You can only access this option if you have the Data Table List Mode set to Group List Mode in the View tab. For more information, see New User Shape Table (on page 88), and Add new user shape (on page 89). Ad d Su b Fo ld er

Adds a sub folder to the Topworks data table category. For more information, see New Topworks Table (on page 91), Add Sub Folder (on page 91), Topwork Sub Folder Manager (on page 91), and Add new topworks table (on page 92). Ad d Cu st om Data To Al l Tabl es

Adds a custom data field to all tables in the selected tables folder. With this option, this can be done more than once in the New Field dialog box with the OK & New option. For more information, see New Field Dialog Box (on page 116). Import CADWorx Legacy Catalog From Spec File

Imports legacy data from a specification. For more information, see Import By Spec (on page 100). Import CADWorx L egacy Catalog From Data File

Imports legacy data from a data file. For more information, see Import From Data File (on page 101). Import Pipe Suppor t Legacy From Ass embly File

Imports legacy data for pipe supports from an assembly fi le. For more information, see Import Pipe Support Legacy From Assembly File (on page 104). Import Pipe Support Legacy From Data File

Imports legacy data for pipe supports from a data fil e. For more information, see Import Pipe Support Legacy From Data File (on page 105). Import AutoPLANT Catalog Data

Imports data from AutoPLANT for use in CADWorx. For more information, see Import AutoPLANT Catalog Data (on page 26). Import AutoCAD Plant 3D Catalog Data

Imports data from AutoCAD Plant 3D for use in CADWorx. For more information, see Import AutoCAD Plant 3D Catalog Data (on page 28). Remove All Tables

Removes all of the tables from the selected table type folder. Open

Displays the selected component in the Main Table List View.


25

Home Catalog Tab Copy

See Copy (on page 22). Remove

Removes the selected component from the table list. Rename

Renames the selected component. Select the component to be renamed, and then enter a new name. Expand

Expands the selected list. Collapse

Collapses the selected list. Expand All

Expands all the table lists. Collapse All

Collapses all the table lists. Properties

Displays the Properties view. Export Table To Text Excel

Exports data to a text document or Excel document. For more information, see Export Table To Text Excel (on page 112). Ad d t o b ase c atal og

Adds the selected table file to the base catalog. Commit t o Base Catalog

Commits the changes to the table in the base catalog. Update from Base Catalog

Updates the selected table with changes made to the base catalog. Review Table Lin ks

Enables you to check and change the details of the catalog from the base catalog. For more information, see Review Table Links Dialog Box (on page 158).

Import AutoPLANT Catalog Data Right-click on the catalog in the Main List View and select Import AutoPLANT Catalog Data. Imports data from an AutoPLANT catalog. Import

Imports the AutoPLANT data.


26

Home Catalog Tab AutoPLANT Data File Path

Specifies the location of the AutoPLANT data. Tables

Specifies the AutoPLANT Data tables.

CADWorx Components Program Code

Displays the program code associated with the AutoPLANT data. Short Description

Displays a short description associated with the AutoPLANT data. Size

Displays the size associated with the component for the AutoPLANT data. Double-clicking the Size box displays a drop down that allows you to select or clear sizes. Schedule

Displays the schedule for the program code for the A utoPLANT component. Double-clicking the Schedule box displays a drop down that allows you to select or clear schedule data. Rating

Displays the rating of the program code for the A utoPLANT component. Double-clicking the Rating box displays a drop down that allows you to select or clear rating data. Select / deselect all

Selects and clears all check boxes in the CADWorx Compo nents box. 1.

Right-click on the catalog in the Main List View and select Import AutoPLANT Catalog Data. The Import AutoPLANT Catalog Data dialog box displays.

2.

Click the File Path ellipsis under Auto PLA NT Data . The Open dialog box displays.

3. Select the AutoPLANT data for import, and then click Open . 4. Select a table from the Tables list. 5. Select a Program Code by clicking the check box. 



You can use the Select / deselect all check box to select all the program codes under CADWorx Compon ents . You can also change the Size, Schedule, or Rating by double-clicking the boxes under each heading.

6. Click Import. 7. Click OK. You can view a log file of the details for the conversion by clicking View Log File. Imports the AutoPLANT data.


27

Home Catalog Tab

Import AutoCAD Plant 3D Catalog Data Right-click the catalog in the Main List View, and select Import AutoCAD Plant 3D Catalog Data Imports data from an AutoCAD Plant 3D catalog. Import

Imports the AutoCAD Plant 3D data.

AutoCAD Plant 3D Data Plant 3D List Files

Displays the Open dialog box and enables you to select one or more AutoCAD Plant 3D catalogs. Source Unit

Specifies the source unit being used for the import. If there are no components related to the Source Unit in the catalog you select, then the CADWorx Compon ents box remains empty. Usershape Block Unit

Specifies the units for the user shape b lock from the Plant 3D data. Catalog Li st

Specifies the catalog you selected from the Open dialog box.

CADWorx Components Component Type

Displays a list of the components in t he AutoCAD Plant 3D data. Long Description

Displays a long description associated with the AutoCAD Plant 3D data. Select / deselect all

Selects and clears all check boxes in the CADWorx Comp onents box. Folder location box

Specifies the folder location of the AutoCAD Plant 3D catalog.

Right-click Menu Check group

Enables you to check a component group under Component Type without expanding the group. Uncheck group

Enables you to clear a component group under Component Type without expanding the group.


28

Home Catalog Tab Expand All

Enables you to expand all the groups without having to select the plus sign. Collapse All

Enables you to collapse all the groups without having to select the plus sign. 1.

Right-click the catalog in the Main List View, and then select Import AutoCAD Plant 3D Catalog Data. The Import AutoCAD Plant 3D Catalog Data dialog box displays.

2. Click the Plant 3D List Files ellipsis under Auto CAD Plan t 3D Data . The Open dialog box displays.

3. Select the AutoCAD Plant 3D data for import, and then click Open . 4. Click the plus sign to expand the Component Type, and then click the check box for the component you want to add. You can use the Select / deselect all check box to select all the groups under CADWorx Compon ents . 5. Click Import. 6. Click OK. You can view a log file of the details for the conversion by clicking View Log File. CADWorx imports the AutoCAD Plant 3D catalog.

Size Table CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Ad d Tab le > Size Table Adds a new size table file to the Size Tables folder in Catalog Data. The size table records the nominal size and outside diam eter (OD) data for all the components used with CADWorx. You can use this command to create different size tables for use in CADWorx. Name

Specifies the table name. There are no restrictions to what you can name the tabl e. Description

Specifies the description of the table. T here are no restrictions to how you can describe the table. Default Part Number

Specifies the default part number for the table. This can be changed. Current Units

Specifies the unit of measure for the si ze table. This cannot be changed.

Size Table Fields NOM

Specifies the nominal size of the component.


29

Home Catalog Tab OD

Specifies the outside diameter and the actual si ze of the component. Description

Specifies the size description of the com ponent. PTN

Specifies the part number of the size. For all right-click and editing features, see Edit Table Features (on page 24).

What do you w ant to do?    

Add a new size table (on page 30) Add Standard Size (on page 30) Add New Size (on page 31) Edit size table (on page 31)

Add a new si ze table 1.

Click the Home tab, and then click Size Table

on the Add Tabl e panel. Alternatively,

right-click Size Tables in Catalog Data, and then select Add Size Tab le

.

The New Size Table dialog box displays.

2.

Type the name of the table in the Name box.

3. Type the description of the table in the Description box. 4. Change or accept the Default Part Number . The Current Units box should already contain the units currently associated with the open catalog. You should not be able to change the contents of this box. 5. Click OK . The table displays in the Main Table List View with the name you typed at the top left. The table is also added to Catalog Data under the Size Tables folder.

6. Click File > Save to save the changes to the catalog.

Add Standard Size 1.

Right-click in the Main Table List View, and then click Ad d St and ard Size . For mainsize instead of standard size, see Add MAINSIZE (on page 52). The Select size from t emplate dialog box displays.

You cannot add standard sizes if all standards are already included in the selected table. 2.

Select the sizes that you need to add, and then click OK . Use the Select / deselect all check box to select or clear all values. The values selected are displayed in the Main Table List View.

3.

Click File > Save to save the changes to the catalog.


30

Home Catalog Tab Add New Si ze 1.

Right-click the Main Table List View, and then click Ad d New Size . The software displays an empty box with the properties to enter.

For more information on the details of these properties, see Size Table (on page 29). 2. Type the necessary information in each box, pressing the TAB key to navigate to the next box. 3. Click File > Save to save the changes to the catalog.

Edit si ze table 1.

Double-click a table file under Size Tables in Catalog Data. The table displays to the right of the Catalog Data in the Main Table List View.

2.

Select a row or box to edit.

3.

Enter the changes, or right-click the table, and use Remove Row , Cut , Copy, or Paste to edit the information. The change displays.

4.


See Also Remove Row (on page 23) Cut (on page 23) Copy (on page 22) Paste (on page 21)

Bolt Diameter Table CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Ad d Tab le > Bolt Diameter Table Adds a bolt diameter table to the Size Tables folder in Catalog Data. The bolt diameter table records the diameter of all the bolts use d with CADWorx and enables you to assign part numbers to each individual diameter. Name

Specifies the table name. There are no r estrictions on the name. Description

Specifies the description of the table. There are no restrictions on the description. Default Part Number

Specifies the default part number for the table. You can edit this box. Current Units

Specifies the unit of measure for the si ze table. You cannot edit this box. The software automatically specifies the units based on the units you specified when creating the catalog.


31

Home Catalog Tab Bolt Diameter Table Fields Diameter

Specifies the diameter of the bolt. Description

Specifies the description of the bolt diam eter. PTN

Specifies the part number of the diameter. For all right-click and editing features, see Edit Table Features (on page 24).

What do you w ant to do? 

Add a new bolt diameter table (on page 32)



Add Standard Diameter (on page 32)



Add New Diameter (on page 33)



Edit bolt diameter table (on page 33)



Display the bolt diameter part number in CADWorx Plant (on page 33)

Add a new bolt d iam eter table 1.

Click the Home tab, and then click Bolt Diameter Table on the Add Tabl e panel. Alternatively, right-click Size Tables in Catalog Data, and then select Add Bo lt Diam eter Table

.

The New B olt Diameter Table dialog box displays.

2. Type the name of the table in the Name box. 3. Type the description of the table in the Description box. 4. Change or accept the Default Part Number . The Current Units box should already contain the units currently associated with the open catalog. You should not be able to change the contents of this box. 5. Click OK . The table displays in the Main Table List View with the name you typed at the top left. The table is also added to Catalog Data under the Size Tables folder.


Add Standard Diameter 1.

Right-click in the Main Table List View, and then click Ad d St and ard Diam eter . The Select size from t emplate dialog box displays.

You cannot add standard diameters if all standards are already included in the selected table.


32

Home Catalog Tab 2.

Select the diameters that you need to add, and then click OK . Use the Select / deselect all check box to select or clear all values. The values selected are displayed in the Main Table List View.

3.


Add New Di ameter 1.

Right-click the Main Table List View, and then click Ad d New Diam eter . The software displays an empty row with the properties to enter.

For more information on the details of these properties, see Bolt Diameter Table (on page 31). 2.

Type the necessary information in each box, pressing the TAB key to navigate to the next box.


Edit bol t d iameter table 1.

Double-click a bolt diameter file in Size Tables under in Catalog Data. The table displays to the right of the Catalog Data in the Main Table List View.

2.


3.


4.



Displ ay the bolt di ameter part num ber in CADWorx Plant 1.

Create a bolt diameter table in the catalog. Make sure you have added values in the PTN column, or the software displays no values in the Code box in CADWorx Plant. For more information, see Bolt Diameter Table (on page 31).

2.

Click File > Save.

3. Open a project corresponding to the catalog. 4. Click Yes to update the project from the base catalog. 5. Double-click the specification. 6. In the Properties pane, select the bolt d iameter table name from the Bolt Diameter Table Name list.


33

Home Catalog Tab 7.

In the Main Spec List View, under Gaskets/Bolts/Welds, select the bolt component.

8.

In the Edit component pane, select a Description ellipsis. You can add the BOLT_DIAMETER_PTN schema to any of the description fields. However, this schema is only available o n the bolt component. A description format dialog box displays.

9.

Click the Component Tables list, and then select Size Tables .

10. Select the BOLT_DIAMETER_PTN schema in the Table Fields box. 11. Click Move right

to move the schema to the [Description] Format box.

12. Click OK . 13. Click File > Save. 14. Open a drawing in plant. 15. Set the specification with the bolt diameter part number schema. 16. Draw a flange set or a flange and valve set with bolts. 17. Double-click the bolts. The Component Edit dialog box displays with the bolt diameter part number in the Code box.

18. Check the value in the Code box to ensure it matches the value in the PTN column of the bolt diameter table.

Bolt Length Table CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Ad d Tab le > Bolt Length Table Adds a bolt length table to the Size Tables folder in Catalog Data. The bolt length table records the length of each bolt used with CADWorx and enables you to assign part numbers to each individual length. Name


Specifies the description of the table. There are no restrictions on the description. Default Part Number

Specifies the default part number for the table. You can edit this box. Current Units

Specifies the unit of measure for the si ze table. You cannot edit this box. The software automatically specifies the units based on the units you specified when creating the catalog.


34

Home Catalog Tab Bolt Length Table Fields Length

Specifies the length of the bolt. Description

Specifies the description of the bolt length. PTN

Specifies the part number of the length. For all right-click and editing features, see Edit Table Features (on page 24).


Add a new bolt length table (on page 35)



Add Standard Length (on page 35)



Add New Length (on page 36)



Edit bolt length table (on page 36)



Display the bolt length part number in CADWorx Plant (on page 36)

Add a new bolt l ength t abl e 1.

Click the Home tab, and then click Bolt Length Table on the Add Tabl e panel. Alternatively, right-click Size Tables in Catalog Data, and then select Add Bo lt Len gt h Table

.

The New Bol t Length Table dialog box displays.

2. Type the name of the table in the Name box. 3. Type the description of the table in the Description box. 4. Change or accept the Default Part Number . The Current Units box should already contain the units currently associated with the open catalog. You should not be able to change the contents of this box. 5. Click OK . The table displays in the Main Table List View with the name you typed at the top left. The table is also added to Catalog Data under the Size Tables folder.


Add Standard Length 1.

Right-click in the Main Table List View, and then click Ad d St and ard Len gt h . The Select size from t emplate dialog box displays.

You cannot add standard lengths if all standards are already included in the selected table.


35

Home Catalog Tab 2.

Select the lengths that you need to add, and then click OK . Use the Select / deselect all check box to select or clear all values. The values selected are displayed in the Main Table List View.

3.


Add New L ength 1.

Right-click the Main Table List View, and then click Ad d New Len gt h . The software displays an empty row with the properties to enter.

For more information on the details of these properties, see Bolt Length Table (on page 34). 2.

Type the necessary information in each box, pressing the TAB key to navigate to the next box.

3.


Edit bolt length table 1.

Double-click a bolt length table file under Size Tables in Catalog Data. The table displays to the right of the Catalog Data in the Main Table List View.

2.


3.


4.



Display the bolt length part num ber in CADWorx Plant 1.

Create a bolt length table in the catalog. Make sure you have added values in the PTN column, or the software displays no values in the Code box in CADWorx Plant. For more information, see Bolt Length Table (on page 34).

2.

Click File > Save.

3.

Open a project corresponding to the catalog.

4.

Click Yes to update the project from the base c atalog.

5. Double-click the specification. 6. In the Properties pane, select the bolt length table name from the Bolt Length Table Name list. 7. In the Main Spec List View, under Gaskets/Bolts/Welds, select the bolt component.


36

Home Catalog Tab 8.

In the Edit component pane, select a Description ellipsis. You can add the BOLT_LENGTH_PTN schema to any of the d escription fields. However, this schema is only available on the bolt component. A description format dialog box displays.

9.

Click the Component Tables list, and then select Size Tables .

10. Select the BOLT_LENGTH_PTN schema in the Table Fields box. 11. Click Move right

to move the schema to the [Description] Format box.

12. Click OK . 13. Click File > Save. 14. Open a drawing in plant. 15. Set the specification with the bolt length part number schema. 16. Draw a flange set or a flange and valve set with bolts. 17. Double-click the bolts. The Component Edit dialog box displays with the bolt length part number in the Code box.

18. Check the value in the Code box to ensure it matches the value in the PTN column of the bolt length table.

Material Table CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Ad d Tab le > Material Table

.

Adds a new material table file to the Material Tables folder in Catalog Data. The material table records the specs data for all the components used with CADWorx. You can use this command to create different material tables for use in CADWorx. Name

Specifies the table name. There are no r estrictions to what you can name the table. Description

Specifies the description of the table. There are no description restrictions.

Material Table Fields Spec

Specifies the material, for example the material Spec can be based on the American Society for Testing and Material. This lists m aterial such as ASTM A53, a carbon steel alloy. Grade

Specifies the material grade, for example the Grade can be based on the American Society for Testing and Material. Composition

Specifies the material composition.


37

Home Catalog Tab Comptypes

Specifies the applicable component types. When you set component types in the material table, that material becomes available for selection on the c omponent in the Material Assignment Setup (on page 198). Density

Specifies the material density. PTN

Specifies the part number of the material. For all right-click and editing features, see Edit Table Features (on page 24).


Add a new material table (on page 38)



Insert Row (on page 38)



Edit material table (on page 39)

Add a new m aterial table 1.

Click the Home tab, and then click Material Table on the Add Table panel. Alternatively, right-click Material Tables in Catalog Data, and then select Add Mater ial Table

.

The New Materi al Table dialog box displays.

2. Type the name of the table in the Name box. 3. Type the description of the table in the Description box. 4. Click OK . The new material table displays in the Main Table List View with the name you typed at the top left, and is also added to Catalog Data under the Material Tables folder.


Insert Row 1.

Double-click the new table. An empty table displays in the Main Table List View.

2.

Right-click the Main Table List View, and then click Insert Row . An empty row displays with the fie lds to enter.

3. Type the required information in each box. Press TAB to navigate to the next box. 4. Repeat the previous two steps to add more data. 5. Click File > Save to save the changes to the catalog.


38

Home Catalog Tab

Edit material table 1. 2. 3.

4.

Double-click a material table file under Material Tables in Catalog Data. The table displays to the right of the Catalog Data in the Main Table List View. Select a row or box to edit. Enter the changes, or right-click the table, and use Remove Row , Cut , Copy, or Paste to edit the information. The change displays. Click File > Save to save the changes to the catalog.


Schedule Table CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Ad d Tab le > Schedule Table Adds a new schedule table file to the Schedule Tables folder in Catalog Data. The schedule table records the schedule data for all components used with CADWorx. You can use this command to create different schedule tables for use in CADWorx. Name

Specifies the table name. There are no r estrictions to what you can name the table. Default Part Number

Specifies the default part number for the table. T his can be changed. Description


Schedule Table Fields SCH

Specifies the schedule for the component. SCHENCWT

The schedule used with enhanced weight calculation. PTN

Specifies the part number for the component. For all right-click and editing features, see Edit Table Features (on page 24).

What do you w ant to do?   

Add a new schedule table (on page 40) Add Schedule (on page 40) Edit schedule table (on page 40)


39

Home Catalog Tab

Add a new s ch edule table 1.

Click the Home tab, and then click Schedule Table on the Add Table panel. Alternatively, right-click Schedule Tables in Catalog Data, and then select Ad d Sch edu le Table

.

The New Schedule Table dialog box displays.

2.


3.

Change or accept the Default Part Number .

4.

Type the description of the table in the Description box.

5.

Click OK . The new schedule table displays in the Main Table List View with the name you typed in at the top left. The new schedule is also added to Catalog Data under the Schedule Tables folder.

6.


Add Schedul e Adds a schedule to the Schedule Table file in the Main Table List View. Standard Items

Specifies the types of schedules you can add. Selected Items

Specifies the types of schedules you have added. 1. Right-click the Main Table List View, and then click Ad d Sc hed ul e. The Add Schedule Items dialog box displays.

2. Select a schedule item from the Standard Items list, and then click the Add ar ro w add the item to the Selected Items list.

to

You can select multiple items by holding the SHIFT or CTRL ke y down, and then selecting multiple items. Also, you can add new items by clicking New or delete an added item by clicking Delete . To move an item up and down in the list, simply select it, and use the Up and Down arrows to the side. 3. When all the items are added, click OK . The schedule items are added to the list.


Edit schedule table 1.

Double-click a schedule table file under Schedule Tables in Catalog Data. The table displays to the right of the Catalog Data in the Main Table List View.

2.



40

Home Catalog Tab 3.


4.



Thickn ess Table CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Ad d Tab le > Thickn ess Table Adds a new thickness table file to the Thickness Tables folder in Catalog Data. The thickness table records the thickness data for all the c omponents used with CADWorx. You can use this command to create different thickness tables for use in CADWorx. Name

Specifies the table name. There are no r estrictions to what you can name the table. Size Table

Specifies the size table attached to the thickness table. Schedule Table

Specifies the schedule table attached to the thick ness table. Description


Thickness Table Fields NOM

Specifies the nominal size of the component supplied by the size table. Other numbers The other numbers in the thickness table are pulled from the schedule table and represent the schedule of the thickness. For all right-click and editing features, see Edit Table Features (on page 24).




Add a new thickness table (on page 42) Edit thickness table (on page 42)


41

Home Catalog Tab

Add a new t hi ck nes s t able 1.

Click the Home tab, and then click Thickness Table on the Add Table panel. Alternatively, right-click Thickness Tables in Catalog Data, and then select Ad d Thickness Table

.

The Thickness Table dialog box displays.

2.


3.

Select the size table from the Size Table list.

4.

Select the schedule table from the Schedule Table list.

5. Type the description of the table in the Description box. The new thickness table displays in the Main Table List View with the name you typed in at the top left. The thickness table is also added to Catalog Data under the Thickness Tables folder.

6. Click File > Save to save the changes to the catalog. The new table brings in all the nominal sizes from the size table, and the schedule numbers from the schedule table, emphasizing the thickness of each component according to its schedule.

Edit thick ness table 1.

Double-click a thickness table file under Thickness Tables in Catalog Data. The table displays to the right of the Catalog Data in the Main Table List View.

2.


3.


4.


Thickness table rows can be removed by r emoving the associated nominal size inside the associated size table.

See Also Cut (on page 23) Copy (on page 22) Paste (on page 21)

New End Type CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Ad d Tab le > New End Type Adds a new custom end type to the End Type Tables folder in Catalog Data. Name

Specifies the name of the custom end type. After you create the custom end type, this name displays in the Type list in the New End Type Table dialog box.


42

Home Catalog Tab Base End Type

Specifies the base end type for the custom end type. The base end type is one of the default end types delivered with CADWorx Plant. Isogen Symbol

Specifies the Isogen symbol type for the custom end type. This symbol displays in an isometric drawing after you run ISOGENOUT . Options 

Force Match End Type Setup

Forces the custom end type to only allow connections that you defined in t he Matching End Type Table . For more information, see Matching End Type Table Dialog Box (on page 197). 

Stub-End/Adapter L ap End Type

Specifies the end type as a stub end or adapter lap end type, and enables the Backing Flange option in the New and Edit Component Pane (on page 125). You can use the Backing Flange option with any component that has a stub end or adapter lap end type. The Stub-End/Adapter Lap End Type is available when you select Flanged as the Base End Type . 

Disable Weld Insertion

Disables the automatic weld insertion. The software does not place a weld on the component pair containing the custom end type. 

Disable Gasket Inserti on

Disables the automatic gasket insertion. The software does not p lace a gasket on the component pair containing the custom end t ype. 

Disable Bolt Insertio n

Disables the automatic bolt insertion. The software does not place a bolt on the component pair containing the custom end t ype. 

Force End Type Length withi n Component Length

Forces the end type length to be included in the overall length of the component. For example, if you have a pipe that is six feet in length, and you have a one inch end type on each end of the pipe, the pipe length is six feet and two inches. If you do not select this option, the pipe length is six feet. Description

Specifies a description for the new custom end type.


Create a custom end type (on page 44)



Drawing with custom end types (on page 45)



Create a Stub End end type (on page 46)



Drawing a Stub without an end type set (on page 48)



Drawing a Stub with a stub-end or adapter lap end type set (on page 48)


43

Home Catalog Tab

Create a custom end typ e 1.

Click New End Type

2.

Type a Name.

3.

Select a Base End Type.

4.

Select an Isogen Symbol .

.

5. Select or clear the Force Match End Type Setup check box. 6. Select or clear the Disable Weld Insertion check box 7. Select or clear the Disable Gasket Insertion check box 8. Select or clear the Disable Bolt Insertion check box. 9. Select or clear the Force End Type Length with in Component Length check box. 10. Type a Description. 11. Click OK . The custom end type adds to the End Type Tables folder.

12. Select the custom end type, and then click End Type Table

.

The New End Type Table dialog box displays.

13. Type a Name. Type displays the default value for the selected end type and is unavailable.

14. Select the Size Table. Click the Size Table ellipsis to select the main sizes for this end type table. Alternatively, use Ad d M AINSIZE in the Main Table List View. 15. Type a Part Number . 16. Select a default Isogen Symbol from the list. 17. Select selection codes from the Appl ic abl e Gask ets list, or type a code in the box. 18. Select selection codes from the Appl ic abl e Bo lt s list, or type a code in the box. You must have the Selection Codes defined in the gasket and bolt components. For more information, see Selection Codes (on page 60), Selection Codes Tutorial (on page 65), Set selection code defaults (on page 65), and Assign selection codes to components without catalog defaults (on page 142). 19. Type the Component Class . 20. Type the Temperature Rating . 21. Type the Pressure Rating . 22. Type the Description . 23. Click OK . The new end type table displays under the custom end type.


44

Home Catalog Tab 24. Double-click the new end type table under the custom end type. 25. Right-click in the Main Table List View, and then select Ad d M AINSIZE . 26. Click the Select / deselect all check box to select all sizes, or select sizes as needed. 27. Type the values as needed in the end type properties. 28. Click File > Save. 29. Click File > Open, and then open a project (.prj) linked to the catalog you just updated. 30. Click Yes to update from the base catalog. You can also click Review Update, click Force Update All , click OK , and then click Yes . 31. Double-click a specification. 32. Select a component in the Main Spec List View. Alternatively, right-click, and then select Ad d or Add M ul ti pl e to add new components to the specification. 33. In the New or Edit comp onent pane, update the data as needed, and then click the Start list. 34. Find the custom end type in the end type tree, and then click + to expand the end type. 35. Double-click the end type table. 36. You can add the same or different end types to End , Branch1, and Branch2 if needed, or click the Appl y s ame en d t yp e to all end s check box. 37. Click Ap pl y . If you added a new component, click Add . 38. Click the project name in the Project Specs pane. 39. Click Match End Type in the Properties list, and then click the ellipsis

.

The Matchin g End Type Table dialog box displays.

40. Click New . 41. Select the custom end type in the End Type List , and click Add Lef t or Add Ri gh t . 42. Select either a custom or out-of-the-box end type, and then click Add L eft or Add Ri gh t based on where you added the last end type. You can also drag and drop the end type into the Matched End Type list. This drag-and-drop option eliminates steps 39 to 41. 43. Click OK . 44. Click File > Save. See Drawing with custom end types (on page 45).

Drawing with custom end types 1.

Open CADWorx Plant.

2.

Start a new drawing or open an existing drawing.

3.

Click Setup

4.

Click Specific ation / Size.

.


45

Home Catalog Tab 5.

Click Browse and select the project (.prj) containing the c ustom end types.

6.

Click Open .

7.

Click Piping Rules .

8.

Click Appl y En d Type Rul e, and then select Auto mat ic .

9.

Click Appl y an d Cl os e.

10. Click Spec View

.

11. Select a component that has a custom end type. 12. Click in the model space and draw the component. 13. Select another component that has a custom end type. 14. Click the endpoint of the first component in the drawing and place the component. The software inserts the component correctly if the component end type matches the data in the Matching End Type Table. If the component end type does not match the data in the Matching End Type Table, then the software does not insert the component. The software then displays the following message: Violates end type rules.

Create a Stub End end typ e 1.

Click New End Type

.

2.

Type a name, such as Stub End .

3. Select Flanged from the Base End Type list. 4. Select FL from the Isogen list. 5. Click the Stub-End/Adapter Lap End Type check box. 6. Type a Description. 7. Click OK . The end type adds to the End Type Tables folder.

8. Select the Stub End end type, and then click End Type Table

.


9. Type a Name, such as Stub_End_1 . Type displays the default value of the selected end type and is unavailable.

10. Select the Size Table. Click the Size Table ellipsis to select the main sizes for this end type table. Alternatively, use Add M AINSIZE in the Main Table List View. 11. Type a Part Number . 12. If the Isogen Symbol does not default to FL, then select FL from the list. 13. Type or select any other data, as needed.


46

Home Catalog Tab 14. Type the Description for the table. 15. Click OK . The end type table adds to the Stub End end type.

16. Double-click the end type, and then right-click the Main Table List View. 17. Select Ad d M AINSIZE . 18. Click the Select / deselect all check box, and then click OK . 19. Fill in the properties as needed. 20. Click File > Save. 21. Click File > Open , and then select a project (.prj). This project must use the catalog where you added the Stub End end type. 22. Click Yes to update from the base catalog. You can also click Review Update, click Force Update All , click OK , and then click Yes . 23. Double-click a specification. 24. Select a component in the Main Spec List View. Alternatively, right-click, and then select Ad d or Ad d Mul ti pl e to add new components to the s pecification. 25. In the New or Edit comp onent pane, update the data as needed, and then click the Start list. 26. Find the stub end end type in the end type tree, and then click + to expand the end type. 27. Double-click the stub end end type table. 28. You can add the same or different end types to End , Branch1, and Branch2 if needed, or click the Appl y s ame en d t yp e to all end s check box. 29. Click Appl y . If you added a new component, click Ad d . 30. Click the project name in the Project Specs pane. 31. Click Match End Type in the Properties list, and then click the ellipsis

.

The Matchi ng End Type Table dialog box displays.

32. Click New . 33. Select the stub end end type in the End Type List , and click Add L eft or Add Rig ht . 34. Select either a custom or a default end type, and then click Add L eft or Add Ri gh t based on where you added the last end type. You can also drag and drop the end type into the Matched End Type list. This drag-and-drop option eliminates steps 31 to 33. 35. Click OK . 36. Click File > Save. See Drawing a Stub without an end type set (on page 48) and Drawing a Stub with a stub-end or adapter lap end type set (on page 48).


47

Home Catalog Tab Drawing a Stub with out an end type set 1.

Double-click a specification.

2.

Right-click the Main Spec List View, and then select Ad d . The New comp onent pane displays.

3. Select Flanges from the Groups list. 4. Select Flanges from the Category list. 5. Select Stub from the Type list. 6. Select a stub data table from the Data Table list. 7.

Click Ad d .

8.

Click File > Save.

9.

Launch CADWorx Plant.

10. Start a new drawing or open an existing drawing. 11. Click Setup

.

12. Click Specific ation / Size. 13. Click Browse and select the project (.prj) containing the stub component. 14. Click Open . 15. Click Spec View

.

16. Click + to expand Flanges . 17. Click the stub component. 18. Place the stub component in the drawing. The component displays in the drawing as shown below:

See Drawing a Stub with a stub-end or adapter lap end type set (on page 48).

Drawing a Stub wi th a stu b-end or adapter lap end type set 1.


2.

Right-click the Main Spec List View, and then select Ad d . The New comp onent pane displays.

3. Select Flanges from the Groups list. 4. Select Flanges from the Category list. 5. Select Stub from the Type list. 6. Select a stub data table from the Data Table list.


48

Home Catalog Tab 7.

Click the Start list and expand the Stub End end type.

8.

Double-click the Stub End end type. You must create the stub end end type using the New End Type option. For more information, see Create a Stub End end type (on page 46).

9.

Select a lap joint flange from the Backing Flange list.

10. Click Add . 11. Click File > Save. 12. Launch CADWorx Plant. 13. Start a new drawing. 14. Click Setup

.

15. Click Specification / Size. 16. Click Browse and select the project (.prj) containing th e Stub component. 17. Click Open . 18. Click Spec View

.

19. Click + to expand Flanges . 20. Click the stub component. 21. Place the stub component in the drawing. The component displays with the lap joint attached as shown below:

End Type Table CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Ad d Tab le > End Type Table Adds a new end type table file to the EndType Tables folder in Catalog Data. The end type table records end types data for all the components used with CADWorx. You can use this command to create different end type tables for use in CADWorx. Name

Specifies the table name. Type

Specifies the end type you want to add. Click the ellipsis to add custom end types with the New Custo m End Type dialog box. For more information, see New End Type (on page 42). If you have already added custom end types, you can select the end type from the Type list.


49

Home Catalog Tab Size Table

Specifies the size table attached to the end type table. Part Number

Specifies the part number assigned to the table.

Default Settings Isogen Symbol

Specifies the Isogen symbol associated with the end type selected. This is the end type symbol that displays when you run Isogen Out . Component Class

Specifies the class type specification for the com ponent. Temperature Rating

Specifies the maximum allowable temperature for the component. Pressure Rating

Specifies the maximum allowable pressure for the component. Ap pl ic abl e Gask ets

Specifies the applicable gasket for the com ponent based on the selection code. The value that you choose in the Ap pl ic abl e Gask ets list determines the gasket that inserts when you place a component pair that requires a g asket, such as flanged components, clamped components, flanged end-types, and clamped end types. You can either type the code in the Ap pl ic abl e Gask ets box, or select an available code from the list. The Appl ic abl e Gask ets option only displays when the component allo ws a gasket. To assign selection co des, see Selection Codes Tutorial (on page 65), and Assign selection codes to components without catalog defaults (on page 142). Ap pl ic abl e Bo lt s

Specifies the applicable bolt for the component based on the selection code. The value that you choose in the Appl ic abl e Bo lt s list determines the bolt that inserts when you place a component pair that requires a bolt, such as flanged components, clamped components, flanged end-types, and clamped end types. You can either type the code i n the Ap pl ic abl e Bolts box, or select an available code from the list. The Appl ic abl e Bo lt s option only displays when the component allows a bolt. To assign selection codes, see Selection Codes Tutorial (on page 65), and Assign selection codes to components without catalog defaults (on page 142). Description

Specifies the description of the table. T here are no description restrictions.

EndType Table Fields MAINSIZE

Specifies the main size of the com ponent. OAL

Specifies the overall length.


50

Home Catalog Tab FACELEN Specifies the face length. CFD Specifies the connection face diameter. FFD Specifies the face diameter. CHD Specifies the connection hub diameter. FHD Specifies the face hub diameter. PENGLEN Specifies the pipe engagement length. CPENGD Specifies the connection pipe engagement diameter. FPENGD Specifies the face pipe engagement diameter. For all right-click and editing features, see Edit Table Features (on page 24). For more information, see End Type Tables folder (on page 114).

What do you w ant to do?    

Add a new end type table (on page 51) Add MAINSIZE (on page 52) Add New MAINSIZE (on page 52) Edit end type table (on page 52)

Add a new end ty pe t abl e 1.

Click End Type Table

on the Add Table panel. Alternatively, right-click End Type

Tables in Catalog Data, and then select Ad d En d Ty pe Tab le

.


2.

Type the name of the new table in the Name box.

3.

Select the end type from the Type list.

4.

Select the Size Table. Click the Size Table ellipsis to select the main sizes for this end type table. Alternatively, use Ad d M AINSIZE in the Main Table List View. 5. Type a Part Number . 6.

Select a default Isogen Symbol from the list.

7.

Select selection codes from the Appl icab le Gask ets list, or type a code in the box.

8. Select selection codes from the Ap pl icab le B ol ts list, or type a code in the box. You must have the Selection Codes defined in the gasket and bolt components. For more information, see Selection Codes (on page 60), Selection Codes Tutorial (on page 65), Set selection code defaults (on page 65), and Assign selection codes to components without catalog defaults (on page 142).


51

Home Catalog Tab 9.

Type the Component Class .

10. Type the Temperature Rating . 11. Type the Pressure Rating . 12. Type the Description . 13. Click OK . The new end type table displays in the Main Table List View and adds to Catalog Data under the End Type Tables folder.


Add MAINSIZE 1.

Right-click the Main Table List View, and then click Ad d MAINSIZE . The Select size dialog box displays.

2.

Select the sizes to add, and then click OK . Use the Select / deselect all check box to select or deselect all sizes. The sizes selected display in the Main Table List View.


Add New MAINSIZE 1.

Right-click the Main Table List View, and then click Ad d New MAINSIZE. An empty box displays.

2.

Type the information in the applicable columns, using the TAB key to navigate to the next box.


Edit end type table 1.

Double-click an end type table file under End Type Tables in Catalog Data. The table displays to the right of the Catalog Data in the Main Table List View.

2.


3.


4.


For more information, see EndType Tables (on page 120).



52

Home Catalog Tab

New Category CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Ad d Tab le > New Category Adds a new category to the Data Tables folder in Catalog Data. For more information, see Data Tables folder (on page 114). Category

Specifies the component category to be added. Description

Specifies the description of the category. There are no description restrictions. When adding a category, the d ata tables folder must be either empty or m issing a category. You cannot add multiple categories of the same component type. 1.

Click the Home tab, and then click New Category

in the Add Tab le panel.

Alternatively, right-click Data Tables in Catalog Data, and then select New Category

.

The New Category dialog box displays.

2.

Click the Category list, and then select a category to add.

3.

Type a description of the category in the Description box.

4.

Click OK . The new category adds to the Data Tables folder in Catalog Data.

5.


New Group Table CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: New Group Table CADWorx Spec Editor Data Tables folder: Right-click Data Tables > New Group Data Table Adds a new group folder to the Data Tables in Catalog Data. For more information, see Data Tables folder (on page 114). This option is only available when you set the Data Table List Mode in the View tab to Group List Mode. Group Name

Specifies the name of the group folder. Description

Specifies the description of the group folder. There are no description restrictions. 1.

Click the View tab, and then select Group List Mode in the Data Table List Mode panel.

2. Select Data Tables , and then click New Group Table . Alternatively, right-click Data Tables in Catalog Data, and then select New Group Data Table. The Ad d Gr ou p Dat a Tabl e dialog box displays.


53

Home Catalog Tab 3.

Type a Group Name.

4.

Type the Description for the new group.

5. Click OK . The new group adds to the Data Tables folder in Catalog Data.


Group Data Table Manager Dialog Box CADWorx Spec Editor Data Tables folder: Right-click a data table > click Add Dat a Tabl e > click the Group ellipsis CADWorx Spec Editor View tab: Properties > select a data table > click the Group Name ellipsis in the Properties pane Adds group folders to your Data Tables folder. You see the group folders when you set the Data Table List Mode in the View tab to Group List Mode. Use the Group Name property under Properties to assign groups to specific data tables. For more information, see Common Component Properties (on page 237). Group Name

Specifies the name of the group for your data tables. When you click New , the software adds Group_1 as the default, and then increments when you click New . If you rename a group after you click New , then the software adds the missing group nam e number as the default group name. Description

Specifies the description of the group. There are n o description restrictions. New

Adds a new group to the list. Delete

Deletes a group from the list.

Data Table CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Ad d Tab le > Data Table Adds a data table to a Data Tables specific selected category in Catalog Data. This option is only available when categories have been previously created, and a particular category must be selected. For more information, see Data Tables folder (on page 114). Name

Specifies the table name. There are no r estrictions to what you can name the table. Category

Specifies the category of the data table. If you add a data table b y a group folder, then you can select a category from the list. If you have added a data table to a category, then this option becomes unavailable.


54

Home Catalog Tab Type

Specifies the component type applied to the table. For more information, see Data Tables Properties (on page 236). Size Table

Specifies the size table attached to the data table. Part Number

Specifies the part number assigned to the table. Selection Code

Specifies a selection code for the gasket and bolt data tables. The Selection Code option is only available when you add a gasket or bolt data table. For more information, see Selection Codes (on page 60), and Selection Codes Tutorial (on page 65).

Default Component Settings Group Name

Specifies a group for the data table. You can select a category from the list, or type a name in the Group box. You can also click the Group ellipsis , and then add groups to the Group Data Table Manager . The Group box defaults to the group folder you select in Data Tables . For more information, see Data Table List Mode Panel (on page 121), and Group Data Table Manager Dialog Box (on page 54). BOM Type

Specifies the default bill of m aterial type for the component. Layer Name

Specifies the default layer of the component. Color Index

Specifies the default color of the component in a drawing. Select 0 - ByLayer , 1 - Red , 2 Yellow , 3 - Green , 4 - Cyan , 5 - Blue, 6 - Magenta, 7 - Whit e/Black , from the list or type 0 through 255 to specify other colors. Topworks

Specifies the default topworks for the component. The Topworks option enables when the component requires a topwork detail. Sort Sequence

Specifies the location of the item in the bill of material. This number is pulled from the program code when adding a new component. However, when editing an existing component, the program code from the original selection stays the sam e. You have the option to leave this number as it is or change it based on the following. If you entered 999, this component is placed last in the list. If you enter 0, i t is first in the list. If you set the same sort numbers for different components in the specification, CADWorx places the components in the list in an alphabetical order.


55

Home Catalog Tab Isogen Identifier

Specifies the default identifier used by Isogen for the component. For more information, see SKEY Information in the CADWorx Plant User's Guide. Isogen SKEY

Specifies the default SKEY used b y Isogen for the component. For more information, see SKEY Information in the CADWorx Plant User's Guide. Ap pl ic abl e Gask ets

Specifies the applicable gasket for the com ponent based on the selection code. The value that you choose in the Ap pl ic abl e Gask ets list determines the gasket that inserts when you place a component pair that requires a gask et, such as flanged components, clamped components, flanged end-types, and clamped end types. You can either type the code in the Ap pl ic abl e Gask ets box, or select an available code from the list. The Appl ic abl e Gask ets option only displays when the component allo ws a gasket. To assign selection co des, see Selection Codes Tutorial (on page 65), and Assign selection codes to components without catalog defaults (on page 142). Ap pl icab le B ol ts

Specifies the applicable bolt for the component based on the selection code. The value that you choose in the Appl ic abl e Bo lt s list determines the bolt that inserts when you place a component pair that requires a bolt, such as flanged components, clamped components, flanged end-types, and clamped end types. You can either type the code in the Ap pl ic abl e Bolts box, or select an available code from the list. The Appl ic abl e Bo lt s option only displays when the component allows a bolt. To assign selection codes, see Selection Codes Tutorial (on page 65), and Assign selection codes to components without cata log defaults (on page 142). Optional Component

Sets the component to an optional component.

Default Connection Settings Ap pl y s ame en d-t yp e on all end s

Specifies that the new or selected component has all the same end types. Select the Appl y same end t ype on all ends check box, to apply the same end types to each com ponent. If you select the Ap pl y s ame en d t yp e on all end s check box, then the other three connection options are unavailable. Start

Specifies the starting point connection for the component. End

Specifies the end point connection for the component.


56

Home Catalog Tab Branch1

Specifies the first branch connection for the component. Branch1 enables when you clear the Ap pl y s ame en d t yp e on all end s check box, and the com ponent has three connection points. Branch2

Specifies the second branch end t ype for the component. Branch2 enables when you clear the Ap pl y s ame en d t yp e on all end s check box, and the com ponent has four connection points. The Default Settin gs , and the Connection Settings display in the Properties pane for the selected data table. These settings are a lso displayed for the component in the project. If you set these settings when you create the n ew data table, these settings display when you create the component in the project file. Description

Specifies the description of the table. There are no description restrictions. For all right-click and editing features, see Edit Table Features (on page 24). For descriptions of each column and category, see Data Tables Properties (on page 236).

What do you w ant to do?        

Add a new data table to a category (on page 57) Add a new data table to a gr oup folder (on page 59) Selection Codes (on page 60) Selection Codes Tutorial (on page 65) New User Shape Table (on page 88) Add new user shape (on page 89) Add new topworks table (on page 92) Edit data table features (on page 93)

Add a new data table to a category You must set the Data Table List Mode in the View tab to Category List Mode to accomplish the following steps. 1.

Click the (+) sign on the Data Tables folder in Catalog Data. The Data Tables folder expands, displaying the categories.

2.

Select a category. If you select a bolt or a gasket, the software then allows you to define the Selection Code. Also, if you select a flange, coupling, or clam ped component, the software then allows you to define the Ap pl ic abl e Gask ets and Appl ic abl e Bo lt s if you defined the Selection Codes for the gasket and bolts.

3.

Click the Home tab, and then click Data Table

on the Ad d Tab les panel. Alternatively,

right-click a category in Data Tables in Catalog Data, and then select Ad d Dat a Tabl e

.

The New Data Table dialog box displays.


57

Home Catalog Tab 4.

Type the name of the new data table in the Name box. The default can be entered for you if you skip to step 5.

5.

Click the Type list, and then select the type. The contents of the Type list depend on the category you chose at the beginning of these steps.

6.

Click the Size Table list, and then select a size table.

7.

Click the Size Table ellipsis, select the sizes to add from the Select Size list, and then click OK . Use the Select / deselect all check box to select or clear all sizes.

8.

Type the part number in the Part Number box.

9.

Specify a group. You can select a category type or a group folder name from the Group list, or type a group name in the Group box. You can also click the Group ellipsis groups through the Group Data Table Manager .

to add

You must specify a group for an y data table you create. The software then places the data table correctly when you switch to the Group List Mode in the View tab on the Data Table List Mode panel. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.

Click the BOM Type list, and then select a Bill of Material type or use the default BOM type. Click the Layer Name list, and then select a layer, or use the default layer. Click the Color Index list, and then select a color, or use the default color. Click the Topworks list, and then select the topworks when applicable. Type the Sort Sequence. Type the Isogen Identifier. Select an Isogen SKEY . Use the Optional Component check box to specify whether or not the component is optional.

18. To apply the same end type on all ends, click the Ap pl y s ame en d-t yp e on all end s check box. 19. Click the Start list, and then select a start end type for the component. Click the End , Branch 1, and Branch 2 lists, and then select t he necessary end types. If you select the Ap pl y s ame en d-t yp e to all end s check box, then you cannot select the End , Branch 1, and Branch 2 end types because they tak e the end type of the Start box. The software only activates the End , Branch 1, and Branch 2 end types when the selected component type has more than one end. 20. Enter a table description in the Description box. 21. Click OK . The new data table displays in the Main Table List View and in Catalog Data.


See Also Add MAINSIZE (on page 52) Add New MAINSIZE (on page 52) Component Tables (on page 119)


58

Home Catalog Tab

Add a new data table to a gr ou p f ol der You must set the Data Table List Mode in the View tab to Group List Mod e to accomplish the following steps. 1.

Click + on the Data Tables folder in Catalog Data. The Data Tables folder expands, displaying the group folders.

2.

Select a folder, or right-click Data Tables , and then select New Group Data Tabl e to add a new group folder. Group folders can contain multiple categories and co mponents.

3. Click the Home tab, and then click Data Table on the Add Tabl es panel. Alternatively, right-click a category in Data Tables in Catalog Data, and then select Add Data Table

.

The New Data Table dialog box displays.

4. Type the name of the new data table in the Name box. The software populates the Name box with a default if you complete steps 5 and 6 first. 5. Click the Category list, and then select a category. The Category selection determines the Type list contents. 6. Click the Type list, and then select the type. If you did not type a Name in the name box, then the software auto-populates the box for you. If you select a bolt or a gasket, the software then allows you to define the Selection Code. Also, if you select a flange, coupling, or clamped component, the software then allows you to define the Appl ic abl e Gask et and Ap pl ic abl e Bo lt if you defined the Selection Codes for the gasket and bolts. 7. Click the Size Table list, and then select a size table. 8. Click the Size Table ellipsis, select the sizes to add from the Select Size list, and then click OK . Use the Select / deselect all check box to select or clear all sizes. 9. Type the part number in the Part Number box. 10. Specify a group. You can select a category type or a group folder name from the Group list, or type a group name in the Group box. You can also click the Group ellipsis to add groups through the Group Data Table Manager . You must specify a group for an y data table you create. The software then places the data table correctly when you switch to the Group List Mode in the View tab on the Data Table List Mode panel. 11. Click the BOM Type list, and then select a Bill of Material type or use the default BOM type. 12. Click the Layer Name list, and then select a layer, or use the default layer. 13. Click the Color Index list, and then select a color, or use the default color.


59

Home Catalog Tab 14. Click the Topworks list, and then select the topworks when applicable. 15. Type the Sort Sequence. 16. Type the Isogen Identifier. 17. Select an Isogen SKEY . 18. Use the Optional Component check box to specify whether or not the c omponent is optional. 19. To apply the same end type on all ends, click the Ap pl y s ame en d-t yp e on all end s check box. 20. Click the Start list, and then select a start end type for the component. Click the End , Branch 1, and Branch 2 lists, and then select the necessary end types. If you select the Ap pl y s ame en d-t yp e to all end s check box, then you cannot select the End , Branch 1, and Branch 2 end types because they tak e the end type of the Start box. The software only activates the End , Branch 1, and Branch 2 end types when the selected component type has more than one end. 21. Enter a table description in the Description box. 22. Click OK . The new data table displays in the Main Table List View and in Catalog Data.


See Also Add MAINSIZE (on page 52) Add New MAINSIZE (on page 52) Component Tables (on page 119)

Selection Codes You can set Selection Code values for gaskets and bolts. T hese codes allow you to i nsert specific gasket components and specific bolt components when placing flanged or clamped components in CADWorx Plant. Selection codes must be set on the bolt and gasket com ponent in the project. Defining the Selection Code in the catalog for the gasket and bolt data tables only sets the defaults for the data tables, which you can then select in the project. You must have a value in the Selection Code box for the gasket and the bolt component for the software to correctly use the selection codes. If you do not have a value in the Selection Code box, but you have a value in the Ap pl ic abl e Gask ets list, or Ap pl ic abl e Bo lt s list, then the software does not insert a gasket or a bolt set on the component. When you assig n a Selection Code to a bolt or gasket in the project, you can then assign that code to clamped or flanged components in the data tables or projects using the Appl ic abl e Gask ets , and Appl ic abl e Bo lt s lists. You can use the defaults in the catalog, or you can type a code in the Selection Code box of the New and Edit Compon ent Pane in the project, to set a selection code for a particular gasket or bolt. You can set up selection codes in the following ways: 



Create a new gasket or bolt data table, and then assign a Selection Code. Then, create a new coupling or flanged data table, and assign those selection codes to the component in the Appl icab le B ol ts , and Ap pl ic abl e Gask ets boxes. Set a Selection Code in an existing Bolt or Gasket data table, and then reselect that data table in any of the bolt or gasket components that contain it in t he project. This populates the Selection Code in the New and Edit Component Pane. After that, you can select the selection codes in the Appl ic abl e Gask ets and Ap pl icab le B ol ts options for flanges and clamps in the New and Edit Component Pane.


60

Home Catalog Tab 

Select or type a Selection Code in a Gasket or Bolt component, and then assign that code to the Appl ic abl e Gask ets and Ap pl ic abl e Bo lt s options for flanges and clamps in the New and Edit Component Pane.

Set Appl ic abl e Gask ets or Appl icab le B ol ts in a Flanged, Clamp , or Cam and Grove Coupling end type table, and then select that end type table in any component. The software then assigns that Ap pl ic abl e Gask ets code, and Appl ic abl e Bo lt s code to that component overriding any code contained in the data table set for that component. You must have a Selection Code set on the gasket or bolt in the project for this option to work.



You cannot set Appl ic abl e Bo lt s codes for Clamp , or Cam and Grove Coupling end types in the catalog. To use the selection codes you must turn on the Ap pl y B ol t In ser ti on Rul e, and the Appl y Gasket Insertion Rule.


Add a gasket data table with a defa ult selection code (on page 61)



Add a bolt data table with a default selection code (on page 62)



Add a flanged or clamped component data t able (on page 63)



Assign selection codes in the project fro m defaults in the catalog (on page 64)



Selection Codes Tutorial (on page 65)

Add a gasket data table with a default selecti on code 1.

Click (+) on the Data Tables folder in Catalog Data. The Data Tables folder expands displaying the categories or groups depending on your view selection.

2. Select Gaskets\Bolts\Welds. If you set your Data Table List Mode in the View tab to Group List Mode, then you must right-click Gaskets/Bolts/Welds, and then select Add Data Tab le . You can then continue to step 5. 3. Click (+) on the Gaskets\Bolts\Welds folder. The folder expands, displaying the data tables.

4. Select Gaskets , right-click, and then select Ad d Dat a Table . The New Data Table dialog box displays with defaults for Name, Category , Type, BOM Type, and Color Index.

5. Type a Name. If you set your Data Table List Mode in the View tab to Group List Mode, then you must select a Category, and Type after typing a name. 6.

Select a Size Table.

7. Click the Size Table ellipsis click OK .

, select the sizes to add from the Select Size list, and then

Use the Select / deselect all check box to select or clear all sizes.


61

Home Catalog Tab 8.

Type the Part Number .

9.

Type the Selection Code for the gasket.

10. Update the BOM Type list, if needed. 11. Select the Layer Name. 12. Update the Color Index list if needed. 13. Type the Sort Sequence. 14. Type the Isogen Identifier. 15. Select an Isogen SKEY . 16. Select whether or not the component is an optional component, by selecting the Optional Component check box. 17. Type the Description for the table. 18. Click OK . The new data table displays in the Main Table List View and in Catalog Data.

Next, see Add a bolt data table with a default selection code (on page 62).

Add a bol t data table with a defaul t selecti on co de 1.

Click (+) on the Data Tables folder in Catalog Data. The Data Tables folder expands displaying the categories or groups depending on your view selection.

2. Select Gaskets\Bolts\Welds. If you set your Data Table List Mode in the View tab to Group List Mode, then you must right-click Gaskets/Bolts/Welds, and then select Add Data Tab le . You can then continue to step 5. 3. Click (+) on the Gaskets\Bolts\Welds folder. The folder expands, displaying the data tables.

4. Select Bolts , right-click, and then select Add Dat a Tabl e. The New Data Table dialog box displays with defaults for Name, Category , Type, BOM Type, and Color Index.

5. Type a Name. If you set your Data Table List Mode in the View tab to Group List Mode, then you must select a Category, and Type after typing a name. 6.

Select a Size Table.

7. Click the Size Table ellipsis click OK .


Use the Select / deselect all check box to select or clear all sizes. 8.

Type a Part Number .

9.

Type the Selection Code for the bolt.

10. Update the BOM Type list if needed.


62

Home Catalog Tab 11. Select a Layer Name. 12. Update the Color Index list if needed. 13. Type the Sort Sequence. 14. Type the Isogen Identifier. 15. Select an Isogen SKEY . 16. Select whether or not the component is an optional component, by selecting the Optional Component check box. 17. Type the Description for the table. 18. Click OK . The new data table displays in the Main Table List View and in Catalog Data.

Next, see Add a flanged or clamped component data t able (on page 63).

Add a flanged or cl amped component data table 1.

2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Click (+) on the Data Tables folder in Catalog Data. The Data Tables folder expands displaying the categories, or groups depending on you view selection. Select Flanges or Couplings, right-click, and then select Add Data Tabl e. The New Data Table dialog box displays. Type a Name. Select a Type. Select a Size Table. Click the Size Table ellipsis click OK .


Use the Select / deselect all check box to select or clear all sizes. 7. Type the Part Number . 8. Select a group, type a name in the Group box, or click the Group ellipsis new group. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.

to create a

Update the BOM Type list if needed. Select the Layer Name. Update the Color Index list if needed. Type the Sort Sequence. Type the Isogen Identifier. Select an Isogen SKEY . Select gasket codes from the Ap pl ic abl e Gask ets list. Select bolt codes from the Ap pl ic abl e Bo lt s list. If necessary, select Optional Component .

18. Type the Description of the table. 19. Click OK . The new data table displays in the Main Table List View and in Catalog Data.

Next, see Assign selection codes in the project fr om defaults in the catalog (on page 64).


63

Home Catalog Tab Assi gn selectio n codes i n the projec t from default s i n the catalog 1.

Open a project connected to a catalog that contains default selection codes in the bolts and gaskets.

2.

Click Yes to update the project from the base catalog. Alternatively, you can click Review Update , review the tables with updates, click Force Update All , click OK , click OK again, and then click Yes .

3.


4. Expand Gaskets/Bolts/Welds. 5.

Select a bolt. Alternatively, you can right-click, select Ad d , and then fill in the data for a bolt in the New component pane.

6.

Select the data table containing the default selection code. Alternatively, you can type an alphanumeric value in the Selection Codes box. The data in the Edit component pane updates from the selected data table, and the Selection Code box populates with the default selection code.

If you are editing a com ponent and you reselect the data table, the Default Component Settings and Default Connection Setting s stored in the catalog u pdate the data in the New and Edit Component pane. 7.

Change any data that you need to update in the Edit component pane.

8.

Click Appl y . If you added a new component, click Add .

9.

Select a gasket. Alternatively, you can right-click, select Add , and then fill in the data for a gasket in the New comp onent pane.

10. Select the data table containing the default selection code. Alternatively, you can type an alphanumeric value in the Selection Codes box. The data in the Edit component pane updates from the selected data table, and the Selection Code box populates with the default selection code.

If you are editing a com ponent and you reselect the data table, the Default Component Settings and Default Connection Settin gs stored in the catalog u pdate the data in the New and Edit Com ponent pane. 11. Change any data that you need to update in the Edit component pane. 12. Click Appl y. If you added a new component, click Add . 13. Expand Flanges . 14. Select a flange, such as Flange Weld Neck . Alternatively, you can right-click, select Add , and then fill in the data for a flange in the New comp onent pane. 15. Change any data that you need to update in the Edit component pane. 16. Select selection codes from the Appl ic abl e Gask ets list. 17. Select selection codes from the Appl ic abl e Bo lt s list. 18. Click Ap pl y . If you added a new component, click Add . 19. Click File > Save. 20. To insert components that use selection codes, see Selection Codes Tutorial (on page 65).


64

Home Catalog Tab

Selection Codes Tutorial The following tutorial walks you through setting u p selection codes from the catalog, to the project, and then into the drawing. You do not have to set selection codes in the catalog. You can go to the project and set selection codes on each gasket or bolt. For more information on setting the selection codes without defining them in the catalog, see Assign selection codes to components without catalog defaults (on page 142).

Topics Set selection code defaults............................................................ ……… 65 Assign gaskets and bolts to flange weld neck in the catalog ........ ………66 Set selection codes on gask et and bolt components in the project………66 Assign gaskets and bolts to the flange in the project .................... ………68 Assign gaskets and bolts to valves in the project .......................... ……… 68 Setup a drawing ............................................................................. ……… 69 Insert components with different selection codes assigned .......... ………69 Selection codes in user shapes ..................................................... ……… 75 Assign gaskets and bolts to equipment nozzles............................ ……… 78 Insert piping components on equipment containing selection c odes…….83 Insert and route from a generic nozzle containing selection codes………86

Set selection c ode defaults 1.

Open the Specification Editor.

2.

Click File > Open , and then open the Tutorial_Inch_Catalog.cat.

3. Expand Data Tables , and then expand Gaskets/Bolts/Welds. You can also create new bolts and gasket data tables, and then assign the Selection Code when creating the new data tabl es. If you need to create a n ew data table, see Add a new data table to a cat egory (on page 57), or Add a new data table to a group folder (on page 59). 4. Expand Stud Bolts , and then click BLT_150 . 5. In Properties , type BLT_150 in the Selection Code box, and change the Color Index to Red . 6.

Click in another field to set the values.

7.

Click BLT_150A .

8. In Properties , type BLT_150A in the Selection Code box, and change the Color Index to Green . 9.

Click in another field to set the values.

10. Click BLT_150B . 11. In Properties , type BLT_150B in the Selection Code box, and change the Color Index to Yellow . 12. Click in another field to set the values. 13. Expand Gasket , and then double-click GAS_150. 14. In Properties , type GAS_150 in the Selection Code box, and change the Color Index to Yellow .


65

Home Catalog Tab 15. Click in another field to set the values. 16. Click GAS_150A. 17. In Properties , type GAS_150A in the Selection Code box, and change the Color Index to Green . 18. Click in another field to set the values. 19. Click GAS_150B. 20. In Properties , type GAS_150B in the Selection Code box, and change the Color Index to Red . 21. Click in another field to set the values. 22. Click File > Save. Next, Assign gaskets and bolts to flange weld neck in the catalog (on page 66).

Assi gn gaskets and bol ts to fl ange weld neck in the catalog 1. Expand Flanges , and then expand Flange Weld Neck . You can also create a new flange data table, and then assign the Ap pl ic abl e Bolts and Appl ic abl e Gask ets value while creating that flanged data table. You must have a value in the Selection Code of the gasket and bolt data tables before you can select a value for the Appl ic abl e Gask ets or Appl icab le B ol ts list. If you need to create a new data table, see Add a new data table to a category (on page 57), or Add a new data table to a group folder (on page 59). 2.

Click FLG_WN_150 .

3. In Properties , select GAS_150 from the Appl icab le Gask ets list. 4. In Properties , select BLT_150 from the Appl ic abl e Bo lt s list. 5.

Click FLG_WN_150A.

6. In Properties , select GAS_150A from the Appl ic abl e Gask ets list. 7.

In Properties , select BLT_150A from the Appl ic abl e Bo lt s list.

8.

Click FLG_WN_150B .

9.

In Properties , select GAS_150B from the Ap pl ic abl e Gask ets list.

10. In Properties , select BLT_150B from the Appl ic abl e Bo lt s list. 11. Click File > Save. Next, Set selection codes on gasket and bolt components in the project (on page 66).

Set selection codes on gasket and bolt com ponents in t he project 1.

If you do not have the Specification Editor open, then double-click the icon on the desktop.

2.

Click File > Open , then open the Tutorial_Inch.prj .

3. Click Yes to update the project from the base catalog. Alternatively, you can click Review Update, review the tables with updates, click Force Update All , click OK , click OK again, and then click Yes . 4.

Double-click 150, and then expand Gaskets/Bolts/Welds.


66

Home Catalog Tab 5.

Click STUD BOLTS W/ NUTS, LENGTH_CMP_TBL LG, ASTM A193/194 GR B7/2H.

6. Select BLT_150A from the Data Table list. The Selection Code box populates.

7.

Click Appl y .

8.

Click STUD BOLTS W/ NUTS, LENGTH_CMP_TBL L G, ASTM A193/194 GR B7/2H Part A.

9. Select BLT_150B from the Data Table list. The Selection Code box populates.

10. Click Appl y . 11. Click STUD BOLTS W/ NUTS, LENGTH_CMP_TBL L G, ASTM A193/194 GR B7/2H Part B. 12. Select BLT_150 from the Data Table list. The Selection Code box populates.

13. Click Appl y. 14. Click STUD BOLTS W/ NUTS, LENGTH_CMP_TBL L G, ASTM A193/194 GR B7/2H Part C. 15. Remove the Selection Code, and leave it blank. 16. Click Appl y . 17. Click GASKET, 150LB, 1/8" THK . 18. Select GAS_150 from the Data Table list. The Selection Code box populates.

19. Click Ap pl y . 20. Click GASKET, 150LB, 1/8" THK Part A . 21. Select GAS_150A from the Data Table list. The Selection Code box populates.

22. Click Ap pl y . 23. Click GASKET, 150LB, 1/8" THK Part B. 24. Select GAS_150B from the Data Table list. The Selection Code box populates.

25. Click Ap pl y . 26. Click GASKET, 150LB, 1/8" THK Part C. 27. Remove the Selection Code, and leave it blank 28. Click Appl y . 29. Click File > Save. Next, Assign gaskets and bolts to the flange i n the project (on page 68).


67

Home Catalog Tab Assi gn gaskets and bol ts to the flange in the proj ect 1. Expand Flanges . If you are not in the 150 specification, double-click to open it, and then expand Flanges . 2.

Click FLG WELD NECK, 150LB , SCH XS, ASTM A105.

3.

In the Edit component pane, select GAS_150 from the Appl ic abl e Gask ets list and BLT_150 from the Appl ic abl e Bo lt s list.

4.

Click Appl y .

5.

Click FLG WELD NECK, 150LB, SCH XS, ASTM A105 Part A

6.

In the Edit component pane, reselect FLG_WN_150 from the Data Table list. The Ap pl ic abl e Gask ets and Ap pl icab le B ol ts boxes populate.

7.

In the Edit component pane, add GAS_150A from the Appl ic abl e Gask ets list and BLT_150A from the Ap pl ic abl e Bo lt s list.

8.

Click Appl y .

9. Click FLG WELD NECK, 150LB, SCH XS, ASTM A105 Part B . 10. In the Edit component pane, select GAS_150 and GAS_150B in the Appl ic abl e Gask ets list. 11. Select BLT_150A and BLT_150B in the Appl ic abl e Bol ts list. 12. Click Appl y. 13. Click FLG WELD NECK, 150LB, SCH XS, ASTM A105 Part C. 14. In the Edit component pane, type GAS_150, GAS_150A , and GAS_150B in the Ap pl ic abl e Gask ets list. 15. Then, type BLT_150, BLT_150A , and BLT_150B in the Ap pl ic abl e Bo lt s list. The Ap pl ic abl e Gask ets and Ap pl ic abl e Bo lt s boxes populate. 16. Click Ap pl y . 17. Click File > Save. Next, Assign gaskets and bolts to valves in the pr oject (on page 68).

Assi gn gaskets and bol ts to val ves in the project 1. Expand Valves . If you are not in the 150 specification, double-click to open it, and then expand Valves . 2.

Click GATE VALVE, FLG, 150LB .

3.

In the Edit component pane, select GAS_150 from the Appl ic abl e Gask ets list and BLT_150 from the Appl ic abl e Bo lt s list.

4.

Click Appl y.

5.

Click the Connection list , and then select End .

6. Select GAS_150B from the Appl ic abl e Gask ets list and BLT_150A from the Ap pl ic abl e Bolts list. 7.

Click Appl y.

8.

Click File > Save.

Next, Setup a drawing (on page 69).


68

Home Catalog Tab Setup a drawing 1.

Open CADWorx Plant.

2.

Click File > New .

3. Select Imperial.dwt (Metric.dwt.). 4. Click Setup

.

5. Click Configuration Settings . 6. Select SpecificationDirectory , and then click the ellipsis

.

7. Navigate to [Product Folder]\Plant\Tutorial\Spec, and then click OK . 8. Select Specification / Size. 9. Click Browse. 10. Select Tutorial_Inch.prj (Tutorial_Metric.prj) 11. Click 150 (150 MM) in Specifications , and then click 4" (100) for main and 2" (50) for reduction. 12. Click Piping Rules . 13. Set Appl y Gas ket Ins ert io n Ru le and Appl y B ol t In ser ti on Rul e to Flanges Only . 14. Set Appl y Fl ang e Ins ert io n Ru le to Show Options . 15. Click Appl y an d Cl os e. Next Insert components with different selection codes assigned (on page 69).

Insert components with d ifferent selection codes assigned In the following example you insert a gate valve with Start connection Ap pl ic abl e Gask ets set to GAS_150, the Ap pl ic abl e Bo lt s set to BLT_150, the End connection Appl ic abl e Gask et set to GAS_150B, and the Ap pl ic abl e Bo lt s set to BLT_150A . You then insert flanges on each side to better understand the placement of gask et and bolts by selection code settings. 1.

Click Spec View

.

The CADWorx Spec View palette displays.

2.

Click GATE VALVE, FLG, 150LB .

3.

Click the first point in the drawing to place the valve.


69

Home Catalog Tab 4.

Click to the right to insert the gate valve in the X direction.

The valve places in the drawing.

In Assign gaskets and bolts to the fl ange in the project (on page 68) we set Appl ic abl e Gask ets and Ap pl ic abl e Bo lt s on Flanges , and then in Assign gaskets and bolts to valves in t he project (on page 68) we set Appl ic abl e Bo lt s and Appl ic abl e Gask ets on Valves . In the following exercise, you place flanges on the g ate valve to see how your gaskets and bolts display. If you want to see your bolts and gaskets like the images below, type CONVERTENHANCED on the command line, press ENTER, select the valve, and then press ENTER to finish. 1.

Click FLG WELD NECK, 150LB , SCH STD, ASTM A105.

2.

Click the start center point of the valve in the drawing.


70

Home Catalog Tab The flange places and the software automatically inserts the gasket and bolts based on the selection codes.

1. Selection Code = BLT_150 2. Selection Code = GAS_150 When we place the flange on the start point of the valve, the software looked at the Ap pl ic abl e Gaskets and Appl ic abl e Bo lt s data on both the valve and the flange. We set the data on the gate valve start point as GAS_150, and BLT_150. For the flange, we set the gasket as GAS_150 and the bolt as BLT_150 . The values that we set on the valve and flange are the Selection Code values set in the Gasket and Bolt component themselves. Let's review the data on the gask et and bolt component. 1.

Double-click the bolt. The Component Edit dialog box displays.

2.

Look at the Long annotation .

You can see that this is the correct bolt, because it does not have the word Part at the end of the long annotation. The other gaskets and bolts all had the word Part with a letter after the annotation. 3.

Double-click the gasket. The Component Edit dialog box displays.

4.

Look at the Long annotation .

You can see that this is the correct gasket, because it does not h ave the word Part at the end of the long annotation. T he other gaskets and bolts all had the word Part with a letter after the annotation.


71

Home Catalog Tab Next, insert the same flange on the end point of the gate valve. 1.

Click FLG WELD NECK, 150LB , SCH STD, ASTM A105.

2.

Click the end point of the valve in the drawing.

The software does not insert any gaskets or welds and prompts you that the software did not find a matching selection code.

The reason for this is that we set t he End connection Ap pl ic abl e Gask ets to GAS_150B, and Appl ic abl e Bo lt s to BLT_150A, but the flange only allows for GAS_150 and BLT_150 gasket and bolts. Next, insert the Part A flange on both ends. 1.

Erase the existing flanges, bolts, and gaskets.

2.

Click FLG WELD NECK, 150LB, SCH STD, ASTM A105 Part A .

3.

Click the start point of the valve in the drawing.

The software does not insert any gaskets or welds and prompts you that the software did not find a matching selection code.

Remember, we only allowed for BLT_150 and GAS_150 to be used on the start point of the Gate Valve. So, again nothing inserts.


72

Home Catalog Tab Next, insert the same flange on the end point of the gate valve. 1.

Click FLG WELD NECK, 150LB, SCH STD, ASTM A105 Part A .

2.


The flange places and the software automatically inserts the bolts based on the selection codes, but does not insert the gasket.

1. Selection Code = BLT_150A When we place the flange on the end point of the valve, the software looked at the Ap pl icab le Gask ets and Ap pl ic abl e Bolts data on both the valve and the flange. We set the data on the g ate valve end point as GAS_150B , and BLT_150A . For the Part A flange we set the gasket to allow GAS_150A and the bolt as BLT_150A . So, only the BLT_150A inserts because the valve only allo ws for the GAS_150B gasket. You can again double-click the bolt to review the component data and se e the Part A bolt. Next, insert the Part B flange on both ends. 1.


2.

Click FLG WELD NECK, 150LB, SCH STD, ASTM A105 Part B .

3.

Click the start point of the valve in the drawing.


73

Home Catalog Tab The software inserts the gasket, but does not insert the bolt.

1. Selection Code = GAS_150 When we place the flange on the start point of the valve, the software looked at the Appl ic abl e Gaskets and Ap pl ic abl e Bo lt s data on both the valve and the flange. We set the data on the gate valve start point as GAS_150, and BLT_150. When we place the flange on the start point, the valve only allows the GAS_150 to be placed. The flange actually would allow for GAS_150B, and GAS_150, and BLT_150A , and BLT_150B. The valve prevents the insertion of the b olt because it does not match.

Next, insert the same flange on the End point of the gate valve. 1.

Click FLG WELD NECK, 150LB, SCH STD, ASTM A105 Part B.

2.


The software inserts the gaskets and bolts.

1. Selection Code = BLT_150A 2. Selection Code = GAS_150B When we place the flange on the end point of the valve, the software looked at the Appl ic abl e Gaskets and Ap pl ic abl e Bo lt s data on both the valve and the flange. We set the data on the gate valve end point as GAS_150B , and BLT_150A . For the flange, we set the g asket as GAS_150, and GAS_150B and the bolt as BLT_150A, and B LT_150B . The software takes the gasket and bolt that matches between the two components and places them in the drawing.


74

Home Catalog Tab Next, insert the Part C flange on both ends. 1.


2.

Click FLG WELD NECK, 150LB , SCH STD, ASTM A105 Part C, and place on both sides. You final drawing should look like the image below:

1. Selection Code = GAS_150 2. Selection Code = BLT_150 3. Selection Code = BLT_150A 4. Selection Code = GAS_150B

Selection c odes in u ser shapes Before you can complete the instructions below, you must complete Set selection code defaults (on page 65), Assign gaskets and bolts to flange weld neck in the catalog (on page 66), Set selection codes on gasket and bolt components in the project (on page 66), Assign gaskets and bolts to the flange in the project (on page 68), and Setup a drawing (on page 69). If you want to add a valve to the end of your user shape, you need to also complete Assign gaskets and bolts to valves in the project (on page 68). 1.

Create a 3D model similar to the one below. Make sure you insert FLG WELD NECK, 150LB, SCH STD, ASTM A105 Part B as the end flange on your user shape.


75

Home Catalog Tab 2.

Click Create ENTER.

. Alternatively, type USERCREATE on the command line, and press

The Define User Shape dialog box displays.

3.

Type the name of the user shape in the Name box.

4.

Select a group for the user shape from the Group list.

5. Select a user shape number in the Number list. The available numbers are 1 through 5. 6. Select a specification in the Specification list. 7. Select the color of the user shape in the Color list. 8. Type the layer number of the component in the Layer box. 9. If available, select the material information for the user shape in the Material list. 10. Type the density of the component in the Density box. 11. Type the weight of the component in the Weight box. 12. Type the length of the component in the Length box. 13. If you want the user shape saved in the catalog, then select the Save to catalog check box. This is the default setting. 14. Select Optional Component to make this component an optional component. 15. Select Block in the Type list. 16. Select the main size in the Main Size list. 17. If the component reduces, select the Reducing check box. The Reducin g Size list becomes available.

18. Select the reducing size in the Reducing Size list. Do not mix reducing and non-reducing components in the same file. 19. Click Select 3D Soli d, and follow the prompts. 20. Click Define Connection s . Pick direction.

21. Select a direction in the drawing. Pick connection 2 or .

22. For the second connection, select the side with the flange. Then, press ENTER to finish. 23. Select the End Type for Connection 1. 24. Select 2 from the Connection list. 25. Click the End Type list, click Flanged , and then select FL_150. 26. Select GAS_150B from the Ap pl ic abl e Gask ets list. 27. Select BLT_150A from the Ap pl icab le B ol ts list. 28. Click OK . The software creates the user shape.


76

Home Catalog Tab 29. Click Spec View

.

30. Click + next to User Shape. 31. Click the user shape, and then place it in the drawing.

32. Insert [4"] FLG WELD NECK, 150LB, SCH STD, ASTM A105 Part B Part B flange.

on the end of the

The software inserts the correct bolts and gaskets.


77

Home Catalog Tab Assi gn gaskets and bol ts to equip ment nozzles Before you can complete the following i nstructions you must complete Set selection codes on gasket and bolt components in the project (on page 66), and Assign gaskets and bolts to the flange in the project (on page 68). 1. Open CADWorx Equipment, and create a 3D equipment model. 2. Click Skirt

.

3. Type V-1016 in the Enter equipment name box, and then click OK . The skirt inserts in the drawing.

4. Click Elliptical Head

.

The elliptical head inserts in the 3D model.

5. Click Cylinder

.

The cylinder inserts in the 3D model.


78

Home Catalog Tab 6.

Click Cone

.

The cone inserts in the 3D model.

7.

Click Elliptical Head

.

The elliptical head inserts in the 3D model.

8.

Click Components .

9.

Click Cylinder in the list.


79

Home Catalog Tab 10. Click + next to Cylinder . 11. Type 240 in the Length box.

12. Click + next to Cone. 13. Type 84 in the Length box.


80

Home Catalog Tab 14. Click Cylinder in the list. 15. Click Nozzle

.

The nozzle inserts in the 3D model.

16. Click + next to Nozzle.


81

Home Catalog Tab 17. Type 120 in the Distance box.

18. Click Standard Nozzle Details , and then click the ellipsis

.

19. Type GAS_150A, GAS_150B in the Ap pl ic abl e Gask ets box. 20. Type BLT_150, BLT_150C in the Appl ic abl e Bo lt s box. 21. Click OK . 22. Click File > Save As . 23. Type V-1016 in the File name box, and then click Save. Next, Insert piping components on equipment containing selection codes (on page 83).


82

Home Catalog Tab Insert piping components on equipment containing selection codes 1.

Open CADWorx Plant.

2.

Click New , select a template, and then click Open .

3.

Set a southeast isometric view.

4. Type XREF on the command line. The External References palette References palette displays.

5. Click At tac h DWG

.

The Select Reference File dialog File dialog box displays.

6. Navigate to the V-1016 drawing, and then click Open . The At The At tac h Ex ter nal Refer enc e dialog box displays. On-screen check box under Insertion point, and then click OK . 7. Clear the Specify On-screen The equipment displays in the drawing.

8. Click Setup

.

9. Click Configuration Settings .


83

Home Catalog Tab 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20.

Select SpecificationDirectory , and then click the ellipsis . Navigate to [Product Folder]\Plant\Tutorial\Spec, and then click OK . Select Specification / Size. Click Browse. Select Tutorial_Inch.prj (Tutorial_Metric.prj ) Click 150 (150 MM) in Specifications , and then click 4" (100) for main and 2" (50) for reduction. Click Piping Rules . Ap pl y Gas ket Ins ert io n Ru le and Ap pl y B ol t Ins ert io n Ru le to Flanges Only . Set Appl Ap pl y Fl ang e Inser In ser ti on Rul e to Show Options . Set Appl Ap pl y an d Cl os e. Click Appl Zoom in on the nozzle on the the vessel.

Au to Rou te 21. Click Auto . 22. Select the center on the the nozzle.

Piping displays in the 3D model attached to the nozzle.


84

Home Catalog Tab 23. Type 2' , and then press ENTER. The software prompts you to select a flange.

24. Select [4"] FLG WELD NECK, 150LB, SCH STD, ASTM A105 Part A .

The software inserts the flange adding the bolts and gaskets that match the values set in the flange and the equipment.

If more than one gasket or bolt code matches, then the software places the first G ask ets , and Ap pl ic abl e Bo lt s data. selection code listed in the Ap pl i cab le Gask


85

Home Catalog Tab In the image below we set the e quipment nozzle to accept the GAS_150A, and GAS_150B gaskets and the BLT_150 , and BLT_150C bolts. In the Specification Ed itor, we set the Part A flange to accept the GAS_150, and GAS_150A , and the BLT_150, and BLT_150A.The software inserts the GAS_150A , which is the Part A gasket in the specification, and inserts the BLT_150 , which is the Part B bolt from the specification.

Insert and route from a generic nozzle containin g selection c odes Before you can complete this example, you must first complete the Selection Codes Tutorial (on page 65) page 65) which which sets up the selection codes. 1.

Open CADWorx Plant.

2.

Click File > New .

3. Select Imperial.dwt (Metric.dwt.). 4. Click Setup

.

5. Click Configuration Settings . 6. Select SpecificationDirectory , and then click the ellipsis

.

7. Navigate to [Product Folder]\Plant\Tutorial\Spec, and then click OK . 8. Select Specification / Size. 9. Click Browse. 10. Select Tutorial_Inch.prj (Tutorial_Metric.prj ) 11. Click 150 (150 MM) in Specifications , and then click 4" (100) for main and 2" (50) for reduction. 12. Click Piping Rules . Ap pl y Gas ket Ins ert io n Ru le and Appl Ap pl y B ol t In ser ti on Rul e to Flanges Only . 13. Set Appl Ap pl y Fl ang e Ins ert io n Ru le to Show Options . 14. Set Appl

15. Click Ap pl y an d Cl os e.


86

Home Catalog Tab 16. Click Nozzle Generic Attach and press ENTER.

. Alternatively, type ENGENERIC on the command line,

17. Select the nozzle flange face point in the drawing. 18. Select the nozzle buttweld buttweld end point in the drawing. The Nozzle Nozzle Generic Generic Attach (Edit) (Edit) dialog dialog box displays. V-1016 Futur e in the Description box. 19. Type Equip V-1016 V-1016 Futur e in the Equipment Name box. 20. Type V-1016

21. Type 0.3370 in the Flange Thickness box. This must be higher than zero. 22. Leave the Flange Type as RFWN. 23. Select GAS_150, GAS_150A , GAS_150B , and GAS_150C from the Ap pl ic abl e Gask ets list. 24. Select BLT_150 , BLT_150A , and BLT_150B from the Ap pl ic abl e Bo lt s list. 25. Click OK . The generic nozzle places in the drawing.

26. Select the generic nozzle in the drawing. drawing. A plus grip

displays.

27. Click the plus grip point

.

A list of available component types displ ays.


87

Home Catalog Tab 28. Select Flanges , and then select [4"] (100) FLG WELD NECK, 150LB , SCH STD, ASTM A105 Par t A.

The selected component inserts with the gasket and bolt allowed by the selected flange.

New User Shape Table CADWorx Spec Editor Catalog Data: Right-click any data table while in Group List Mode > Ad d User U ser Shap es Tab le Adds a user shape table to to a group folder in Catalog Data. This option is available when you set Data Data Table List Mode to Group List Mode. If you set Data Table List Mode to Category List Mode, then you must right-click the User Shape category, and then select Add Ad d Data D ata Tab le . The New User Shape Table dialog box displays when you do either of these actions. Name Specifies the user shape table name. T here are no restrictions to what you can nam e the table. Type Specifies the user shape number for the user shape you are creating. Size Table Specifies the size table attached to the user shape table. You can click the ellipsis to display the Select Size dialog box, and then select the sizes you need. Part Number

Specifies the part number assigned to the user sh ape table. Reducing component

Specifies the shape a reducing component. You can create shapes with multiple reductions. For more information, see User Shapes (on page 286) page 286)..


88

Home Catalog Tab Default Settings Group Name Specifies a group for the user shape table. You can select a category from the list, or type a

name in the Group box. You can also click the Group ellipsis , and then add groups to the Group Data Table Manager . The Group box defaults to the group folder you select in Data Tables . For more information, see Data Table List Mode Panel (on page 121), and Group Data Table Manager Dialog Box (on page 54). BOM Type Specifies the default bill of m aterial type for the user shape. Layer Name Specifies the default layer of the user shape. Color Index Specifies the default color of the com ponent in a drawing. Select 0 - ByLayer , 1 - Red , 2 Yellow , 3 - Green , 4 - Cyan , 5 - Blue, 6 - Magenta, 7 - Whit e/Black , from the list or type 0 through 255 to specify other colors. Topworks Specifies the default topworks for the component. The Topworks option enables when the component requires a topwork detail. Sort Sequence Specifies the location of the item in the bill of material. This number is pulled from the program code when adding a new component. However, when editing an existing component, the program code from the original selection stays the sam e. You have the option to leave this number as it is or change it based on the following. If you entered 999, this component is placed last in the list. If you enter 0, i t is first in the list. If you set the same sort numbers for different components in the specification, CADWorx places the components in the list in an alphabetical order. Isogen Identifier Specifies the default identifier used b y Isogen for the component. For more information, see SKEY Information in the CADWorx Plant User's Guide. Isogen SKEY Specifies the default SKEY used b y Isogen for the component. For more information, see SKEY Information in the CADWorx Plant User's Guide. Optional Component Sets the component to an optional component. Description Specifies the description of the table. There are no description restrictions.

Add new user shape Adds a user shape to the specification. If Spec Editor is already displayed skip to step 2. 1.

Click Start Spec Edito r desktop.

on the spec view palette. Alternatively, click Spec Edito r on the

The Specification Editor software opens.

2.

Click File > Open . The Open File dialog box displays.


89

Home Catalog Tab 3.

Select a catalog, and then click Open . The Catalog Data window displays.

4.

Click the (+) sign on the Data Tables folder. The Data Tables list displays.

5.

If your Data Table List Mode is set to Category Li st Mode, then right-click User Shapes, and select Add Dat a Tabl e

.

The New User Shape Table displays.

OR If your Data Table List Mode is set to Group List Mode, then right-click a group folder, and select Ad d Us er Sh ape Tab le . The software places the user shape in t he group folder that you select. The New User Shape Table displays.

6.


7.

Select a user type in the Type list.

8.

Select a size table in the Size Table list. You can select and clear multiple sizes by clicking the Size Table ellipsis.

9. Type the part number in the Part Number box. 10. Type the user shape folder name in the Usershape Folder box. 11. Select the Reducing Component check box if you want this to be a reducing component. 12. Select a Bill of Material type from the BOM Type list. 13. Select a layer from the Layer Name list. 14. Select a color from the Color Index list. 15. Type a Sort Sequence. 16. Type an Isogen Identifier . 17. Select an SKEY from the Isogen SKEY list. 18. Select the Optional Component check box if you want to make this user shape optional. 19. Type the description of the user shape in the Description box. 20. Click OK . The user shape file displays under the User Shape category in Catalog Data when your Data Table List Mode is set to Category L ist Mode. OR The user shape file displays under the selected group folder in the Catalog Data when your Data Table List Mode is set to Group List Mode.


See Also Add MAINSIZE (on page 52) Add New MAINSIZE (on page 52)


90

Home Catalog Tab

New Topwo rks Table CADWorx Spec Editor Catalog Data: Right-click Topworks category > Add Dat a Tabl e Adds a topworks data table to the Topworks category in Catalog Data. Name Specifies the user shape table name. T here are no restrictions to what you can nam e the table. Sub Folder Specifies a subfolder for the added topworks. You can select a topworks type from the list,

or type a name in the Sub Folder box. You can also click the Sub Folder ellipsis , and then add subfolders to the Topwork Sub Folder Manager . For more information, see Add Sub Folder (on page 91) and Topwork Sub Folder Manager (on page 91). Type Specifies the type of topworks to add. Size Table Specifies the size table attached to the topworks table. You can click the ellipsis to display the Select Size dialog box, and then select the sizes you need. Description Specifies the description of the topworks. There are no restrictions on the description.


Add Sub Folder (on page 91) Topwork Sub Folder Manager (on page 91) Add new topworks table (on page 92)

Add Sub Fold er CADWorx Spec Editor Catalog Data: Right-click Topworks category > Add Su b Fo ld er Adds a subfolder to the Topworks category in Catalog Data. Sub Folder Specifies a subfolder for the added topworks. After you create a subfolder, you can add topworks data tables to the subfolder. Description Specifies a description for the subfolder.

Topwork Sub Folder Manager CADWorx Spec Editor Data Tables folder: Right-click the Topworks category > click Add Data Table > click the Sub Folder ellipsis CADWorx Spec Editor View tab: Properties > select a Topworks data table > click the Sub Folder ellipsis in the Properties pane Adds subfolder selections for your Topworks category. You see the subfolders when you create a new Topworks or view the Topworks properties. Use the Sub Folder property under Properties to move specific Topworks data tables to a different subfolder. For more information, see Topworks (on page 282).


91

Home Catalog Tab Sub Folder Name

Specifies the name of the subfolder for your topworks data tables. When you click New , the software adds Sub_Folder_1 as the default, and then increments each time you click New . If you rename a subfolder after you click New , then the software adds the missing subfolder name number as the default subfolder name. Description

Specifies the description of the group. There are no description restrictions. New

Adds a new subfolder to the list. Delete

Deletes a subfolder from the list.

Add new topwork s t able 1.

Click the (+) sign on the Data Tables folder in Catalog Data. The Data Tables file expands displaying the categories.

2. Select Topworks. 3. Click the Home tab, and then click Data Table

on the Add Tabl e panel. Alternatively,

right-click Topworks in Catalog Data, and then select Ad d Dat a Tabl e

.

The New Topwor ks Table dialog box displays.

4. Type the name of the new topworks table in the Name box. 5. Specify a Sub Folder . You can select a topworks type or a created subfolder name from the Sub Folder list, or type a sub folder name in the Sub Folder box. Click the Sub Folder ellipsis to add subfolders to the Topwork Sub Folder Manager . For more information, see Topwork Sub Folder Manager (on page 91). 6. Click the Type list, and then select the type. 7. Click the Size Table list, and then select a size table. Next, click the Size Table ellipsis, select the sizes to add from the Select Size list, and then click OK . 8. Enter a description in the Description box. 9. Click OK . The new topworks table displays under the designated sub folder in Catalog Data.


See Also Add MAINSIZE (on page 52) Add New MAINSIZE (on page 52)


92

Home Catalog Tab

Edit data table featur es Right-click Menu Ad d User Part Num ber Col um n

Automatically adds the User Part Number Colum n which can be used to assign component record-level part numbers (PTN)s to component data. Ad d Cu st om Data To Al l Tabl es

Displays the New Field dialog box enabling you to create a new field for all the components in the Data Tables. For more information, see New Field Dialog Box (on page 116). Remove All Tables

Removes all the data tables from the catalog. All data tables must be removed, before the end type tables can be removed. Open

Displays the selected component in the Main T able List View. Copy


Removes the selected component from the data table list. Rename

Renames the selected component. Select the component to be renamed, and then enter a new name. Expand

Expands the data table list. Collapse

Collapses the data table list. Expand All

Expands all the table lists. Collapse All

Collapses all the table lists. Properties

Displays the Properties view. Ad d t o b ase c atal og

Adds the selected table file to the base catalog. Commit t o Base Catalog

Commits the changes to the category to the base catalog. Update from Base Catalog

Updates the selected category with changes made to the b ase catalog. You are now provided the abilit y to move the component tables under the Data Tables folder. To change the order of the components, click the component and then drag it to the new location in the list. For more information on data tables, see Data Tables Properties (on page 236).


93

Home Catalog Tab Right-click Menu Main Table List View Ad d M AINSIZE

Adds a main size. For more information, see Add MAINSIZE (on page 52). Ad d New M AINSIZE

Adds a new main size. For more information, see Add New MAINSIZE (on page 52). Remove Row

See Remove Row (on page 23). Cut

See Cut (on page 23). Copy

See Copy (on page 22). Paste

See Paste (on page 21). Show Required

Displays the required information. Show Enhancement

Displays the enhancements. Show User

Displays the user information.

IndexCode Table CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Ad d Tab le > IndexCode Table Enables you to add an IndexCode table that can then be associated with a DBCodes table. The IndexCode Tables folder contains the INDEXCODE, DESCRIPTION, and COMPTYPE of each component in the catalog. Name

Specifies the name of the index code table. Description

Specifies the description of the index c ode table. For all right-click and editing features, see Edit Table Features (on page 24). For information on the properties, see IndexCode Tables Properties (on page 294).


94

Home Catalog Tab

Add In dex Code Table 1.

Click the Home tab, and then click IndexCode Table on the Add Tabl e panel. Alternatively, right-click the IndexCode Tables folder in Catalog Data, and then select Ad d Index Code Table . The New Index Code Table dialog box displays. 2. Type the name of the index code in the Name box. 3. Type a description of the index code in the Description box. 4. Click OK . The index code displays under the IndexCode Tables folder in Catalog Data.

Add Data to the IndexCode 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Double-click the new table. An empty table displays in the Main Table List View. Right-click the Main Table List View, and then click Insert Row . An empty row displays with the fie lds to enter. Type the required information in each box. Press TAB to navigate to the next box. Repeat the previous two steps to add more data. Click File > Save to save the changes to the catalog. The IndexCode cannot be removed when it is associated with a DBCode.

DBCode Table CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Ad d Tab le > DBCode Table Adds a database code table to Catalog Data. The DBCode Tables folder contains the database code table and the INDEXCODE, DESCRIPTION, MAINSIZE, REDSIZE, and PTN for all the components in the catalog. For more information, see DBCode Tables folder (on page 115). Name Specifies the table name. There are no r estrictions on the name. IndexCode Table Specifies the index code table associated with the DBCode Table. Description Specifies the description of the table. There are no restrictions on description.

Insert Multiple Rows Dialog Box Enables you to insert multiple rows for a DBCode Table. IndexCode Specifies the required index code associated with the database code table. Size Selection Specifies the sizes selected for the database code table. Select / deselect all Selects or clears all sizes in the Size Selection list. For all right-click and editing features, see Edit Table Features (on page 24). For information on the properties, see DBCode Tables Properties (on page 295).




Import DBCode Table From File (on page 96) Add DBCode Table (on page 96)


95

Home Catalog Tab

Import DBCode Table From File CADWorx Spec Editor DBCode Tables folder: Right-click the DBCode Tables folder in Catalog Data, and then select Import DBCode Table From File . Imports a database codes file and the i ndex code for use in CADWorx. T he database codes file is placed in the DBCode Tables folder, and the index code is placed in the IndexCode Tables folder. The DBCode Tables folder contains the database code table and the INDEXCODE, DESCRIPTION, MAINSIZE, REDSIZE, and PTN for all the com ponents in the catalog. The IndexCode Tables folder contains the INDEXCODE, DESCRIPTION, and COMPTYPE of each component in the catalog. DataBaseCodes File

Specifies the database codes file to import. The database codes file is located in the Spec folder of the legacy versions. Import

Imports the database codes file. 1.

Right-click the DBCode Tables folder in Catalog Data, and then select Import DBCode Table From File. The Import DBCode From File dialog box displays.

2.

Click the DataBaseCodes File ellipsis. The Open dialog box displays.

3.

Navigate to and open the database codes file. The DataBaseCodes File box populates.

4.

Click Import . The database codes file and the index code imports and displays under the DBCodes Tables folder and IndexCode Tables folder, respectively, in Catalog Data.

See Also DBCode Table (on page 95) IndexCode Table (on page 94) IndexCode Tables Properties (on page 294) DBCode Tables Properties (on page 295)

Add DBCode Table 1.

Click the Home tab, and then click DBCode Table on the Ad d Tab les panel. Alternatively, right-click the DBCode Tables folder in Catalog Data, and then select Ad d DBCode Table. You first must create an IndexCode before you can add the DBCodes table. An index code table is required to complete the process. The New DBCode Table dialog box displays.

2.

Type the name of the new database code table in the Name box.


96

Home Catalog Tab 3.

Click the IndexCode Table list, and then select the i ndex code.

4.

Enter a description of the table in the Description box.

5.

Click OK . The new database code table appears in the Main Table List View with the name in the upper left corner. The DBCodes Table also displays in Catalog Data.


Insert Row 1.

Double-click the new table. An empty table displays in the Main Table List View.

2.

Right-click the Main Table List View, and then click Insert Row . An empty row displays with the fie lds to enter.

3. Type the required information in each box. Press TAB to navigate to the next box. 4. Repeat the previous two steps to add more data. 5. Click File > Save to save the changes to the catalog.

Insert Multiple Rows 1.

Right-click the Main Table List View, and then click Insert Multiple Rows . The Insert Multiple Rows dialog box displays.

2.

Select the IndexCode from the list.

3.

Select the necessary sizes from the Size Selection list. You can use the Select / deselect all check box to select or clear all sizes.

4.

Click OK .

5.


End Prep Table CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Ad d Tab le > End Prep Table Adds an end preparation table to the Miscellaneous folder in Catalog Data. The end preparation table records the end preparation data for all the components used with CADWorx, and enables you to use the end preparation table in the description formation dialog boxes. You can also use this command to c reate different end prep tables for use in CADWorx. For more information, see Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 134) and Description Format Dialog Boxes (on page 193). Name


Specifies the description of the table. There are no restrictions on description.


97

Home Catalog Tab Default Part Number

Specifies the default part number for the table. You can use the part number of the end preparation in the description format dialog box. Select End Prep table from the Component Tables list, and then click the right arrow to move the item to the Format box. For more information, see Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 134) and Description Format Dialog Boxes (on page 193). You can edit this number.

End Prep Table Fields Name

Specifies the name of the end preparation. T he name is the actual information that displays in CADWorx for the end preparation of a component. The end preparation data works in conjunction with the PipeDescriptionCat variable. For more information, see PipeDescriptionCat in the CADWorx Plant Users Guide. Description

Specifies the description of the component. The description accuratel y depicts the meaning of the three-letter Name. You can edit the description. PTN

Specifies the part number of the end preparation. Select END_PREP_PTN in the description format dialog boxes to show part numbers for end preparation in your model. For more information, see Description Format Dialog Boxes (on page 193) and Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 134). For all right-click and editing features, see Edit Table Features (on page 24). For more information, see Miscellaneous folder (on page 115).


Add a new end prep table (on page 98) Add Standard EndPrep (on page 99) Edit end prep table (on page 99)

Add a new end prep t abl e 1.

Click the Home tab, and then click End Prep Table on the Add Table panel. Alternatively, right-click Miscellaneous in Catalog Data, and then select Add En d Pr ep Table

.

The New End Prep Table dialog box displays.

2.


3.

Type the description of the table in the Description box.

4.

Change or accept the Default Part Number .

5.

Click OK . The new end prep table displays in the Main Table List View with the name that you typed at the top left, and also displays in Catalog Data under the Miscellaneous folder.

6.



98

Home Catalog Tab

Add Standard EndPr ep 1.

Right-click the Main Table List View, and then click Ad d St and ard End Prep . The Select end prep fr om templ ate dialog box displays.

2.

Select the end prep items to add, and then click OK . Use the Select / deselect all check box to select or clear all sizes. The end preps selected display in the Main Table List View.

3.


Edit end prep table 1.

Double-click an end prep table file under Miscellaneous in Catalog Data. The table displays to the right of the Catalog Data in the Main Table List View.

2.


3.


4.



Legacy Catalog Data Panel CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Legacy Catalog Data Imports legacy data to the Spec Editor. Import By Spec - Imports legacy data from a specification. For more information, see Import By Spec (on page 100). Import From Data File - Imports legacy data from a file. For more information, see Import From Data File (on page 101). Pipe Support Import Assembly - Imports legacy pipe support data from an assembly file. For more information, see Import Pipe Support Legacy From Assembly File (on page 104). Pipe Support Import Data - Imports legacy pipe support data from a data file. For more information, see Import Pipe Support Legacy From Data File (on page 105).


99

Home Catalog Tab

Impor t B y Spec Spec CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Legacy Catalog Data > Import B y Spec Imports legacy data from a specification. Specification File

Specifies the specification file for import. Library Folder

Specifies the location for the legacy c omponents folder for import. This must be located in the legacy CADWorx folders. Topworks Folder

Specifies the location for the topworks folder for import. This must be located in the legacy CADWorx folders. DatabaseCodes DatabaseCodes Fil e

Specifies the legacy database code DAT file for the import. Upon import of the DAT file the DBCode Table, and the IndexCode Table, are created accordingly. For more information on DBCode Tables and IndexCode Tables , see IndexCode Table (on page 94) page 94) and and DBCode Table (on page 95) page 95).. Size Table

Specifies the size table for the import. You must first create a size table before importing the legacy data. Data Files

Specifies the imported information. 

Path

Specifies the path for the legacy data. 

Status

Specifies the status of the selected data. If Status is Missing, then the incorrect Library Folder was was selected. Import

Imports the legacy data. View View Log File

Displays the log file for the legacy import. 1. Click the Home tab, and then click Import By Spec panel.

on the Legacy Catalog Data

The Import CADWorx CADWorx Legacy Catalog Catalog From Spec File dialog box displays.

2. Under Source, click the Specification File ellipsis. The Open dialog Open dialog box displays.


100

Home Catalog Tab 3.

Select a legacy file to import, and then click Open . The Data Files box Files box fills with the legacy data.

4.

Click the Library Folder ellipsis. ellipsis. The Brows e For For Folder dialog dialog box displays.

5. Select the legacy folder that contains contains the data file, and then click OK . 6. Click the Topworks Folder ellipsis. ellipsis. The Brows e For For Folder dialog dialog box displays.

7. Select the legacy folder that contains contains the topworks data file for the spec, and then click OK . 8. Click the DatabaseCodes File ellipsis. The Open dialog Open dialog box displays.

9. Select the legacy database code DAT file for the import, and then click Open . The DatabaseCodes File box File box fills with the DAT file. DAT file. See the note above the instructions for more information.

10. Click the Size Table list, and then select a size table. 11. Select the data files you want to import from the Data Files box, and then click OK . Alternatively, select the Select / deselect all check box to select all legacy data in the Data Files dialog box. 12. Click Import . One of the following two responses displays: No files were converted, or [Number] files [Number] files converted . If no files were converted, make sure the data to import is correct. 13. Click OK on either message you receive. 14. When finished with the import, click Close. 15. Click File > Save to save the changes to the catalog.





View Log For detailed detailed information about the contents that were or were were not converted, click View File.

You can double-click any of the data files in the Data Files dialog box to view its information in Notepad.

Import From Data Fil File e File CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Legacy Catalog Data > Import From Data File

Imports legacy data from a file. Ad d Fi les

Imports legacy data using chosen files. Ad d Fo ld er

Imports legacy data using chosen folders.


101

Home Catalog Tab Delete

Deletes a selected source from the Source Files box. Source Files

Specifies the selected files or folders for import. Converted Files

Specifies the files converted after import. Size Table

Specifies the size table for validation of import. By Column Count

Specifies all the data file types for each source in the Source Files box. This option is only CADWorx L egacy Catalog Catalog From Data Data File dialog box. available in the Import CADWorx By Column Name

Specifies the data files for the source file you have selected. This option is only available in CADWorx L egacy Catalog Catalog From Data Data File dialog box. the Import CADWorx Select Data File Type

Specifies the component type for the specification import. Import


Displays the log file for the legacy import. There are two options for importing data from the data files. Depending on which kind of data Ad d Fol der . you want to import, use Ad d Fi les or Add

Import using Add Files 1.

Click the Home tab, and then click Import From Data File

on the Legacy Data panel.

The Import CADWorx CADWorx Legacy Catalog Catalog From Data File dialog File dialog box displays.

2.

Ad d Fi les Click Add

.

The Open dialog Open dialog box displays.

3. Select a legacy file to import, and then click Open . The file displays in the Source Files box. Files box.

4. Select a source file, and then under Validation , select a size table from the Size Table list. The data file type displays in the Select Data File Type box. Type box.

Selecting By Column Name or By Column Count determines how information is displayed in the Select Data File Type box. Selecting By Column Count displays all the data file types for each source in the Source Files box. Alternatively, selecting By Column Name only displays the data files for the source file you have selected. Some selections in Source Files do not have data fi le information.


102

Home Catalog Tab 5.

Select a data file type from the Select Data File Type box. Only one data file type can be selected at a time. The data file type needs to be set for each source file listed in the Source Files box.

6.

Click Import . The converted file displays in the Converted Files box. Files box.

These steps can be repeated without needing to close the dialog box. 7.

Click Close when finished.

8.






To see information about the data conversion, click View Log File. You can double-click any of the data files in the the Source Files dialog box to view its information in Notepad.

Import using Add Folders 1.

Click the Home tab, and then click Import From Data File Data panel.

on the Legacy Catalog

The Import Legacy Data Data From File dialog File dialog box displays.

2.

Ad d Fo ld er Click Add

.

The Brows e For For Folder dialog dialog box displays.

3.

Select a legacy folder to import, and then click Open . The entire folder displays in the Source Files box. Files box.

4.

Select a source file, and then under Validation , select a size table from the Size Table list. The data file type displays in the Select Data File Type box.

Selecting By Column Name or By Column Count determines how information is displayed in the Select Data File Type box. Selecting By Column Count displays all the data file types for each source in the Source File box. Alternatively, selecting By Column Name only displays the data files for the source file you have selected. Some selections in Source Files do not have data file information. If you need to delete a file from Source Files simply select the file, and then click Delete . The file no longer displays in source files. 5.

Select a data file type from the Select Data File Type box. Only one data file type can be selected at a time. The data file type needs to be set for each source file listed in the source files box.

6.

Click Import . The converted file displays in the Converted Files box. Files box.

These steps can be repeated without having to close the dialog box. 7.


8.






To see why why something was was not converted, or what, where, where, and when when it was was converted, click View Log File. You can double-click any of the data files in the the Source Files dialog box to view its information in Notepad.


103

Home Catalog Tab

Impor t Pipe Support Support Legacy Legacy From Assembly File CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Legacy Catalog Data > Pipe Support Import Assembly

Catalog Data: Right-click the catalog > Import Pipe Support Legacy From Assembl y File Imports legacy pipe support data from an assembly file . For more information, see PipeSupport (on page 264) page 264).. As sem bl y Fi le

Specifies the assembly file for import. Library Folder

Specifies the location for the le gacy components folder for import. This must be located in the legacy CADWorx folders. Size Table

Specifies the size table for the import. You must first create a size table before importing the legacy data. Data Files

Specifies the imported information. 

Path

Specifies the path for the legacy data. 

Status

Specifies the status of the selected data. If Status is Missing, then the incorrect Library Folder was was selected. Import


Displays the log file for the legacy import. 1. Click the Home tab, and then click Pipe Support Import Assembly on the Legacy Catalog Data panel. Alternatively, click in Catalog Data, right-click the catalog, and then Suppor t Legacy From From Ass embly File. select Import Pipe Suppor The Import Pipe Support Legacy From Assembly File dialog File dialog box displays.

2.

Under Source, click the As sem bl y Fi le ellipsis. The Open dialog Open dialog box displays.

3.

Select a legacy file to import, and then click Open . The Data Files box Files box fills with the legacy data.

4.

Click the Library Folder ellipsis. ellipsis. The Brows e For For Folder dialog dialog box displays.


104

Home Catalog Tab 5.

Select the the legacy folder that contains the the data file, and then click OK .

6.


7.

Select the the data files you want to to import from the Data Files box, and then click OK . Alternatively, select the Select / deselect all check box to select all legacy data in the Data Files dialog box.

8. Click Import . One of the following two responses displays: No files were converted, or [Number] files [Number] files converted . If no files were converted, make sure the data to import is correct. 9.

Click OK on either message you receive.

10. When finished with the import, import, click Close. 11. Click File > Save to save the changes to the catalog. 



View Log For detailed detailed information about the contents that that were or were were not converted, click View File.

You can double-click any of the data files in the Data Files dialog box to view its information in Notepad.

Import Pipe Supp Support ort Legacy From Data File CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Legacy Catalog Data > Pipe Support Impor t Data Suppor t Legacy From Data File Catalog Data: Right-click the catalog > Import Pipe Suppor

Imports legacy pipe support data from a data file. Ad d Fi les

Imports legacy data using chosen files. Ad d Fo ld er

Imports legacy data using chosen folders. Delete

Deletes a selected source from the Source Files box. Source Files

Specifies the selected files or folders for import. Converted Files

Specifies the files converted after import. Size Table

Specifies the size table for validation of import. Select Data File Type

Specifies the component type for the specification im port. Import

Imports the legacy data. View Log File

Displays the log file for the legacy import.


105

Home Catalog Tab There are two options for importing data from the data files. Depending on which kind of data you want to import, use Ad d Fi les or Add Fol der .

Import using Add Files 1.

Click the Home tab, and then click Pipe Suppor t Import Data on the Legacy Catalog Data panel. Alternatively, click in Catalog Data, right-click the catalog, and then select Import Pipe Support Legacy From Data File. The Import Pipe Suppor t Legacy From Data File dialog box displays.

2.

Click Add Fi les

.

The Open dialog box displays.

3.

Select a legacy file to import, and then click Open . The file displays in the Source Files box.

4.


5.

Select a data file type from the Select Data File Type box. Only one data file type can be selected at a time. The data file type needs to be set for each source file listed in the Source Files box.

6.

Click Import . The converted file displays in the Converted Files box.

These steps can be repeated without needing to close the dialog box. 7.


8.






To see information about the data conversion, click View Log File. You can double-click any of the data files in the Source Files dialog box to view its information in Notepad.

Import using Add Folders 1.

Click the Home tab, and then click Pipe Suppor t Import File on the Legacy Catalog Data panel. Alternatively, click in Catalog Data, right-click the catalog, and then select Import Pipe Support Legacy From Data File. The Import Pipe Suppor t Legacy From Data File dialog box displays.

2.

Click Add Fo ld er

.

The Brows e For Folder dialog box displays.

3.

Select a legacy folder to import, and then click Open . The entire folder displays in the Source Files box.


106

Home Catalog Tab 4.


5.

Select a data file type from the Select Data File Type box. Only one data file type can be selected at a time. The data file type needs to be set for each source file listed in the source files box.

6.

Click Import . The converted file displays in the Converted Files box.

These steps can be repeated without having to close the dialog box. 7.


8.






To see why something was not converted, or what, where, and when it was converted, click View Log File. You can double-click any of the data files in the Source Files dialog box to view its information in Notepad.

Transf er Data Panel CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Transfer Data Enables you to transfer data from one catalog to another catalog, or from one project to a nother project. Catalog Data - Copies data from one catalog to another catalog. For example, the source catalog data can be copied to the target catalog. For more information, see Catalog Data (on page 108). Project Data - Copies data from a project containing pipe support libraries or a separate pipe support libraries file to another project. For more information, see Project Data (on page 109). Support Data - Copies data from one pipe support libraries file to another pipe support libraries file. For more information, see Support Data (on page 110).


107

Home Catalog Tab

Catalog Data CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Transfer Data > Catalog Data Copies data from one catalog to another catalog. For example, the source catalog data can be copied to the target catalog. Source

Specifies the source file for the catalog transfer. Target

Specifies the target file for the catalog transfer. 1.

Click the Home tab, and then click Catalog Data

on the Transfer Data panel.

You can conduct data transfers for projects, catalogs, and pipe s upports while working in a catalog, a project, or a pipe support library. The Would you lik e to use the current catalog for target? dialog box displays. This only displays when you have a catalog open.

2.

Click Yes to use the current catalog. OR Click No to use a different catalog. The Transfer Catalog Data dialog box displays.

3.

Click Open Catalog

next to the small Source box.


4. Select a catalog to copy data from, and then click Open . The data displays in the large and small Source boxes.

5. Select New Catalog

to transfer to a new catalog.

The New Catalog dialog box displays.

Complete using the information in New Catalog (on page 15). OR , next to the small Target box, to transfer to an existing catalog. Select Open Catalog The Open dialog box displays depending on your selection. Select the source catalog and then click Open . The data displays in the small and large Target boxes. 6. Click and drag the table file information from the Source box to the Target box. Alternatively, you can right-click a source, and then Copy /Paste the source into the Target box.

7. 8.

Click Save Catalog to save the changes. Click Close when finished.


108

Home Catalog Tab

Project Data CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Transfer Data > Project Data Copies data from one project containing pipe sup port libraries or a separate pipe s upport libraries file to another project. For example, the source project data copies to the target project data. Source

Specifies the source file for the project and pipe support data transfer. Target

Specifies the target file for the project transfer. You cannot select a pipe support li braries file as the target when using the Project Data option. To transfer data from a pipe support libraries file to a s eparate pipe support libraries file (.psl) you must use the Support Data option. 1.

2.

3. 4.

Click the Home tab, and then click Project Data in the Transfer Data panel. You can conduct data transfers for projects, catalogs, and pipe s upports while working in a catalog, a project, or a pipe support library. The Would you like to use the current project for target? dialog box displays. This only displays when you have a project open. Click Yes to use the current project. OR Click No to use a different project. The Transfer Project Data dialog box displays. Click Open next to the small Source box. The Open dialog box displays. Select a project to copy data from, and then click Open . OR Select the file type list next to File Name, select Pipe Support Li braries File (*.psl), select a pipe support libraries file, and then click Open. You can transfer pipe support data from a project or a pipe support libraries fil e during the same transfer data session. The data displays in the large and small Source boxes.

5. Select New to create and transfer to a new project. The New Project dialog box displays. Complete using the information in New Project (on page 16). OR Select Open

next to the small Target box, to transfer to an existing project.


Select the target project, and then click Open . The data displays in the small and large Target boxes.


109

Home Catalog Tab 6.

Click and drag the specification and pipe support data from the Source box to the Target box. You can copy data from the lo aded source project to the loaded target project b y drag and drop. You can als o right-click the source, select Copy, and then Paste to the target. You can delete target project data by selecting the applicable component with rightclick, and then clicking Delete.

7.

Click Save

to save the changes.

8.

Click Close when finished. The CADWorx Spec Editor dialog box displays, telling you the project has been modified outside the application, and asking if you would like to reload it.

9.

Click OK to load OR Click Cancel to exit. The CADWorx Spec Editor dialog box displays when you click OK, asking if you would like to load from the base catalog.

10. Click Yes to load base catalog. OR Click No to not load the base catalog. The project reloads with the changes.

11. Click File > Save to save the changes to the project.

Support Data CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Transfer Data > Support Data Copies data from one pipe support libraries f ile to another pipe support li braries file. For example, the source pipe support data copies to the target pipe support data. Source

Specifies the source file for the pipe support libraries file transfer. Target

Specifies the target file for the pipe support libraries file transfer. You can select a project as the source, but you can onl y transfer the pipe support libraries data from the project to the pipe su pport libraries file. To transfer data from a project and pipe support libraries file to a separate project (.prj), you must use the Project Data option.


110

Home Catalog Tab

1.

Click the Home tab, and then click Support Data

in the Transfer Data panel.

Data transfers for projects, catalogs, and pipe supports can be co nducted while working in a catalog, a project, or a pipe support library. The Would you lik e to use the current pipe suppor t libr aries for target? dialog box displays.

This only displays when you have a pipe support libraries file open. 2.

Click Yes to use the current pipe support libraries file. OR Click No to use a different pipe support libraries file. The Transfer Project Data dialog box displays.

3.

Click Open Pipe Support Libraries

next to the small Source box.


4.

Select a pipe support libraries file to copy data from, and then click Open . OR Select the file type list next to File Name, select Project File (*.prj), select a project, and then click Open. You can transfer pipe support data from a project or a pipe support li braries file during the same transfer data session. The data displays in the large and small Source boxes.

5. Click New Pipe Support Libraries file.

to create and transfer to a new pipe support libraries

The New Pipe Support Li braries dialog box displays.

Complete using the information in New Pipe Support Libraries (on page 18). OR Click Open Pipe Support L ibraries existing pipe support libraries file.

next to the small Target box, to transfer to an


Select the target pipe support libraries file, and then click Open . The data displays in the small and large Target boxes.

6. Click and drag the pipe support data from the Source box to the Target box. You can copy data from the loaded source pipe support data to the loaded target pipe support data by drag a nd drop. You can right-click the so urce, select Copy, and then Paste to the target. You can delete target pipe support data by selecting the applicable data with right-click, and then clicking Delete. 7. Click Save

to save the changes.

8. Click Close when finished.


111

Home Catalog Tab

Export Data Panel CADWorx Spec Editor Home Catalog tab: Export Data Exports data to a text document or an Excel document. Export Table To Text Excel - Exports the table selected to a text document. For more information, see Export Table To Text Excel (on page 112).

Export Table To Text Excel CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Export Data > Export Table To Text Excel Exports data from the selected table to a text document. 1.

Open a catalog file, and then select a table.

2.

On the Home tab, click Export Table To Text Excel on the Export Data panel. Alternatively, right-click and select Export Table To Text Excel . The Save As dialog box displays.

3. In the Save As Type list, select Text Files (*.txt) or Excel Files (*.xls). 4. Select or create a folder to save the document, and then click Save. The document saves to the selected folder.

To view the document open it in Windows Explorer .


112

SECTION 4

View Catalog Tab Select a check box to open each window. Display - Displays the Catalog Data, Base Catalog Data, Properties, Component Tables , EndType Tables , and Component Types windows. For more information, see Display Panel (on page 113). Data Table List Mode - Displays the views of the data tables in the Category Li st Mode or the Group List Mode. For more information, see Data Table List Mode Panel (on page 121).

Display Panel CADWorx Spec Editor View tab: Display Enables you to view the foll owing windows. Catalog Data - Displays all the data loaded in a catalog, and enables you to manipulate the data. For more information, see Catalog Data (on page 113). Base Catalog Data - Displays all the information in the base catalog. For m ore information, see Base Catalog Data (on page 115). Properties - Displays the properties of all the data in t he catalog. For more information, see Properties (on page 115). Component Tables - Lists all the components by table name and version. For more information, see Component Tables (on page 119). EndType Tables - Lists of all the end types by table n ame and version. For more information, see EndType Tables (on page 120). Component Types - Displays all component types available in the specification editor and enables you to change the names as needed. For more information, see Component Types (on page 120).

Catalog Data CADWorx Spec Editor View tab: Catalog Data Displays all the data loaded in a catalog, and enables you to manipulate the data. Catalog Data displays when you open an existing catalog or create a new catalog. Selecting Catalog Data hides or displays the Catalog Data view.


113

View Catalog Tab

Size Tables fo lder Contains all the size, bolt di ameter, and bolt length data for the components in CADWorx. You can manipulate the size, bolt diam eter, and bolt length data by adding new tables, and by changing existing tables. All tables can be opened, deleted, and added in Catalog Data by rightclicking the file or table, and then using the menu that displays. For more information, see Size Table (on page 29), Bolt Diameter Table (on page 31), and Bolt Length Table (on page 34).

Material Tables fol der Contains all the material data for the com ponents in CADWorx Plant. You can manipulate the material data by adding new material tables, and by changing existing material ta bles. Material tables can be opened, deleted, and added in Catalog Data by right-clicking the file or table, and then using the menu that displays. For m ore information, see Material Table (on page 37).

Schedule Tables folder Contains all the schedule data for the components in CADWorx. You can manipulate the schedule data by adding new schedule tables, and by changing existing schedule tables. Schedule tables can be opened, deleted, and added in Catalog Data by right-clicking the file or table, and then using the menu that displays. For more information, see Schedule Table (on page 39).

Thickness Tables f older Contains all the thickness data for the com ponents in CADWorx. You can manipulate the thickness data by adding new thickness tables, and by changing existing thickness tables. Thickness tables can be opened, deleted, and added in Catalog Data by right-clicking the file or table, and then using the menu that displays. For more information, see Thickness Table (on page 41).

End Type Tables fol der Contains all the end type d ata for the components in CADWorx. You can manipulate the end type data by adding new end type tables, and by changing existing end type tables. End type tables can be opened, deleted, and added in Catalog Data by right-clicking the file or table, and then using the menu that displays. For m ore information, see End Type Table (on page 49).

Data Tables fol der Contains all the data for the com ponents in CADWorx listed by category or group. You can a dd new data tables, categories, or groups, or change existing data tables, categories, or groups to manipulate component data. Data tables can be opened, deleted, and added in Catalog Data by right-clicking the file or t able, and then using the menu that displays. For more information, see Data Table (on page 54).

IndexCode Tables fol der Contains index code data for the components in CADWorx. You can manipulate the data by adding new information or by changing existing data. Index code tables can be op ened, deleted, and added in Catalog Data by right-clicking the file or table, and then using the menu that displays. The index code cannot be deleted when it is associated with a DBCode table. For more information, see IndexCode Table (on page 94).


114

View Catalog Tab

DBCode Tables f old er Contains database codes data for the components in CADWorx. You can manipulate the data by adding database code tables, or by changing existing data. DBCode Tables can be opened, deleted, and added in Catalog Data by right-clicking the file or table, and then using the menu that displays. For more information, see DBCode Table (on page 95).

Miscellaneous f older Contains miscellaneous data for the components in CADWorx, such as end prep data. You can manipulate the data by adding tables, or by changing existing data. Miscellaneous tables can be opened, deleted, and added in Catalog Data by right-clicking the file or table, and then using the menu that displays.

Base Catalog Data CADWorx Spec Editor View tab: Base Catalog Data Displays all the information in the base catalog. The base catalog information can be displayed by clicking the Base Catalog Data check box in the Display panel. Ad d t o c atal og - Adds the selected table information from the base catalog to the open catalog. Refresh base catalog - Refreshes the base catalog. Open base catalog - Opens the base catalog for editing.

When you change the base catalog, the software prompts you with a Reload message box. Click Yes to reload and update the base catalog. If you click No , you can click Refresh base catalog to accomplish the same thing.

Properties CADWorx Spec Editor View tab: Properties Displays the properties of the specific data you have selected in the catalog. You can use the Properties view to change the asp ects of a specification, project, catalog, or catalog table f ile. The table folders do not have properties. Selecting the Fields ellipsis or double-clicking Custom Data brings up the New Field or Edit Field dialog box. For more information, see New Field Dialog Box (on page 116). Each category in Data Tables displays different components. Each component has its own specific information under properties, as well as a picture of the component. Different types of available options vary by component. Some components have available options that others do not ha ve. You can find the property explanations in the Appendix.

See Also Property Descriptions (on page 217)


115

View Catalog Tab

New Field Dialog Bo x CADWorx Spec Editor View tab: Display > Properties > Custom Data Double-clicking Custom Data opens the New Field dialog box and enables you to add new information to the properties of the specification data, catalog d ata, and project properties. When you add custom data to the project, that custom data a lso displays in the properties of the specification as Project Custom Data. You cannot remove this Project Custom Data from within the specification properties. You can only rem ove project custom data from the project properties. You can edit the Default Value of Project Custom Data to apply it to the specification data as needed. You can also edit each value in the custom data columns individually for each component in the Main Spec List View. The New Field dialog box opens any time you click Custom Data in the Properties view. User Defined fields created using t he Custom Data option automatically turn the names of those fields into Keywords. If you create custom fields with Keywords that already exist in the Spec Editor, the new keyword does not display in the Description Format Dialog Boxes (on page 193). The keyword already exists, and the software does not recognize identical keywords. Name

Specifies a name for the ne w field. This name becomes the Keyword and ca nnot be changed after creation. When creating custom data, numbers, letters, the hyphen (-), and the underscore (_) are the only permissible characters. No other special characters are allowed. Title

Specifies a title for the ne w field. The column takes the title f rom the text in this box and c an be edited at any time. If you change this title in Properties , the column title changes as well. However, the Name (Keyword) remains the same. Best practice calls f or the Name and the Title to match. Description

Specifies a description of the information in the new field. This box is simply a note for you to understand why this field is being created. Data Type

Specifies the type of data. The types of data allowed are Real , Integer , Text , or List . After you click OK you can no longer edit this option. 

Real

Only allows real number characters in the Default Value box. 

Integer

Only allows integer number characters in the Default Value box. 

Text

Only allows alpha characters in the Default Value box. 

List

Enables you to create a l ist of items to use for the custom data. You can create data in the list, and then select it from the Default Value list. To change this list, select the ellipsis to the left of the Data Type list. When you select the List option, the software activates the dialog box and then the ellipsis. For more information, see List Items Dialog Box (on page 118).


116

View Catalog Tab Required Inpu t

Specifies whether the information you are creating requires input from you. Validatio n Rule

Specifies the validation rule for the custom data. This field is unavailable for edit. Default Value

Specifies the default value of the custom data. If the List option is selected, a list of items displays. This list of items is based on the data created in the List Items Dialog Box (on page 118). If you change the Default Value of Project Custom Data, click Reset to return to the original default value. When you click OK to change a project custom data default value, the software prompts you to Ap pl y To All or Matching Only. Ap pl y To All

Applies the default value update to all components. Matching Only

Applies the default value update only to the components that match the original default value. For example, you have a S ERVICE custom data column and you want one service to read Steam and another service to read Concentrate. Your original default value reads Liquid , but you manually changed some of your Liquid values to Steam by typing the value in the SERVICE column. You now want to c hange all your remaining Liquid values to read Concentrate without changing the value of the steam SERVICE custom data. Type Concentrate in the Default Value of the Project Custom Data, and then click OK . Next, click Matching Only to change all of the Liquid values to Concentrate. Reset

Resets the default value. At tac h Fi eld to Com po nen ts

Attaches the custom data field to the component. Clear the At tac h Fi eld to Com po nen ts check box if you do not want the custom data to appear in the model. Selecting this option allows for the custom data you are creating to show up in the model, including the database, and bill of materials. If you attach the property to a component, you can turn that property off by opening the already added propert y and clearing the check box. An y new component drawn after that point does not contain the property. If you run CONVERTFROMPRJDATA on the previously create components, and have c leared this option, the custom data is removed.


Create a new properties field (on page 118)



Edit a field (on page 119)


117

View Catalog Tab List Items Dialog Box Enables you to make a list of items for custom data. With the List option you can create different values for the same custom data. For instance, if you create a custom data field called Manufacture, you can create a list of different manufactures, and then apply those manufactures to each separate component. The list of items you create is selected in the Default Value box. The list becomes available after creation. To change the text or values you created in the List Items dialog box in the Main Table List View or the Main Spec List View, select the column with the custom data, and the n select a new item from the list. Item

Displays the list of items you create. New

Enables you to create new items in the list for custom data. Delete

Enables you to delete the items from the list for custom data. Move Up

and Move Down

Enables you to sort custom data list item s.

Right-click Menu New

Enables you to create new items in the list for custom data. Edit

Enables you to rename the custom data item in the list. Delete

Enables you to delete the items from the list for custom data. To select the Default Value after you create a list, see New Field Dialog Box (on page 116).

Create a new properties field 1.

Open a project, and then select a specification or the project. OR Open a catalog, and then select a table.

2.

Click the View tab, and then click Properties in the Display panel.

3.

Double-click Custom Data. Alternatively, right-click Custom Data, and then click Ad d . You can right-click from within a catalog, and then select Add Cu st om Data To A ll Tables . However, the Thickness Tables folder does not c ontain this option. The software adds the custom data you create to all the tables in that folder. The New Field dialog box displays.


118

View Catalog Tab 4.

Type a name in the Name box.

5.

Type a title in the Title box.

6.

Type a description in the Description box.

7.

Select the Data Type list, and then select a data type. If you select List , do the following: a. In the List Items dialog box, click New to appear in Custom Data.

and then type the information that you want

b. Repeat step A for different items. Each line constitutes a new selection in Default Value. c. Click OK . 8.

In the Required Inpu t list, select Yes or No .

9.

Type a default value in the Default Value box. If you selected List, that information is now listed here. Select an item from the list.

10. If you want to attach new custom data to the component, then select the At tac h Fiel d t o Components check box. For more information, see New Field Dialog Box (on page 116). 11. Click OK . The new field is added to the properties window.

Edit a field 1.


2.

Select a field in Fields and click the ellipsis. The Edit Field dialog box displays.

3.

Update the necessary fields, and then click OK .

You can remove an attached custom data field from a component, table, or specification by clearing the Appl y Fi eld s t o Co mp on ent s check box.

Edit a project custom data field 1.


2.

Select a field under Project Custom Data, and then click the ellipsis. The Edit Field dialog box displays.

3.

Update the Default Value, and then click OK . The software prompts you to Ap pl y To Al l, Matchi ng Only, or None.

4. Select the option that best applies to your requirements. The custom data updates.

You can remove an attached custom data field from a component, table, or specification by clearing the Ap pl y Fi eld s t o Co mp on ent s check box.

Component Tables CADWorx Spec Editor View tab: Component Tables Shows a listing of all the Data Tables by TABLENAME, AUTHOR , and PTN (Part Number). You can edit the Au th or of the table, as well as change the part number assigned to that table. 

To view the component tables, click the View tab, and then select the Component Table check box in the Display panel. The Component Tables display on the Main Table List View.


119

View Catalog Tab

EndType Tables CADWorx Spec Editor View tab: EndType Tables Shows a listing of all the end types by table name and version. To view the endtype list, click the View tab, and then click EndType Tables on the Display panel. The EndType Tables displays on the Main Table List View.

Component Types CADWorx Spec Editor View tab: Component Types Shows a listing of all the components by COMPTYPE NAME and Program Code. Enables you to define a DEFINED COMPTYPE. COMPTYPE NAME

Specifies the component type name of each component in the Specification Editor. You cannot edit this it is hard coded in the system. DEFINED COMPTYPE

Specifies a defined component type name for each component. Changing this text changes the appearance of the long description in the specification. Program Code

Specifies the program code for the component. This program code identifies the component in the Component Edit dialog box in the Component type box. You cannot edit this, it is hard coded in the system. For more information, see Local Edit in the CADWorx Plant Users Guide. 

To view the component types, click the View tab while working in a catalog, and then select the Component Types check box in the Display panel. The Component Types display on the Main Table List View.

Change how the COMPTYPE format displays in t he Project Descript ion Formats 1.

Enter a value into the DEFINED COMPTYPE box, and then save the catalog.

2.

Open the corresponding specification.

3. If the Reload message box displays, click Yes . If the update from base catalog message box disp lays, click Yes . One or both of these dialog boxes displays. If you do not receive the update message box, then the catalog was not sa ved, or the wrong project was opened. 4.

Open a specification, and click on the component for which you changed the value in the DEFINED COMPTYPE box. If the value is not changed, then you need to set the components description format or the specifications description format for the change to take effect. For more information, see Description Format Dialog Boxes (on page 193) and Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 134).


120

View Catalog Tab

Data Table List Mode Panel Category List Mod e

Displays the components in the Data Tables folder by the list of c ategories. Each data table displays under the category name for that data table. F or example, a valve displays under the Valves category, and then each subsequent valve data table displays under the valve component type. If you have a 3-way valve, the software displa ys Valves for the category, and then a folder inside that category displays 3-Way Valve. Then, under the 3-Way Valv e folder a list of data tables displays. You can add categories to your list of categories with New Category (on page 53). Group List Mode

Displays the components in the Data Tables folder in group list mode. For example, if you have a Fittings folder, you could place any components that you want under that fittings folder, such as couplings, valves, and flanges. You can add group folders to your Data Tables with New Group Table (on page 53).


121

SECTION 5

Home Project Tab Gives you access to the features in an open project. Clipboard - Enables you to edit the boxes within the Spec Editor. For more information, see Clipboard Panel (on page 21). Specification - Enables you to add specifications to the project. For more information, see Specification Panel (on page 122). Pipe Suppor t - Enables you to add pipe supports to the project. For m ore information, see Pipe Support Panel (on page 154). Catalog - Enables you to update the project with changes made to the base catalog. For more information, see Catalog Panel (on page 157). Legacy Specificatio n - Enables you to import legacy specifications. For more information, see Legacy Specification Panel (on page 160). Transfer Data - Enables you to transfer project, catalog, and pipe support data. For more information, see Transfer Data Panel (on page 107). Export/Import Data - Enables you to export data to either a text document or an Excel document. You can also import specification data back into the Specification Editor from an Excel file. For more information, see Export/Import Data Panel (on page 161). Editing - Finds and replaces values in the Spec Editor. For more information, see Editing Panel (on page 174). Exit Spec Editor - Closes the Intergraph CADWorx Catalog and Specification Editor.

Specification Panel CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Specification Enables you to add information to a project. Ad d Spec if ic ati on - Adds a specification t o the project. For more information, see Add Specification (on page 123).


122

Home Project Tab

Add Speci ficati on CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Specification > Add Specification Adds a specification to a project. Name Specifies the name of the specification. Catalog Specifies the base catalog. Weight Factor Specifies the weight factor of the specification. This option is used for various margins of component weights, such as paint weights, and weld weights. Component Class Specifies the class type specification for the com ponent. Temperature Rating Specifies the maximum allowable temperature for the component. Pressure Rating Specifies the maximum allowable pressure for the component. DBCode Table Specifies the database code table from the base catalog. Size Table Specifies the size table used in the base catalog. Av ail abl e Size Specifies the available sizes of the size table. These can be changed by selecting or clearing the check boxes in the list. Thickness Table Specifies the thickness table used in the base catalog. Material Table Specifies the material table used in the base catalog. Layer Name Specifies the layer name. By default this n ame is the name of the spec, but the name can be changed. Layer Color Specifies the color appearance of the components when using this specification to draw. Select 0 - ByLayer , 1 - Red , 2 - Yello w , 3 - Green , 4 - Cyan , 5 - Blue, 6 - Magenta, 7 White/Black, from the list or type 0 through 255 to specify other colors. Created By Specifies the name of the person who created the specification. Description Specifies the description of the specification.

What do you w ant to do?      

New and Edit Component Pane (on page 125) Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 134) Add a new specification (on page 124) Add single new component to a spec (on page 136) Add Multi Component Pane (on page 139) Add multiple new components to a s pec (on page 140)


123

Home Project Tab

Add a new sp eci fi cat ion 1.

Click the Home tab, and then click Add Spec if ic ati on on the Specification panel. Alternatively, right-click the project name in the Project Specs window, and then click Ad d Specification . The New Specificatio n dialog box displays.

2.

Type the name of the new spec in the Name box.

3.

Use the default catalog, or click the Catalog ellipsis for a new catalog. When the Select Company Catalog File dialog box displays, select a catalog, and then click Open .

4.

Type the weight factor in the Weight Factor box. The weight factor accounts for the various margins of the com ponent weight, such as paint weight, and weld weight.

5.

Type the component class in the Component Class box.

6.

Type the temperature rating in the Temperature Rating box.

7.

Type the pressure rating in the Pressure Rating box.

8.

Click the DBCode Table list, and then select a database code table.

9.


10. Use the Av ail abl e Size list to select or clear sizes. 11. Click the Thickness Table list, and then select a thickness table. 12. Click the Thickness Table ellipsis to specify schedules for specific thickness types, using the Schedule Assignment dialog box that displays. Click OK when finished. 13. Click the Material Table list, and then select a material table. 14. Click the Material Table ellipsis to assign material for specific data types, using the Material As si gn men t dialog box that displays. Click OK when finished. 15. Click Long Desc Format, and then complete the dialog box as needed. 16. Click Part Number Format, and then complete the dialog box as needed. 17. Click Short Desc Form at, and then complete the dialog box as needed. 18. Click Tag Format, and then complete the dialog box as needed. Click OK in each dialog box when finished. For more information on the f ormat dialog boxes, see Description Format Dialog Boxes (on page 193). 19. Type a layer name in the Layer Name box, select one from the list, or use the default la yer name. 20. Click the Layer Color list, and then select a layer color. 21. Type your name in the Created By box. 22. Type a description of the specification in the Description box. 23. Click OK . 24. Click File > Save to save the changes to the project. The new spec appears under the project name in Project Specs.


124

Home Project Tab

New and Edit Compon ent Pane CADWorx Spec Editor Project Specs window: Double-click a project s pecification

Component Tab Enables you to add or edit components for a specification. The information in the list comes from the base catalog. Click Show Data Table , when available, to display the Base Catalog Data and obtain more information. You can copy and place any component in the Main Spec List View in the same specification or another specification in the current project.

Component Setup Group Specifies the component group. You can type a name for the group in the Group box, or select a category from the list. If you did not add new groups, then Group only lists the categories.

Right-click and select Add Mul ti pl e to add different types of components to a single group. Right-click and select Add Gro up Com po nen t to add a new group to the Group list. The group also displays in the Main Spec List View, when you select Group List Mode in the View tab on the Spec List Mode Panel . Category Specifies the category of the component, such as Couplings , or Caps . The Category list is unavailable during editing. Type Specifies the component type for the category selected. 



Data Table

Specifies the catalog data used for the selected type, and populates the other b oxes from Default Compon ent Settin gs and Default Connection Settin gs in the Properties of the Data Table from the catalog. For more information on which default settings the data table includes, see Data Table (on page 54) and Common Component Properties (on page 237). If you reselect a data table in an existing component, the Default Component Settings and Default Connection Setting s stored in the catalog up date the data in the New and Edit Component pane. Data Table Update Onl y

Specifies this is only an update from the data table. The Data Table Update Onl y check box is only available when editing. Size Range

Specifies the sizes of the c omponent. When you edit a component, the software derives the size ranges from the catalog data table for that component. For example, if you have only sizes 1 to 20 in your data table, only sizes 1 to 20 display in the Size Range list. If you need to add sizes to the com ponent, you must first add them to the data table in the catalog, and then update your project. You must select the new sizes in the Limit Spec Size Range To list after you update your project. Otherwise, the software does not displa y the sizes in the Size Range list. For more information, see Specification Properties (on page 218).


125

Home Project Tab BOM Type

Specifies the Bill of Material type f or the component. Layer Name

Specifies the layer of the component. Color Index

Specifies the color of the component in a drawing. Select 0 - ByLayer , 1 - Red , 2 - Yello w , 3 - Green , 4 - Cyan , 5 - Blue, 6 - Magenta, 7 - White/Black , from the list or type 0 through 255 to specify other colors. IndexCode

Specifies the index code of the component. This index code is from the DBCodes Table in the base catalog. For more information, see DBCode Table (on page 95). Bolt Designator

Specifies the letter that displays when you insert bolts in the 3D m odel. The letter for bolts displays only in non-enhanced modes. For example, when you insert a bolt in the model in a non-enhanced mode, the software by default adds the letter B to the drawing. However, if you change the Bolt Designator , then the software displays the value assigned in the Bolt Designator box for the bolt.

End Type Data Table Enables you to define the end type data for all components except User Shapes Ap pl y s ame en d t yp e to all end s

Specifies that the new or selected component has all the same end types. Select the Ap pl y same end t ype to all ends check box, to apply the same end types to each component. If you select the Ap pl y s ame en d t yp e to all end s check box, the other three end type options become unavailable. Isogen Sym

Specifies the Isogen symbol associated with the end type selected. This end type symbol displays when you run Isogen Out . Refer to the example below for the Start , End , Branch1, and Branch2 descriptions.


126

Home Project Tab Start

Specifies the starting point end type for the component. This list displays in a tree layout format. You must expand the end type you want to se lect, and then double-click the data table to use that end type. Use the corresponding list under Isogen Sym (1) to specify the end type symbol for Isogen.

End

Specifies the end point end type f or the component. This list displays in a tree layout format. You must expand the end type you want to select, and then double-click the data table to use that end type. Use the corresponding list under Isogen Sym (2) to specify the end type symbol for Isogen. Branch1

Specifies the first branch end type for the component. Branch1 is available when the Ap pl y same end type on all ends check box is cleared, and the component has three connection points. This list displays in a tree layout format. You must expand the end t ype you want to select, and then double-click the data table to use that end type. Use the correspo nding list under Isogen Sym (3) to specify the end type s ymbol for Isogen. Branch2

Specifies the second branch end t ype for the component. Branch2 is available when the Ap pl y s ame en d t yp e on all end s check box is cleared, and the component has four connection points. This list displa ys in a tree layout format. You m ust expand the end type you want to select, and then double-click the data table to use that end t ype. Use the corresponding list under Isogen Sym (4) to specify the end type s ymbol for Isogen. When selecting a Data Table associated with any new component, that component’s End Type Data Table is automatically set to the Default Connectio n Settings associated with that Data Table in the catalog.

Define Connecti on End Types Enables you to define end types and Isogen symbols for connection points on a user shape. You can only view this option with a user shape selected. Ap pl y s ame en d t yp e to all end s

Specifies that all connection points have the same end types. Select the Appl y s ame en d type to all ends check box, to apply the same end types to all connections.


127

Home Project Tab Connection Enables you to select a connection point to specify the End type and the Isogen Symbol for that connection. End Type Specifies the end type for the selected co nnection. Isogen Sym Specifies the Isogen symbol for the selected connection. T his defaults to the same as the End type, unless you specify otherwise.

Isogen Symbol Information Identifier Specifies the identifier used by Isogen for the component. For more information, see SKEY Information in the CADWorx Plant User's Guide. SKEY Specifies the SKEY used by Isogen for the component. For more information, see SKEY Information in the CADWorx Plant User's Guide. Topworks Specifies the topworks for the component. This list dis plays in a tree la yout format. You must click the topworks folder, and then click the topworks to use the topworks for that component. The Topworks option is available o nly when the component has a top work. Sort Sequence Specifies the location of the item in the bill of material. This number is pulled from the program code when adding a new component. However, when editing an existing component, the program code from the original selection stays the same. You have the option to leave this number as it is or change it based on the following. If you entered 999, this component is placed last in the list. If you enter 0, it is first in the list. If you set the same sort numbers for different components in the specification, CADWorx places the components in the list in an alphabetical order. 



Optional Component

Sets the component to an optional or n on-optional component. Select the Optional Component check box, to make a component an o ptional component.

Schedule & Material Specifies the material and schedule for the component. Main

Specifies the main schedule for the component. 

Use Specificatio n Schedule

Applies the schedule from the Schedule Assignment Setup in the Specification properties. For more information, see Schedule Assignment Setup (on page 208). 

Use Pipe Schedule

Applies the schedule of the default pipe associated with the selected rating of the specification. For example, if you set a tee schedule to Use Pipe Schedule and you set the schedule of the default pipe in that rating to XXS, then the tee schedule also uses XXS. Alternatively, if you set the tee schedule to Use Pipe Schedule and set the default pipe schedule to Use Specification Schedule, then the tee uses the specification schedule as well.


128

Home Project Tab Reduction

Specifies the reduction schedule for the component. Reduction is available only if the component has a reducing side. 

Use Specificatio n Schedule

Applies the schedule from the Schedule Assignment Setup in the Specification properties. For more information, see Schedule Assignment Setup (on page 208). 

Use Pipe Schedule

Applies the schedule of the default pipe associated with the selected rating of the specification. For example, if you set a tee schedule to Use Pipe Schedule and you set the schedule of the default pi pe in that rating to XXS, then the tee schedule also uses XXS. Alternatively, if you set the tee schedule to Use Pipe Schedule and set the default pipe schedule to Use Specification Schedule, then the tee uses the specification schedule as well. Material

Specifies the material for the component. Material lists any Material Assig nment Setup applicable to the selected specification component. You can specify the material with Use Specifi cation Material, select an available material assignment setup, add new material setups with Add Mater ial Setu p , or select an available material from the list. If you want to display the material on the component, define the Material Tables fields in the Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 134). 

Use Specifi cation Material

Applies the material from the Material Assig nment Setup as the default for that component type in the Specification properties. A checkmark on the m aterial assignment setup icon designates the default material assignment setup for each component group or component type. If you remove the default from the material assignment, then the software uses the material assignments from the Component Group folder. For more information, see Material Assignment Setup (on page 198). 

An y L is ted Materi al Assi gn men t Set up

Applies the component material from the selected material assignment setup. 

A Sp eci fi c L is ted Mat eri al

Applies the specific component material selected for all component sizes. 

Ad d Mater ial Setu p

Displays the Material Assig nment dialog box with the c urrently selected component, where you can update the material assignment for the selected component or for all components. For more information, see Material Assignment Setup (on page 198).

Class & Rating Ap pl y s ame c las s & rat in g t o al l c on nec ti on s

Applies the same class and rating to all connections. When you check the Ap pl y s ame class and rating to all connections check box, the Connection list becomes unavailable. The values you provide for Component Class , Temperature Rating , and Pressure Rating , or the values you select from the Appl ic abl e Gask ets , Ap pl ic abl e Bo lt s , and Backing Flange lists, apply to the Start , End , Branch1, and Branch2 connections for your component.


129

Home Project Tab Connection

Specifies the connection information you want to enter. 

Start

Enables you to specify the Component Class , Temperature Rating , and Pressure Rating. The App lic abl e Gask ets , Ap pl ic abl e Bo lt s , and Backing Flange options are only available for the start connection when you select a flanged or cl amped type component. 

End

Enables you to specify the Component Class , Temperature Rating , and Pressure Rating. The App li cab le Gask ets , Appl ic abl e Bo lt s , and Backing Flange options are only available for the end connection when you select a flanged or clamped type component. 

Branch 1

Enables you to specify the Component Class , Temperature Rating , and Pressure Rating. The App li cab le Gask ets , Appl ic abl e Bo lt s , and Backing Flange options are only available for the branch 1 connection when you select a flanged or clamped type component. 

Branch 2

Enables you to specify the Component Class , Temperature Rating , and Pressure Rating. The App li cab le Gask ets , Appl ic abl e Bo lt s , and Backing Flange options are only available for the branch 2 connection when you select a flanged or clamped type component. The Ap pl ic abl e Gask ets , Ap pl ic abl e Bo lt s , and Backing Flange options do not display for all components. These options are only applicable to specific components. Component Class



Specifies the maximum allowable pressure for the component. Selection Code

Specifies a selection code for the gasket and bolt. The Selection Code option is only available when you add a gasket or bolt. For more information, see Selection Codes (on page 60), and Selection Codes Tutorial (on page 65). Ap pl ic abl e Gask ets

Specifies the applicable gasket for the com ponent based on the selection code. The value that you choose in the Ap pl ic abl e Gask ets list determines the gasket that i nserts when you place a component pair that requires a g asket, such as flanged components, clamped components, flanged end-types, and clamped end types. You can either type the code in the Ap pl icab le Gask ets box, or select an available code from the list. The Ap pl ic abl e Gask ets option only displays when the component al lows a gasket. To assign selection co des, see Selection Codes Tutorial (on page 65), and Assign selection codes to components without catalog defaults (on page 142).


130

Home Project Tab Ap pl ic abl e Bo lt s Specifies the applicable bolt for the component based on the selection code. T he value that you choose in the Ap pl ic abl e Bo lt s list determines the bolt that inserts when you place a component pair that requires a bolt, such as flanged components, clamped components, flanged end-types, and clamped end types. You can either type the code in the Ap pl ic abl e Bolts box, or select an available code from the list. The Appl ic abl e Bo lt s option only displays when the component allows a bolt. T o assign selection codes, see Selection Codes Tutorial (on page 65), and Assign selection codes to components without catalog defaults (on page 142). You can add a + between the selection codes in Appl ic abl e Bo lt s to use multiple bolts on your flanged or cla mped components. Backing Flange Specifies a lap joint backing flange when the component end type contains the StubEnd/Adapter L ap End Type setting. You set this end type setting when you create a custom end type. Your catalog and specification must contain a lap joint flange to display the component in the Backing Flange list. For more information, see New End Type (on page 42). If you draw a valve with multiple ratings in CADWorx Plant and then attach a flange, the software prompts you when the flange and the val ve rating do not match. You c an select Yes to override and insert the flange. Optionally, select No , and then insert a flange with a matching rating.

Description Long Specifies the long description for the component. You can change the long description, b y clicking the Long ellipsis which opens the Long Description Format dialog box. You can also type information in the Long box, and then click Ap pl y to add the information. Blue words are keywords and you can select and cop y them. Black text is a s imple text string and can be edited as needed. For more information, see Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 134). Short Specifies the short description of the component. You can change the short description, by clicking the Short ellipsis which opens the Short Description Format dialog box. You can also type information in the Short box, and then click Appl y to add the information. Blue words are keywords and you can select and cop y them. Black text is a s imple text string and can be edited as needed. For more information, see Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 134). Tag Specifies the tag information of the component. You ca n change the tag format, by clicking the Tag ellipsis which opens the Tag Format dialog box. You can also type information in the Tag box, and then click Appl y to add the information. Blue words are keywords and you can select and copy them. Black text is a simple text string and ca n be edited as needed. For more information, see Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 134). Part Number Specifies the part number information of the component. You can change the part number format, by clicking the Part Number ellipsis which opens the Part Number Format dialog box. You can also type information in the Part Number box, and then click Appl y to add the information. Blue words are keywords and you can sel ect and copy them. Black text is a simple text string and can be edited as needed. For more information, see Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 134).


131

Home Project Tab

Descriptions display in the Short annotation , Long annotation , Tag , and Code boxes shown in the Component Edit dialog box in CADWorx Plant. For more information, see Local Edit in the CADWorx Plant Users Guide. The information the software displays in the Component Edit dialog box is based on the associated component definition in the specification. The com ponent definition in the specification contains fields for Short Annotation , Long Annotation , Tag , and Part Number . These boxes can be populated with text data or by setting the schema in the Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 134) or Descrip tion Format Dialog Box . You can access the Long Descript ion Format, Short Description Format, Tag Format, and Part Number Format dialog boxes for components from the Define User Shape dialog box. These formats can only be defined during or after you have created a user shape. If you do not define formats for the user shape, then the format is based on the specification level or the project level set in the Description Format dialog boxes in the CADWorx Spec Editor. After creation of the user shape the Long , Short , Tag , and Part Number of the Define User Shape dialog box displays in the same place as all other components. You can configure a description schema for the short annotation, long annotation, tag, and part number boxes at the project level, the specif ication level, and the component level. If you define a schema at any of these le vels, then the software derives the description from that level. Component level schemas take precedence over specification level sc hemas and specification level schemas take precedence over project level schemas. For instance, if the sub-category Nipple under Pipe in the Component List tree has a schema defined, then the information displaying in CADWorx for Nipple derives from this schema. If you remove the schema definition from the Nipple sub category, then when you place a Nipple in the model, the schema derives from the Pipe category description schema under the Component List tree. If you remove the description schema in Pipe, the description derives from the Component description schema in the Component List tree. If you delete all of the description schemas at the component level, then the software repeats the above process internally at the specification level. Next, the software repeats this process at the project level. When the description format is empty at the component le vel, then the box under Description in the New and Edit Compon ent Pane reads Using Specification Format. If the description format is empty at the component level and at the specification level, then the bo x under Description in the New and Edit Compon ent Pane reads Using Project Format . You can only access the New and Edit Compon ent Pane and the Description Format dialog boxes in the CADWorx Spec Editor. For more information on these features, see New and Edit Component Pane and Description Format Dialog Box in the CADWorx Spec Editor Users Guide. Notes

Specifies any notes attached to the component. If you receive a red exclamation or a warning triangle mouse to identify additional detail on possible data issues.


, hover over it with your

132

Home Project Tab Branch Tab Enables you to set up the permitted branch components through a grid. Main Size NPS

Specifies the main size of the branch component. Branc h Size NPS

Specifies the branch size of the branch component. Grid

Specifies units of the current specification, the size values, and the components available for a branch. For more information, see Add single new component to a spec (on page 136). You can add the Straight Tee/Cross + Reducer option to the branch table, as seen below. This enables you to insert a tee or a cross with reducers based on the branch sizes. For example, if you cross a 4 i nch line with a 1.5 inch line, the software prompts you to insert a 4 inch straight cross with 4"X1.5" reducers to connect the 1.5 inch line to the 4 inch line. You must select the Straight Tee/Cross + Reducer option for each intersecting sizes of the branch table in the CADWorx Spec Editor, and then set the Appl y B ran ch Tabl e Rul e to Auto mat ic in the Piping Rules of the CADWorx Plant Setup. These settings enable CADWorx to check the branch table and provide you the Cross + Reducers and Tee + Reducer options in CADWorx Plant. For more information, see Apply Branch Table Rule in the CADWorx Plant Users Guide.

Add Group Compo nent Creates groups where you can add components. You can build groups as needed an d add any component type to a group. Groups you create displa y in the Main Spec List View, where you select a group, and then right-click to add components. You can also right-click the blank space beneath the Main Spec List Vie w of components, select Add , and then select the new group from the Group list. If you did not a dd any new groups, then the Group list in the New and Edit Component Pane (on page 125) only displays the categories. Group Name

Specifies a name for a group of components. Description

Specifies a description for the group name. For example, if a group contains socket weld elbows, tees, and couplings, use Socket Weld Fittin gs as the description.


133

Home Project Tab

Long , Shor t, Tag, and Part Number Form at Dialog Boxes CADWorx Spec Editor New component pane: Click the Long , Short , Tag , or Part Number ellipsis CADWorx Plant I tab: Misc > Create ellipsis

> Click the Long , Short , Tag , or Part Number

Enables you to edit the Long description, Short description, Tag , and Part Number formats for components in a specification. Descriptions display in the Short annotation , Long annotation , Tag , and Code boxes shown in the Component Edit dialog box in CADWorx Plant. For more information, see Local Edit in the CADWorx Plant Users Guide. The information the software displays in the Component Edit dialog box is based on the associated component definition in the specification. The com ponent definition in the specification contains fields for Short Annotation , Long Annotation , Tag , and Part Number . These boxes can be populated with text data or by setting the schema in the Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 134) or Descript ion Format Dialog Box . You can access the Long Descript ion Format, Short Description Format, Tag Format, and Part Number Format dialog boxes for components from the Define User Shape dialog box. These formats can only be defined during or after you have created a user shape. If you do not define formats for the user shape, then the format is based on the specification level or the project level set in the Description Format dialog boxes in the CADWorx Spec Editor. After creation of the user shape the Long , Short , Tag , and Part Number of the Define User Shape dialog box displays in the same place as all other components. You can configure a description schema for the short annotation, long annotation, tag, and part number boxes at the project level, the spec ification level, and the component level. If you define a schema at any of these le vels, then the software derives the description from that level. Component level schemas take precedence over specification level schem as and specification level schemas take precedence over project level schemas. For instance, if the sub-category Nipple under Pipe in the Component List tree has a schema defined, then the information displaying in CADWorx for Nipple derives from this schema. If you remove the schema definition from the Nipple sub category, then when you place a Nipple in the model, the schema derives from the Pipe category description schema under the Component List tree. If you remove the description schema in Pipe, the description derives from the Component description schema in the Component List tree. If you delete all of the description schemas at the component level, then the software repeats the above process in ternally at the specification level. Next, the software repeats this process at the project le vel. When the description format is empty at the component le vel, then the box under Description in the New and Edit Compon ent Pane reads Using Specification Format. If the description format is empty at the component level and at the specification level, then the box under Description in the New and Edit Compon ent Pane reads Using Project Format . You can only access the New and Edit Compon ent Pane and the Description Format dialog boxes in the CADWorx Spec Editor. For more information on these features, see New and Edit Component Pane and Description Format Dialog Box in the CADWorx Spec Editor Users Guide.

Component Tables Component Tables


134

Home Project Tab Lists the format types available for component tables i n Table Fields . Material Tables

Lists the format types available for material tables in Table Fields . Size Tables

Lists the format types available for size tables in Table Fields . Schedule Tables

Lists the format types available for schedule tables in Table Fields . DBCode Tables

Lists the format types available for database code tables in Table Fields . IndexCode Table

Lists the format types available for index codes tables in Table Fields. Thickness Tables

Lists the format types available for thickness tables in Table Fields . This table is not available in Part Numb er Format. End Type Tables

Lists the format types available for end t ype tables in Table Fields . Spec Tables

Lists the format types available for spec tables in Table Fields . This table is not available in Part Numb er Format. End Prep Tables

Lists the format types available for the end prep tables in the Table Fields . This format contains the END_PREP_PTN schema. Select the END_PREP_PTN schema to add the PTN value from the end preparation table to your descriptions. You must select an End Prep Table Name in the specification Properties for the end preparation part number to display correctly. Then, set the Appl y Pi pe En d Prep Rul e to Auto mati c in CADWorx Plant for the END_PREP_PTN to display in your model. For more information, see PipeDescriptionCat and Apply Pipe End Prep Rule in the CADWorx Plant Users Guide. To add an end preparation table, see End Prep Table (on page 97). The DEFINED COMPTYPE in the Component Types view affects the COMPTYPE_CMP_TBL table field. Changing the value in the DEFINED COMPTYPE box changes the descriptions using COMPTYPE_CMP_TBL. The software reads the DEFINED COMPTYPE you specified for the component. The software then displa ys the new DEFINED COMPTYPE value as the description when using the COMPTYPE_CMP_TBL table field schema. For more information, see Component Types (on page 120).

Long, Short, Tag, or Part Number Format dialog box fields Table Fields Lists the long or short description format, the tag format, or the part number format for the chosen table and enables you to add the table field to the Long Desc Format , Short Desc Format , Tag Format , or Part Number Format. Long Desc Format , Short Desc Format , Tag Format , or Part Number

Lists the actual long or short description format, tag format, or part number format and enables you to add information. Use the arrows to add formats from the Table Fields box. Alternatively, you can drag or double-click a format to add it from Table Fields to Long Desc, Short Desc , Tag, or Part Number Format . If you added a space of text in the Format box, you can select the space or text and then edit it.


135

Home Project Tab Format

Displays the actual appearance of the long or short description, the tag, or part num ber format. When you click in the Long Desc Format , Short Desc Format , Tag Format , or Part Number box, the space or text you added appears. You can then edit the information here or in the Long Desc Format , Short Desc Format , Tag Format , or Part Number box. Blue words in Format are keywords. You can select k eywords and then copy them. Black text is a simple text string and you can edit as needed. Example

Displays an example of the long or short description, tag, or part number, as it a ppears in the software.

Setup the Component Formats 1.

Click the ellipsis for the field to edit. The Format dialog box displays.

2.

Select the Component Tables list, and change if needed.

3.

Use the left or right arrows to move table boxes from one field to another. Alternatively, you can drag or double-click a format to add it from Table Fields to the corresponding format.

4. Use the up

or down

arrows to move the format.

5. To edit the format appearance, select the table in the Format box, and then change the format in the Format box. 6. Click OK when finished. 7. Click File > Save to save the changes to the project.

Add single new com ponent to a spec 1.

Double-click the specification in the Project Specs view. The specification displays in the Main Spec List View with the New Component dialog box visible.

CADWorx displays any default settings already specified in the initial set-up in the boxes. 2. If the Edit Component pane is visible instead of the New Component pane, then right-click the spec component listing, and then sel ect Ad d . If some of the boxes are not completely visible, increase the height of the p ane. 3. Click the Group list, and then select a group. You can type a name in the Group box, after you select a Category. 4. Click the Category list, and then select a category. When you select a category from the Category list, the Group automatically changes to the name selected from the Category list. 5. Click the Type list, and then select a type.


136

Home Project Tab 6.

Click the Data Table list, and then select a data table. When you select the Data Table, CADWorx automatically populates the End Type Data Table with the default data from the Default Connection Settin gs in the base catalog. You can view the information you selected by clicking Show Data Table . The Base Catalog Data displays data tables for each component group. For more information, see Base Catalog Data (on page 115).

7.

Click the Size Range list, and then select or clear the necessary sizes.

8.

Click the BOM Type list, and then select a Bill of Material type or use the default BOM type.

9. Click the Layer Name list, and then select a layer, or use the default layer. 10. Click the Color Index list, and then select a color, or use the default color. 11. Click the IndexCode list, and then select an IndexCode table. 12. Select the Optional Component check box if you want the component to b e optional. 13. Select the Appl y s ame en d t yp e on all end s check box to apply the same end type to all ends on the component. The type of component you have selected d etermines which options are available under the End Type column. OR a. Click the Start list. Click the plus sign next to the end type to expand the end types, and then double-click an end type table to select it. This list defaults to the Default End Type Data Table Setup for Start in the base catalog, when applicable. You can change Start to something other than the d efault. b. Click the Isogen Sym list, and then select an Isogen symbol for the end type. c. Click the End list. Click the plus sign next to the end type to expand the end types, and then double-click an end type table to select it. This defaults to the Default End Type Data Table Setup for End in the base catalog, when applicable. You can change End to something other than the default. d. Click the Isogen Sym list, and then select an Isogen symbol for the end type. e. Click the Branch1 list. Click the plus sign next to the end type to expand the end types, and then double-click an end type table to select it. This defaults to the Default End Type Data Table Setup for Branch1 in the base catalog, when applicable. You can change Branch1 to something other than the d efault. f.

Click the Isogen Sym list, and then select an Isogen symbol for the end type.

g. Click the Branch2 list. Click the plus sign next to the end type to expand the end types, and then double-click an end type table to select it. This defaults to the Default End Type Data Table Setu p for Branch2 in the base catalog, when applicable. You can change Branch2 to something other than the d efault. h. Click the Isogen Sym list, and then select an Isogen symbol for the end type. 14. Under Isogen Symbol Information , the software should list default data in the Identifier and SKEY boxes. To change the Identifier and SKEY , type your identifier in the Identifier box, and then select your SKEY. 15. Click the Topworks list, click a topworks folder, and then select the topworks. 16. Click the Main list, and then select a main schedule.


137

Home Project Tab 17. Click the Reduction list, and then select a reduction schedule. 18. Click the Material list, and then select a material type. 19. Under the Rating section, the software lists default values from when you created the specification. Change the Component Class , Temperature Rating , and Pressure Rating values as needed. 20. The software lists default information for the Sort Sequence. You can change the sort sequence used for the Bill of Materials. 21. Under the Description column, the software lists a default type of the component for the Long and Short descriptions. You can change the long and short description format by typing new information or using the ellipsis. 22. Type Tag and Part Number information in their respective boxes. OR Select the ellipsis to change the format in the Tag Format dialog box or the Part Number Format dialog box. For more information, see Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 134). 23. Type note information in the Notes box. 24. Click Ad d at the top right-hand side of the New compo nent pane. 25. Click File > Save to save the changes to the project. The component adds to the list in the main window.

You can copy and place any component in the Main Spec List View in the same specification or another specification in the current project.

Branch Tab 1.

Click the Branch tab at the bottom of the New component or Edit component pane. A grid displays with Branc h Size (NPS) on top of the grid, and Main Size (NPS) on the left side of the grid.

2. To add permitted components to the grid, right-click the applicable main and branch size intersection, and then select one of the types listed. You can modify the gri d. You must change the Appl y B ran ch Tabl e Rul e option, under Piping Rules in CADWorx Plant Setup, to Au to mati c to apply the branch table settings. The grid box displays letters, indicating that you have added a component.

To add components to multiple intersections at the same time, hold down CTRL while selecting multiple intersections, or left-click a box and drag the mouse in any direction to select multiple boxes. 3. Click Save when finished. Every time you make a change, you must save the proj ect for the change to take affect.


138

Home Project Tab

Add Multi Component Pane CADWorx Spec Editor Product Specs window: Double-click a product specification Adds multiple components to a specification. When adding multiple components you must define a data table for each component when finished. Component Displays a list of components that can be added to a specification. You c an select multiple components by selecting as many check boxes as necessary, or by using the plus + sign to select individual components in each group. Group Name Specifies a group name for the set of components you want to add. You can select a component type for the group, type a new name in the Group Name box. If you select a set of components and then set a Group Name to a specific component group, those components display in that components list. For example, if you select Crosses , Tees , and Caps from Component , and then set the Group Name to Caps , all the components that you selected display in Caps in the specifications Main Spec List View. If you do not want a component to display in a d ifferent component listing, then select only the component and the Group Name associated with that component. Size Specifies the sizes for the component or group of components. The sizes you select in this list define the size range for the components you add. Component Class Specifies the class type specification for the component. Temperature Specifies the maximum allowable temperature for the component. Pressure Rating Specifies the maximum allowable pressure for the component. Optional Component Specifies whether the component is an optional se lection. Select the Optional Component check box, if you want the c omponent to be an optional choice.

End-Type Ap pl y s ame en d t yp e on all end s Specifies that all selected components have the same end type. If you select the Ap pl y same end t ype on all ends check box, the software disables the other three end type options. Start Specifies the starting point end type for the component. You can select any custom end types you create from this list. End Specifies the end point end t ype for the component. You can select any custom end types you create from this list. Branch1 Specifies the first branch end type for the com ponent. The Branch1 list is active if the Appl y same end t ype on all ends check box is not selected, and the component has three connection points. You can select any c ustom end types you create from this list. Branch2 Specifies the second branch end t ype for the component. The Branch2 list is active when the Ap pl y s ame en d t yp e on all end s check box is not selected, and the component has four connection points. You can select an y custom end types you create from this list.


139

Home Project Tab Schedule Main Schedule

Specifies the main schedule for the component. Branch Schedule

Specifies the branch schedule for the component.

Remaining opt ions BOM Type

Specifies the Bill of Material type f or the component. Tag

Specifies the tag information for the component. You can change the tag format, by clicking the Tag ellipsis which opens the Tag Format dialog box. For more information, see Component Tag Format. Notes

Specifies any notes attached to the component. Color

Specifies the color of the component in a drawing. Layer

Specifies the layer of the component.

Add mul tipl e new com ponents to a sp ec 1.

Double-click the specification in the Project Specs pane. The specification displays in the main window with the New com ponent pane visible.

2. Right-click the Main Spec List View, and then select Ad d Mu lt ip le . The Ad d m ul ti co mp on ent pane displays.

CADWorx displays any default settings already specified in the initial set-up in the boxes. 3. Use the Component box to select multiple components, by clicking the check boxes. 4. Select or type a Group Name. Any components you select in Component to add to the Main Spec List View display under this group name. 5. Click the Size list to select or clear sizes. You might need to increase the pane height if some of the boxes are not visible. 6. Type the Component Class , Temperature, and Pressure Rating information as needed. 7. Select the Optional Component check box to make these components available as optional components.


140

Home Project Tab 8.

To apply the same end type on all ends, select the Ap pl y s ame en d t yp e on all end s check box, click the Start list, and then select a starting end type. OR a. Click the Start list, and then select a starting end type. b. Click the End list, and then select an ending end type. c. Click the Branch1 list, and then select a branch end type. d. Click the Branch2 list, and then select a second branch end type.

9.

Click the Main Schedule list, and then select a main schedule.

10. Click the Branch Schedule list, and then select a branch schedule. 11. Click the BOM Type list, and then change the Bill of Material (BOM) type or use the default type. 12. Type tag information in the Tag box. OR Click the Tag ellipsis, use the Tag Format dialog box to set the tag format, and then click OK . For more information, see Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 134). 13. Type additional information in the Notes box. 14. Click the Color list, and then change the color, or use the default color. 15. Click the Layer list, and then change the layer, or use the default layer. 16. Click Ad d at the top-right hand side of the Add multi component pane. 17. Click File > Save to save the changes to the project. The components add to the list in the Main Spec List View.

Branch Tab The Branch tab sets up the permitted specification components by main and reduction sizes, through a grid that enables you to choose which sizes use which types of components. 1.

Click the Branch tab at the bottom of the Add m ul ti co mp on ent pane. A grid displays with Branc h Size (NPS) on top of the grid, and Main Size (NPS) on the left side of the grid.

2. To add permitted components to the grid, right-click the applicable main and branch size intersection, and then select one of the types listed. You must change the Appl y B ran ch Tabl e Rul e option, under Piping Rules in CADWorx Plant Setup, to Au to mati c to apply the branch table settings. The grid box displays letters, indicating that you have added a component.

To add components to multiple intersections at the s ame time hold down CTRL while either selecting multiple intersections, or left-click a box and drag the mouse in any direction to select multiple boxes. 3. Click Save when finished. Every time you mak e a change, you must save the proj ect for the change to take affect.


141

Home Project Tab

As sign s election c odes to component s withou t c atal og defaults 1.

Open a project.

2.

Click Yes to update the project from the base c atalog. Alternatively, you can click Review Update , review the tables with updates, click Force Update All , click OK , click OK again, and then click Yes .

3.


4. Expand Gaskets/Bolts/Welds. 5.

Select a bolt. Alternatively, you can right-click, select Ad d , and then fill in the data for a bolt in the New component pane.

6.

Type a value in the Selection Code box.

7.

Change any data that you need to update in the Edit component pane.

8.

Click Appl y . If you added a new component, click Add .

9.

Select a gasket. Alternatively, you can right-click, select Add , and then fill in the data for a gasket in the New comp onent pane.

10. Type a value in the Selection Code box. 11. Change any data that you need to update in the Edit component pane. 12. Click Appl y. If you added a new component, click Add . 13. Expand Flanges . 14. Select a flange, such as Flange Weld Neck . Alternatively, you can right-click, select Add , and then fill in the data for a flange in the New comp onent pane. 15. Change any data to update in the Edit component pane. 16. Select the selection code from the Appl icab le Gask ets list. 17. Select the selection code from the Appl ic abl e Bo lt s list. 18. Click Ap pl y . If you added a new component, click Add . 19. Click File > Save. To insert components that use selection codes, see Selection Codes Tutorial (on page 65).

PLANT 3D Size Table Detail Dialog Box Click View Details Enables you to check the size table for the Plant 3D catalog when using the Use Spec Catalog option and to change the outside diameter (OD). Displays the name of the P3D catalog. This is dynamic, so it is always the name of the si ze table you have selected in the Size Table list. NOM - Nominal Size

Displays the nominal sizes in the Plant 3D size table from the catalog attached to the Plant 3D specification that you selected in the File Path . This cannot be changed.


142

Home Project Tab OD - Outside Diameter

Displays the outside diameter of the nominal si ze in the Plant 3D size table from the catalog attached to the Plant 3D specification you selected i n the File Path. To change the outside diameter, follow the steps below. 1.

Click View Details .

2.

Click the OD box of the number you want to change.

3.

Type the new information.

4.

Click Appl y to keep the change and make more changes. OR This only happens if you click OK without clicking Appl y. Click OK to accept the changes. The "Do you want to save the changes to (table name)?" message box displays.



Click Yes to save the changes, No to discard the changes, or Cancel to return to the PLANT 3D Size Table Detail dialog box.

You are returned to the Import AutoCAD Plant 3D Specification Data dialog box.

To finish your work, see Import AutoCAD Plant 3D Specification Data (on page 147).

Edit Project Specs featur es Right-click Menu Ad d Spec if ic ati on

Enables you to add a new specification to Project Specs . For more information, see Add Specification (on page 123). Sort Specification Ascending

Sorts the specs in Project Specs in ascending order. Sort Specification Descending

Sorts the specs in Project Specs in descending order. Import Legacy Specification

Imports a legacy specification data. For more information, see Import Legacy Specification (on page 160). Import AutoPLANT Specification Data

Imports data from AutoPLANT for use in CADWorx. For more information, see Import AutoPLANT Specification Data (on page 144). Import AutoCAD Plant 3D Specification Data

Imports data from AutoCAD Plant 3D for use in CADWorx. For more information, see Import AutoCAD Plant 3D Specification Dat a (on page 147). Import Specificatio n From SRD File

Enables you to import specifications from Smart Reference Data. For more information, see Import Specification From SRD File (on page 152).


143

Home Project Tab Open

Displays the selected component in the Main T able List View. Copy


Removes the selected component from the table list. Rename

Renames the selected component. Select the component you want to rename, and then enter a new name. Collapse

Collapses the selected list. Properties

Displays the Properties view. Export Specification s To Excel

Exports an entire project to an Excel file. For more information, see Export to Excel (on page 161) and Export multiple specifications or an entire project to Excel (on page 171). Export Specificatio n To Excel

Exports data to an Excel file. For more information, see Export to Excel (on page 161). Export Specificatio n To Text

Exports data to a text document. For more information, see Export to Text (on page 172). Import Update From Excel

Imports updated data from an Excel file to a specification. For more information, see Import Update From Excel (on page 172).

Import AutoPLANT Specif ication Data Right-click on the project in the Main List View, and select Import AutoPLANT Specifi cation Data Imports data from an AutoPLANT specification. Import

Imports the AutoPLANT data. Close

Closes the Import Au toPLANT Specification Data dialog box. Help

Displays the online help.


144

Home Project Tab AutoPLANT Data File Path

Specifies the location of the AutoPLANT data. Use Spec Catalog

Uses the catalog of the AutoPLANT specification. Clearing this option enables you to select a different catalog using the Catalog ellipsis. Catalog

Displays whether or not you are using a CADWorx catalog. If this box is blank , then you selected the Use Spec Catalo g option. If you fill this box, the catalog is a CADWorx catalog. Tables

Specifies the AutoPLANT Data tables. Size Table

Specifies the size table.

CADWorx Components Program Code

Displays the program code associated with the AutoPLANT data. Short Description

Displays a short description associated with the AutoPLANT data. Size

Displays the size associated with the component for the AutoPLANT data. Double-clicking the Size box displays a list that allows you to include or exclude sizes. Schedule

Displays the schedule for the program code for the A utoPLANT component. Double-clicking the Schedule box displays a list that allows you to include or exclude schedule data. Rating

Displays the rating of the program code for the A utoPLANT component. Double-clicking the Rating box displays a list that allows you to include or exclude rating data. Select / deselect all

Include or exclude all check boxes in the CADWorx Compo nents box. Separate Catalog

Indicates whether or not the software creates a separate catalog. 

Separate Catalog path

Indicates the path of the separate catalog. The separate catalog path displays when you select the Separate Catalog check box. To change the name of the catalog or to save in a different location, click the ellipsis.


145

Home Project Tab Import a spec using an AutoPLANT catalog 1.

Right-click the project in the Main List View, and select Import AutoPLANT Specification Data. The Import Au toPLANT Specification Data dialog box displays.

2.

Click the File Path ellipsis under Auto PLA NT Data . The Open dialog box displays.

3. Select the AutoPLANT data for import, and click Open . 4. Select Use Spec Catalog to use the AutoPLANT catalog. 5. Select a table from the Tables list. 6. Select the check box of the required Program Code.





You can use the Select / deselect all check box to select al l the program codes under CADWorx Compon ents . You can also change the Size, Schedule, or Rating by double clicking the boxes under each heading.

7. Click Import. 8. Click OK. You can view a log file of the details for the conversion by clicking View Log File. Imports the AutoPLANT data.

Import a spec using a CADWorx catalog 1.

Right-click the project in the Main List View, and select Import AutoPLANT Specification Data. The Import Au toPLANT Specification Data dialog box displays.

2.

Click the File Path ellipsis under Auto PLA NT Data. The Open dialog box displays.

3.

Select the AutoPLANT data for import, and click Open .

4. Clear the Use Spec Catalo g option to use a CADWorx catalog. This defaults to the catalog you selected as the base c atalog when creating the project. To change the ca talog, do the following: a. Click the Catalog ellipsis. The Select Company Catalog File dialog box displays.

b. Select a CADWorx catalog and then click Open . The CADWorx catalog populates the Catalog box.

5. Select a table from the Tables list.


146

Home Project Tab 6.

Select a size table from the Size Table list.

7.

Select the check box of the required Program Code.





You can use the Select / deselect all check box to select all the program codes under CADWorx Components . You can also change the Size, Schedule, or Rating by double clicking the boxes under each heading.

8.

Click Import.

9.

Click OK. You can view a log file of the details for the conversion by clicking View Log File. Imports the AutoPLANT data.

Import Auto CAD Plant 3D Specification Data Right-click the project in the Main List View, and select Import AutoCAD Plant 3D Specifi cation Data Imports data from an AutoCAD Plant 3D specification. Import Imports the AutoCAD Plant 3D data. Close Closes the Import AutoCAD Plant 3D Specification Data dialog box. Help Displays the help.

AutoCAD Plant 3D Data Size Table

Specifies a size table when you use a CADWorx catalog for import. View Detail

Displays the PLANT 3D Size Table Detail dialog box. You can only click View Detail after you select an AutoCAD Plant 3D specification. For more information, see PLANT 3D Size Table Detail Dialog Box (on page 142). Target Unit

Specifies the units of the target project. Target Unit is only available when you select the Use Spec Catalog option. Source Unit

Specifies the units in the P lant 3D catalog that are used f or import. The Source Unit list is only available when you select Use Spec Catalog and set Target Unit to Metric/Inch units. In this case, you have the option to choose between importing either English/Inch components or Metric/Inch components. In all other instances, the Source Unit list is unavailable because the Source Unit must reflect the Target Unit . When you select English/Inch or Metric/Metric units for the Target Unit , the Source Unit automatically selects the English/Inch or Metric/Metric units, respectively.


147

Home Project Tab Usershape Block Unit

Specifies the units for the user shape block from the AutoCAD Plant 3D data. Use Spec Catalog

Specifies when the import uses the spec of the AutoCAD Plant 3D data. Combine Catalog

Creates a combined default catalog for the imported specifications. Combine Catalog is only available when you sel ect two or more specifications in Plant 3D List Files . Catalog

Specifies a CADWorx catalog when you do not s elect the Use Spec Catalog option. Plant 3D List Files

Displays the Open dialog box and enables you to select one or more AutoCAD Plant 3D specifications. Specification List

Lists the specifications that you selected from the Open dialog box.

CADWorx Components Component Type

Displays a list of the components in t he AutoCAD Plant data. Long Description

Displays a long description associated with the AutoCAD Plant data. Select / deselect all

Includes and excludes all check boxes in the CADWorx Compo nents box. Separate Catalog


Separate Catalog path

Indicates the path of the separate catalog. The separate catalog path displays when you select the Separate Catalog check box. To change the name of the catalog or to save in a different location, click the ellipsis.

Right-click Menu Check group

Enables you to check a component group under Component Type without expanding the group. Uncheck group

Enables you to clear a component group under Component Type without expanding the group. Expand all grou ps

Enables you to expand all the groups without having to select the plus sign. Collapse all gro ups

Enables you to collapse all the groups without having to select the plus sign.


148

Home Project Tab

Import a singl e specifi cation us ing an AutoCAD Plant 3D catalog 1.

Right-click the project in the Main List View, and then select Import AutoCAD Plant 3D Specifi cation Data. The Import AutoCAD Plant 3D Specificatio n Data dialog box displays.

2.

Select the Use Spec Catalog option to use the AutoCAD Pla nt 3D catalog. This is the default option.

3.

Select the units from the Target Unit list. The software automatically selects the Source Unit, and the Source Unit list becomes unavailable.

The software populates CADWorx Compo nents only when there are components available in the AutoCAD Pl ant 3D specification for the units you sel ected. The unit you select must be the same as the units in your chosen specification. If no components match the unit, the CADWorx Compo nents box remains empty. 4. Click the Plant 3D List Files ellipsis. The Open dialog box displays.

5. Select the AutoCAD Plant 3D data for import, and then click Open . 6. Select the Size Table for import. If no size table is available, the Target Unit does not match the specification. You can click View Detail to view the sizes in the size table and change the outside diameter (OD). For more information, see PLANT 3D Size Table Detail Dialog Box (on page 142). 7. Click the plus sign to expand the Component Type list, and then click the check box next to the component that you want to add. You can use the Select / deselect all check box to select al l the components under CADWorx Components . If you want a separate catalog, select the Separate Catalog check box. Click the Separate Catalog file location ellipsis to select a different catalog. 8. Click Import. 9. Click OK. You can click View Log File to view the details of the conversion. The AutoCAD Plant 3D specification imports.


149

Home Project Tab

Import a singl e specifi cation us ing a CADWorx catalog 1.


2.

Clear the Use Spec Catalo g option to use a CADWorx catalog. The Catalog box defaults to the base catalog that you selected when you first created the project. If you did no t select a base catalog, then you must select one now. To select a catalog, do the following: a. Click the Catalog ellipsis. The Select Company Catalog File dialog box displays.

b. Select a CADWorx catalog, and then click Open . The CADWorx catalog populates the Catalog box.

The catalog you select must have the same units as the AutoCAD Plant 3D specification, or no components become available for i mport. 3.

Click the Plant 3D List Files ellipsis. The Open dialog box displays.

4. Select the AutoCAD Plant 3D data for import, and then click Open . 5. Select a size table from the Size Table list. The software auto-populates the Size Table list from the base catalog. If only one size table exists in your catalog, you cannot select another size table. 6. Click the plus sign to expand the Component Type list, and then select the check box for the component that you want to add. Repeat this step for each component that you want to add. You can use the Select / deselect all check box to select all the components under CADWorx Compon ents . 7. Click Import. 8. Click OK. Click View Log File to view the details of the conversion. The AutoCAD Plant 3D specification imports.


150

Home Project Tab

Import mul tipl e specifi cations us ing a CADWorx catalog 1.


2.

Clear the Use Spec Catalo g option to use a CADWorx catalog. The Catalog box defaults to the base catalog that you selected when you first created the project. If you did not select a base catalog, then you must select one now. T o select a catalog, do the fol lowing: a. Click the Catalog ellipsis. The Select Company Catalog File dialog box displays.

b. Select a CADWorx catalog, and then click Open . The CADWorx catalog populates the Catalog box.

The catalog you select must have the same units as the AutoCAD Plant 3D specification, or no components become available for i mport. 3.

Click the Plant 3D List Files ellipsis. The Open dialog box displays.

4. Select the AutoCAD Plant 3D data for import, and then click Open . If you want to combine the catalogs of the selected specifications, select the Combine Catalog check box. You can only combine catalogs if you select more than one specification. 5. Select a size table from the Size Table list. The software auto-populates the Size Table list from the base catalog. If only one size table exists in your catalog, you cannot select another size table. 6. Click the plus sign to expand the Component Type list, and then select the check box for the component that you want to add. Repeat this step for each component that you want to add. You can use the Select / deselect all check box to select all the components under CADWorx Compon ents . 7. Click Import. 8. Click OK. You can click View Log File to view the details of the conversion. The AutoCAD Plant 3D specification imports.


151

Home Project Tab

Import Specification From SRD File Right-click on the project in the Main List View, and select Import Specific ation From SRD File Imports data from a Smart Reference Data file by creating a catalog and specification in the import. For mapping details, refer to the Smart Reference Data CADWorx Interface User's Guide. Units

Specifies the units for the import. When you select the SRD file for import and it c ontains the unit information, the software automatically selects the units and disables the list. 

English/Inch

Uses the imperial system with nominal inch input. 

Metric/Inch

Uses the metric system with nominal inch input. 

Metric/Metric 

Uses the metric system with metric input.

List Items Type Name

Lists the type of information for the Smart Reference Data import. Item Name

Lists the item name of the Smart Reference Data being im ported, such as the component or the specification. Parent Name

Indicates whether the Smart Reference Data information is created for the catalog or the specification. The catalog and specification information are created i n the Import Specifi cation From SRD File dialog box. Status

Specifies the status of the Smart Reference Data information. 

Pending

Indicates the item in the list has not been selected or i mported. 

Selected

Indicates the item in the list has been selected and is awaiting importation. 

Successful

Indicates the item in the list has been successfully imported. 

Failed

Indicates the item in the list has not been converted and has not imported.


152

Home Project Tab Select / deselect all

Include or exclude all check boxes in the List Items box. Separate Catalog


Catalog Path

Indicates the path of the separate catalog. The Catalog Path displays when you select the Separate Catalo g check box. To change the name of the SRD catalog or to save in a different location, s elect the Catalog Path ellipsis. File Path

Specifies the file path to the original file. Select File

Enables you to select the Sm art Reference Data files for the import. Import

Imports the Smart Reference Data information. Close

Closes the Import Specifi cation From SRD File dialog box. Help

Displays the online help. 1. Right-click the project in the Main List View, and select Import Specific ation From SRD File. The Import Specification From SRD File dialog box displays.

2. Click Select File. The Open dialog box displays.

3. Select the Smart Reference Data file for import, and then click Open . If the SRD file contains the units, then the software automatically selects the correct units from the Units list and disables the Units list. If the SRD file does not contain the units, then you must select the units from the Units list. 4. Select the check boxes to import.







5.

You can use the Select / deselect all check box to select al l the program codes under CADWorx Compo nents . Select the Separate Catalo g check box to create a s eparate catalog. To change the name of the SRD catalog or to save in a different location, select the Catalog Path ellipsis.

Click Import. You can view a log file of the details for the conversion by clicking View log file.

6. Click Close. The software imports the Smart Reference Data file specification.


153

Home Project Tab If the Do you want to upd ate project f rom base catalog? message displays, do the following: 1.

Click Yes. The Review Update message box displays.

2.

Click Yes or Review Update. If you click Review Update, see Review Table Links Dialog Box (on page 158) for more information. The project updates from the base catalog.

After import, check the data against the original SRD file. For the SP1 release of CADWorx 2015, the software places the Ident , Short , and Option codes in the specification. 



The software places the Ident Code in the DBCodes Tables under the IDENT_CODE column and joins the IndexCode table with the DBCode table. The software creates custom data fields for the Short Code and the Option Code under the Custom Data properties for that specification and component.

Pipe Supp ort Panel CADWorx Spec Editor Project: Home Tab > Pipe Suppor t CADWorx Spec Editor Pipe Support Library File: Home Tab > Pipe Suppor t Enables you to add new pipe support libraries and import legacy pipe support assemblies to a project or a libraries file. For more information, see Pipe Support Library (on page 177). Ad d Pi pe Su pp or t L ib rar y - Adds a pipe support libraries file to a project or a libraries file. For more information, see Add Pipe Support Library (on page 154). Import Legacy Pipe Support Lib rary - Enables you to import legacy pipe support libraries. For more information, see Import Legacy Pipe Support Library (on page 156).

Add Pipe Su pp or t Library CADWorx Spec Editor Project: Home Tab > Pipe Suppor t > Ad d Pi pe Su pp or t Li br ary

CADWorx Spec Editor Project: View Tab > Pipe Support Library > Right-click the project in the Pipe Support Library pane > Ad d Pi pe Su pp or t Li br ary CADWorx Spec Editor Pipe Support Library File: Home Tab > Pipe Suppor t > Ad d Pip e Support Library

CADWorx Spec Editor Pipe Support Library File: View Tab > Pipe Support Library > Rightclick the library file in the Pipe Support Library pane > Ad d Pi pe Su pp or t L ib rar y Adds a pipe support library to a project or a library file. For pipe supports to work correctly, you must have a PipeSupport category in the data table of the catalog with al l components.


154

Home Project Tab Name

Specifies the name of the pipe su pport library. Catalog

Specifies the base catalog. Size Table

Specifies the size table from the base catalog for use with the pipe sup port data. Av ail abl e Size

Specifies a list of the available sizes from the size table. Select or clear the check boxes in the list to add or remove sizes. Long Desc Format Setup

Specifies the appearance of the long d escription attached to the pipe support components. Short Desc Format Setup

Specifies the appearance of the short description format attached to the pipe support components. Tag Format Setup

Specifies the appearance of the tag format attached to the p ipe support components. Part Number Format Setup

Specifies the appearance of the part number attached to the pipe support components. For more on the Format Setups , see Pipe Support Description Format Dialog Boxes (on page 212). Created By

Specifies who created the pipe support library. Description

Specifies the description of the pipe support l ibrary. 1.

Click the Home tab, and then click Add Pip e Sup po rt Li br ary in the Pipe Suppor t panel. Alternatively, right-click the project or the library file, and then select Add Pip e Support Library. The New Pipe Support Li brary dialog box displays.

2.

Type the name of the new library in the Name box.

3.

Use the default catalog, or click the Catalog ellipsis for a new catalog. When the Select Company Catalog File dialog box displays, select a catalog, and then click Open . This catalog must contain a PipeSupport category for the pipe supports to function correctly. To add a pipe support category, see Legacy Catalog Data Panel (on page 99) or to build your own, see New Category (on page 53).

4. Click the Size Table list, and then select a s ize table. The size table you select c omes from the catalog that you selected in the last step. If this catalog does not contain a size table, you need to add one before you can add the new pipe support library.


155

Home Project Tab 5.

Use the Avail abl e Size list to select or clear sizes.

6.

Click Long Desc Format , and then complete the dialog box as needed.

7.

Click Part Number Format , and then complete the dialog box as needed.

8.

Click Short Desc Format , and then complete the dialog box as needed.

9.

Click Tag Format , and then complete the dialog box as needed. Click OK in each dialog box when finished. For more information on the format dialog boxes, see Pipe Support Description Format Dialog Boxes (on page 212).

10. Type the person or company that created the library in the Created By box. 11. Type a description of the library in the Description box. 12. Click OK . 13. Click File > Save to save the changes to the project. The new pipe support assembly displays under the project name in Pipe Support Library.

See Also Pipe Support Library (on page 177) Pipe Support Library File Home Tab (on page 210)

Impor t Legacy Pipe Support Li brary CADWorx Spec Editor Project: Home Tab > Pipe Suppor t > Import L egacy Pipe Suppor t Library

CADWorx Spec Editor Project: View Tab > Pipe Support Library > Right-click the project in the Pipe Support Library pane > I mport Pipe Support Library CADWorx Spec Editor Pipe Support Library File: Home Tab > Pipe Support > Import Legacy Pipe Support Lib rary

CADWorx Spec Editor Pipe Support Library File: View Tab > Pipe Support Library > Rightclick the project in the Pipe Support Library pane > I mport Pipe Support Library Enables you to import legacy pipe support libraries into the project or library file. As sem bl y Fi le

Specifies the legacy file to i mport the pipe supports. Catalog

Specifies the base catalog to reference the pipe support information. This catalog must contain a PipeSupport category for the pipe supports to function correctly. To add a pipe support category, see Legacy Catalog Data Panel (on page 99) or to build your own, see New Category (on page 53). Size Table

Specifies the size table from the base catalog that contains the pipe support size information. Import

Imports the pipe support to the project or libraries file for use in the drawing. For more information on using the new pipe sup port in the drawing, see CADWorx Support Modeler in the CADWorx Plant Users Guide .


156

Home Project Tab

1.

Click the Home tab, and then click I mport L egacy Pipe Suppor t Library Pipe Suppor t panel.

on the

The Import Pipe Support Library dialog box displays.

2.

Click the As sem bl y Fi le ellipsis. The Open dialog box displays.

3.

Select the pipe support specification for import, and then click Open . The CADWorx Spec folder contains the Legacy pipe supports for 2013 and prior versions.

4.

Check the Catalog and Size Table, and change if needed. If you want to use a d ifferent catalog, click the Catalog ellipsis, and then select a new catalog. Make sure that this catalog has a PipeSupport category for the pipe supports to function correctly.

5.

Click Import . The pipe supports add to the Pipe Support Library pane under the project or libraries file.

Catalog Panel CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Catalog Enables you to update the project from a catalog and review the tables for update. Update From Catalog - Updates the project from the base catalog. For more information, see Update From Catalog (on page 157). Review Table Li nks - Enables you to review and edit the table links for the catalog update. For more information, see Review Table Links (on page 158).

Update From Catalog CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Catalog > Update From Catalog Updates the project from the base catalog. 1.

Click the Home tab, and then click Update From Catalog

on the Catalog panel.

The software prompts you to update from the base catalog.

2.

Click Yes, No, or Review Update.

3.

If you click Review Update, see Review Update (on page 158) & Review Table Links Dialog Box (on page 158) to continue. The project updates from the base catalog.


157

Home Project Tab

Review Update CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Catalog > Update From Catalog

> Review Update

Enables you to check and change the details of the project that to be updated from the base catalog. 1.

Click the Home tab, and then click Update From Catalog


OR Open a project that has had its b ase catalog updated. The software prompts you to update from the base catalog.

2.

Click Review Update. The Review Table lin ks dialog box displays.

For more information, see Review Table Links Dialog Box (on page 158).

Review Table Links CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Catalog > Review Table Links Displays the Review Table Link s dialog box enabling you to review the links for update and change the Sourc e Table Name and the Source ID as needed. 1.

Click the Home tab, and then click Review Table Lin ks


The Review Table Link s dialog box displays.

2. See Review Table Links Dialog Box (on page 158) to continue.

Review Table Link s Dialog Box Enables you to check the d ata IDs and other information pertaining to a Catalog or Project and change the Source ID and/or Source Table as needed. Specification

Displays the specifications in the project that you can select to update from a catalog to that specification. This options is only visible when working in a project. Show All Tables

Displays all the tables associated with the project you open. Show Mis-Matched Tables

Displays only the mis-matched tables associated with the project you open. Show Tables With Updates

Displays only the tables with up dates from the catalog for the project you open.


158

Home Project Tab Table Type

Displays the type of tables in the catalog. Use anyone of the three options above to receive only those types of tables. Destination Table Name

Displays the destination table for the catalog to be updated from. Sourc e Table Name

Displays the name of the source table in the catalog where the information being updated is coming from. If this is listed incorrectly, click the Source Table Name box under the heading and a list appears. Select the correct source table. Destination Base ID

Specifies the ID for the destination table. Source ID

Specifies the ID for the source table. The Source ID box is editable. Destination Table Date

Displays the date of the destination table. Sourc e Table Date

Displays the date of the source table. OK

Accepts the settings and updates from the catalog, and closes the Review Table Links dialog box. Cancel

Cancels the update. Ap pl y

Saves changes from the catalog for the item selected in the Specification list. Ap pl y Al l

Saves changes from the catalog for all items in the Specification list. Force Update

Updates the item selected in the Specification list. Force Update All

Updates all items in the Specification list. Help

Displays the CADWorx help file. 

Change the Sourc e Table Name and Source IDs as needed, and then click OK to update. Alternatively, you can click Force Update or Force Update All .

To view the Review Table Link s dialog box in a catalog, your catalog must use a base catalog and the catalog must contain data. You can access this option by right-clicking the catalog and selecting Review Table Link s .


159

Home Project Tab

Legacy Specification Panel Specificatio n CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Legacy Specificatio

Enables you to import specs from earlier versions of CADWorx. Import Legacy Specification - Imports specifications from an earlier version of CADWorx. For more information, see Import Legacy Specification (on page 160) page 160)..

Impor t Legacy Specific Specific ation Specificatio n > Import Legacy Specification CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Legacy Specificatio

Imports specifications from an earlier version of CADWorx. Specification

Specifies the specification folder for import. Catalog

Specifies the base catalog for the im port. Size Table

Specifies the size table for the im port. 1.

Click the Home tab, and then click Import Legacy Specification Specification panel.

on the Legacy

The Import Legacy Specification (.spc) dialog box displays.

2.

Click the Specification ellipsis.

3.

Navigate to the folder and specification file for import, import, and then select it. it.

4.

Click Open . The Specification and Catalog boxes Catalog boxes are populated.

5.

To change the Catalog box, click the Catalog ellipsis. You must have a catalog already s et up, with the data for the specification already imported into it.

6.


7. Click Import . The Converted successfully dialog successfully dialog box appears.

8.

Click OK .

9.

Click File > Save to save the changes to the project.


160

Home Project Tab

Export/Impor Expor t/Impor t Data Data Pane Panell CADWorx Spec Editor Home Project tab: Export Data Export to Excel - Exports the selected specification to an Excel file. For more information, see Export to Excel (on page 161) page 161).. Export to Text - Exports the selected specification to a text file. For more information, see Export to Text (on page 172) page 172).. Import Update From Excel - Imports a specification from an Excel file. For more information, see Import Update From Excel (on page 172) page 172)..

Export to Excel CADWorx Spec Editor Home Project tab: Export/Import Data > Export to Excel Exports data from the selected specification to an Excel file. The Specification Editor exports specifications using E xcel named cells, allowing you to create or use your own Excel specification templates. You can control data contents and placement b y location of the supported cell names or by the inclusion or exclusion of the cell names. For more information on supported cell names, see Cell Name Reference - Specification Properties (on page 162) page 162),, and Cell Name Reference - Component Properties (on page 165) page 165).. The Specification Editor restricts imports to target a specification origi nating from an export. The updated Excel interface capabilities include: Control over format of export export template through Excel named fields. Control over content of export through removal of unwanted fields from the the export template. Ability to export basic component component listing with one component record record per size range. Ability to export detailed component listing with one component record per unique size. Ability to make updates updates to specification properties properties and component properties in the Excel export and import the updates back into the or iginating spec. Ability to review data changes on import and include or exclude specific data updates from the import.     



Export Specification to Excel Excel Dialog Box Enables you to export an Excel file with a template. Template path

Specifies the template you want to use for the Excel export.

What What do you w ant to do? 

Cell Name Reference - Specification Properties (on page 162 162))



Cell Name Reference - Component Properties (on page 165) page 165)



Export multiple specifications or an entire project to Excel (on page 171) page 171)



Export a single specification to Excel (on page 171) page 171)


161

Home Project Tab

Cell Cell Name Name Reference Reference - Specifi Specifi cation catio n Prop erties The table below lists available Specification Properties . You can export these single-value specification properties to an Excel file. T he Cell Name reference listed beside each Specification Property indicates the same Excel cell name used to export each associated Specification Property . An X in the E xport and Import columns designates the available properties for export and import. If you include any of the listed Specification Property Cell Names in the selected Excel template, then those names populate with the associated Specification Property value. For Specifi cation ID in the Excel t emplate that you create, then the example, if you include the Specifi value of the Specification ID in the Specification Editor exports to the Excel file. The location of the Cell Name in the Excel template represents the position of the exported Specification Property value. Specifi cation Prop erty Cell Names from the selected Excel If you exclude any of the listed Specifi template, then those names remove the associated Specification Property value from the export. For example, if you do not i nclude the Specification ID in the Excel template that you create, then the Specification ID does not export to the Excel file. Specifi Specifi cation Property

Cell Cell Name

Export

Import

Specifi Specifi cation ID

SPEC_GUID

X

-

Specifi Specifi cation Name

SPEC_NAME

X

X

Catalog Name

SPEC_CAT_NAME

X

-

Catalog Path

SPEC_CAT_PATH

X

-

Specification Units

SPEC_UNIT

X

-

Size Table Name

SPEC_SIZE_TBL

X

-

DBCode Table Name

SPEC_DBCODE_TBL

X

X

Thickness Table Name

SPEC_THK_TBL

X

X

Material Table Name

SPEC_MAT_TBL

X

X

Bolt Diameter Table Name

SPEC_BOLT_DIA_TBL

X

X

Bolt Length Table Name Name

SPEC_BOLT_LEN_TBL

X

X

End Prep Table Name

SPEC_ENDPREP_TBL

X

X

Weight Weight Factor Factor

SPEC_WEIGHT_FACTOR

X

X

Component Class

SPEC_COMPONENT_CLASS SPEC_COMPONENT_CL ASS X

X

Temperature Rating

SPEC_TEMPERATURE_RATI X NG

X

Pressure Rating

SPEC_PRESSURE_RATING

X

X

Spec Level Layer Name

SPEC_LAYER_NAME

X

X

CAD Color Index

SPEC_COLOR_INDEX SPEC_COLOR_INDE X

X

X

Lim it Spec Size Range To

SPEC_SIZE_RANGE

X

X


162

Home Project Tab Default Flange Type

SPEC_DEFAULT_FLANGE

X

X

Reducin Reducin g Component Selection

SPEC_REDUCING_SELECTI ON

X

X

Version

SPEC_VERSION

X

-

Created By

SPEC_CREATED_BY

X

X

Edited By

SPEC_EDITED_BY

X

X

Spec Spec Descriptio n

SPEC_DESCRIPTION

X

X

Default OTAP SKEY

SPEC_DEFAULT_OTAP_SKE X Y

X

Export Date

EXPORT_DATE

-

X

The following table lists available Specification Schedule Properties . A specification schedule setup displays a range of schedule values with one value for each pipe size. The Cell Name reference listed beside each Specification Schedule Property indicates the Excel cell name used to export each associated Specification Schedule Property . An X in the Export and Import columns designates the available properties for export and import. If you include any of the listed Specification Schedule Property Cell Names in the selected Excel template, then those names populate with the as sociated Specification Schedule Property value. For example, if you include the Schedule Size in the Excel template that you create, then the value of the Schedule Size in the Specification Editor exports to the Excel file. The location of the Cell Name in the Excel template represents the top row of the exported Specification Schedule range. Subsequent rows in the exported Specification Schedule range insert directly below the top row. If you exclude any of the listed Specification Schedule Property Cell Names from the selected Excel template, then those names remove the associated Specification Schedule Property value from the export. For example, if you do not include the Schedule Size in the Excel template that you create, then the Schedule Size does not export to the Excel file. Specifi Specifi cation Schedule Property

Cell Cell Name

Export

Import

Schedule Size

SCH_SIZE

X

-

Schedule Value

SCH_VALUE

X

X

Properti es. A specification The following table lists available Specification Custom Field Properti custom field setup displays a range-type setup with each custom field value listed for each specification custom field. The Cell Name reference listed beside each Specification Custom Field Property indicates the Excel cell name used to export each associated Specification Custom Field Property. An X in the Export and Import columns designates the available properties for export and import. Cell Names in the If you include any of the listed Specification Cust om Field Property Cell selected Excel template, then those names populate with the associated Specification Custom Field Property value. For example, if you include the Title in the Excel template that you create, then the value of the Title in the Specification Editor exports to the Excel file.


163

Home Project Tab The location of the Cell Name in the Excel template represents the top row of the exported Specifi Specifi cation Custom Field range. Subsequent rows in the exported Specification Custom Field range insert directly below the top row. Cell Names from the If you exclude any of the listed Specification Custo m Field Property Cell selected Excel template, then those names remove the associated Specification Custom Field Property Cell Names value from the export. For exam ple, if you do not include the Title in the Excel template that you create, then the Title does not export to the Excel file. Specifi Specifi cation Custom Field Property

Cell Cell Name

Export

Import

Name

FIELD_NAME

X

-

Title

FIELD_TITLE

X

X

Description

FIELD_DESCRIPTION

X

X

Data Type

FIELD_DATA_TYPE

X

-

Required Required Input

FIELD_REQUIRED_INPUT FIELD_REQUIRED_I NPUT

X

X

Default

FIELD_DEFAULT_VALUE

X

X

At tac h t o Co mp on ent

FIELD_ATTACH

X

X

Properti es. A specification The following table lists available Specification Br anch Table Properti branch table setup displays a table-type setup listing Main by Reduction size values. The Cell Name reference listed beside each Specification Br anch Table Table Property indicates the Excel Specifi cation Branch Table Property . An X in the cell name used to export each associated Specifi Export and Import columns designates the available properties for export and import. Cell Names Names in the If you include any of the listed Specification Branch Table Property Cell selected Excel template, then those names populate with the associated Specification Branch Table Property value. For example, if you include the Branch Table in the Excel template that you create, then the value of the Branch Table in the Specification Editor exports to the Excel file.

The location of the BRANCH_TABLE Cell in the Excel template represents the top-left intersection of the Main Size and Branch Size headers for the exported Specification Branch Table. All Branch Table values populate consistent with the Branch Table setup in the Specification Editor respective to this Cell Name header intersection location. The location of the BRANCH_LEGEND Cell in the Excel template represents the top row of the Legend . Subsequent rows in the exported Specification exported Specification B ranch Table Legend Branch Table Legend insert directly below the top row. If you exclude any of the listed Specification Branch Table Property Cell Names from the selected Excel template, then those names remove the associated Specification B ranch Table Property Cell Names value from the export. For example, if you do not include the Branch Table in the Excel template that you create, then the Branch Table does not export to the Excel file. Specifi Specifi cation Branch Table Property

Cell Cell Name

Export

Import

Branch Table

BRANCH_TABLE

X

X

Branch Table Legend

BRANCH_LEGEND

X

-


164

Home Project Tab

Cell Cell Name Name Reference Reference - Compon ent Propert ies You can list component properties in a basic format, a detailed format, or both. Format , component data exports much the same way it lists in the Under the Basic Listing Format Specification Editor's Component list . A single record exports for each com ponent item in the specification, representing the full size range for that component as listed in the specification.

When you import updates from the Excel specification details into the same target specification From Excel in the Specification Editor, the updates made to the items in using Import Update From Format import only the updated data. the Basic Listing Format

Basic Listing Format The following table lists available Component Properties with the associated Cell Name references for the Basic Listing Format export. You can export these sin gle-value component properties to an Excel file. The Cell Name reference listed beside each Component Property indicates the same Excel cell name used to export each associated Component Property using Format . An X in the Export and Import columns designates the available the Basic Listing Format properties for export and import. If you include any of the listed Component Property Cell Names in the selected Excel template, then those names populate with the associated Component Property value. For example, if you include the Component ID in the Excel template that you create, then the value of the Component ID in the Specification Editor exports to the Excel file. The location of the Cell Name in the Excel template represents the position of the exported Component Property value. If you exclude any of the l isted Component Property Cell Names from the selected Excel template, then those names remove the associated Component Property value from export. For example, if you do not include the Component ID in the Excel template that you create, then the Component ID does not export to the Excel file. Component Property

Cell Cell Name – Basic Listi ng Format

Export

Import

Component ID

COMP_ID

X

-

Component Group Single

COMP_GROUP_GRP

X

-

Component Group Repeat

COMP_GROUP_RPT

X

-

Type

COMP_TYPE

X

-

Data Table

COMP_DATA_TBL

X

-

Size Range

COMP_SIZE_RANGE

X

X

BOM Type

COMP_BOM

X

X

Layer Name

COMP_LAYER_NAME

X

X


165

Home Project Tab Color Index

COMP_COLOR_INDEX

X

X

IndexCode

COMP_INDEXCODE

X

X

Optional Component

COMP_OPTIONAL

X

X

Start End Type

COMP_START_END_TYPE

X

X

Start Isogen Symbol

COMP_START_ISOGEN_SYM

X

X

Start Component Class COMP_START_COMPONENT_CLASS

X

X

Start Temperature Rating

COMP_START_TEMPERATURE_RATIN G

X

X

Start Pressure Rating

COMP_START_PRESSURE_RATING

X

X

End End Type

COMP_END_END_TYPE

X

X

End Isogen Symbol

COMP_END_ISOGEN_SYM

X

X

End Component Class

COMP_END_COMPONENT_CLASS

X

X

End Temperature Rating

COMP_END_TEMPERATURE_RATING

X

X

End Pressure Rating

COMP_END_PRESSURE_RATING

X

X

Branch1 End Type

COMP_BRANCH1_END_TYPE

X

X

Branch1 Isogen Symbol

COMP_BRANCH1_ISOGEN_SYM

X

X

Branch1 Component Class

COMP_BRANCH1_COMPONENT_CLAS S

X

X

Branch1 Temperature Rating

COMP_BRANCH1_TEMPERATURE_RAT X ING

X

Branch1 Pressure Rating

COMP_BRANCH1_PRESSURE_RATING

Branch2 End Type

COMP_BRANCH2_END_TYPE


COMP_BRANCH2_ISOGEN_SYM


COMP_BRANCH2_COMPONENT_CLAS S


X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

166

Home Project Tab Branch2 Temperature Rating

COMP_BRANCH2_TEMPERATURE_RAT X ING


COMP_BRANCH2_PRESSURE_RATING

Ap pl y s ame en d t yp e

COMP_SAME_ENDTYPE

Ap pl y s ame r ati ng to all ends

COMP_SAME_RATING

Isogen Identifier

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

COMP_ISOGEN_IDENTIFIER

X

X

Isogen SKEY

COMP_ISOGEN_SKEY

X

X

Topworks Data Table

COMP_TOPWORK_TBL

X

X

Main Schedule

COMP_MAIN_SCH

X

X

Reducti on Schedule

COMP_RED_SCH

X

X

Material

COMP_MAT

X

X

Sort Sequence

COMP_SORT_SEQUENCE

X

X

Long Description

COMP_LONG_DESC

X

X

Short Description

COMP_SHORT_DESC

X

X

Tag

COMP_TAG

X

X

Part Number

COMP_PART_NUMBER

X

X

Notes

COMP_NOTES

X

X

Custom Field ‘ABC’

COMP_FIELD_ABC

X

-

The values for component properties listed under the Basic Listing Format column export with the property settings assigned to each component in the Specification Editor. The Long Description , Short Description , Part Number , and Tag schemas export as their respective schema strings. The Use Specification Schedule, Use Specification Material, and other component setting options export as Use Specificatio n Schedule, Use Specification Material , and so on.


167

Home Project Tab Detailed Listing Format Under the Detailed List ing Format , component data exports by component item size. A single record exports for each component item size available across the specification components. When you import updates from the Excel specification into the target specification using Import From Excel Update in the Specification Editor, only updates made to the Component Basic Listing import. Any updates you make to the Detailed Listi ng Formats do not import, because the Component Properties are managed at the component item level specification not at the component item size level. The following table lists available Component Properties with associated Cell Name references for Detailed Listi ng Format export. The Detailed List ing Format Cell Names are identical to the Basic Listing Format Cell Names , with the exception of a _D suffix attached to the Detailed Listi ng Format . You can export these single-value component properties to an Excel export. The Cell Name reference listed beside each Component Property indicates the Excel cell name used to export each associated Component Property using the Detailed Listing Format . An X in the Export column designates the properties available for export. You cannot import detailed listed format items. If you include any of the listed Component Property Cell Names in the selected Excel template, then those names populate with the associated Component Property value. For example, if you include the Type in the Excel template that you create, then the value of the Type in the Specification Editor exports to the Excel file. The location of the Cell Name in the Excel template represents the position of the exported Component Property value. If you exclude any of the l isted Component Property Cell Names from the selected Excel template, then those names remove the associated Component Property value from export. For example, if you do not include the Type in the Excel template that you create, then the Type does not export to the Excel file. Component Property Cell Name – Detailed Listi ng Format

Export

Import

Component Group Single

COMP_GROUP_GRP_D

X

-

Component Group Repeat

COMP_GROUP_RPT_D

X

-

Type

COMP_TYPE_D

X

-

Data Table

COMP_DATA_TBL_D

X

-

Size Range

COMP_SIZE_EACH

X

-

BOM Type

COMP_BOM_D

X

-

Layer Name

COMP_LAYER_NAME_D

X

-

Color Index

COMP_COLOR_INDEX_D

X

-

IndexCode

COMP_INDEXCODE_D

X

-


168

Home Project Tab Optional Component

COMP_OPTIONAL_D

X

-

Start End Type

COMP_START_END_TYPE_D

X

-

Start Isogen Symbol

COMP_START_ISOGEN_SYM_D

X

-

Start Component Class

COMP_START_COMPONENT_CLASS_D

X

-

Start Temperature Rating

COMP_START_TEMPERATURE_RATING_ X D

-

Start Pressure Rating

COMP_START_PRESSURE_RATING_D

End End Type

X

-

COMP_END_END_TYPE_D

X

-

End Isogen Symbol

COMP_END_ISOGEN_SYM_D

X

-

End Component Class

COMP_END_COMPONENT_CLASS_D

X

-

End Temperature Rating

COMP_END_TEMPERATURE_RATING_D

X

-

End Pressure Rating

COMP_END_PRESSURE_RATING_D

X

-

Branch1 End Type

COMP_BRANCH1_END_TYPE_D

X

-


COMP_BRANCH1_ISOGEN_SYM_D

X

-


COMP_BRANCH1_COMPONENT_CLASS_ X D

-

Branch1 Temperature Rating

COMP_BRANCH1_TEMPERATURE_RATIN X G_D

-


COMP_BRANCH1_PRESSURE_RATING_D

Branch2 End Type

COMP_BRANCH2_END_TYPE_D


COMP_BRANCH2_ISOGEN_SYM_D


X

-

X

-

X

-

COMP_BRANCH2_COMPONENT_CLASS_ X D

-


169

Home Project Tab Branch2 Temperature Rating

COMP_BRANCH2_TEMPERATURE_RATIN X G_D


COMP_BRANCH2_PRESSURE_RATING_D

-

X

-

Ap pl y s ame en d t yp e COMP_SAME_ENDTYPE_D

X

-

Ap pl y s ame r ati ng to all ends

COMP_SAME_RATING_D

X

-

Isogen Identifier

COMP_ISOGEN_IDENTIFIER_D

X

-

Isogen SKEY

COMP_ISOGEN_SKEY_D

X

-

Topworks Data Table COMP_TOPWORK_TBL_D

X

-

Main Schedule

COMP_MAIN_SCH_D

X

-

Reducti on Schedule

COMP_RED_SCH_D

X

-

Material

COMP_MAT_D

X

-

Sort Sequence

COMP_SORT_SEQUENCE_D

X

-

Long Description

COMP_LONG_DESC_D

X

-

Short Description

COMP_SHORT_DESC_D

X

-

Tag

COMP_TAG_D

X

-

Part Number

COMP_PART_NUMBER_D

X

-

Notes

COMP_NOTES_D

X

-

Custom Field ‘ABC’

COMP_FIELD_ABC_D

X

-

Under the Detailed Listi ng Format column, the values f or the component properties list the actual values assigned to each com ponent's size when placed in the m odel. The Long Description , Short Description , Part Number , and Tag schemas translate into the actual descriptions, part numbers, and tags assigned to each component size when placed in the model. The Use Specificatio n Schedule , Use Specifi cation Material , and other component setting options translate into the actual Schedule, Material, and other values assigned to each component size when placed in the m odel.


170

Home Project Tab

Export mult iple specifications or an entir e project to Excel 1.

Open a project file, and then select the project under Project Specs .

2.

On the Home tab, click Export to Excel on the Export/Import Data panel. Alternatively, right-click, and then select Export Specificatio ns To Excel. The Export Specification s to Excel dialog box displays.

3.

Select a template from the Template list, or click Browse to find another template.

4.

Click Export .

5.

Select a location where you want to save the file, and then click OK . The files save to the selected folder.

To view the file, open it in Excel from Windows Explorer . You can now make changes to the exported Excel files, and then import those c hanges into the Specification Editor. For more information on importing specifications to the Specification Editor, see Import Update From Excel (on page 172), Import data from Excel to a specification (on page 173), Cell Name Reference - Specification Properties (on page 162), and Cell Name Reference - Component Properties (on page 165).

Export a single specific ation to Excel 1.

Open a project file, and then select a specification.

2.

On the Home tab, click Export to Excel on the Export/Import Data panel. Alternatively, right-click, and then select Export Specific ation To Excel. The Export Specification to Excel dialog box displays.

3.

Select a template from the Template list, or click Browse to find another template.

4. Click Export . 5. Select a location to save the file, and then click Save. The file saves to the selected folder.

To view the file, open it in Excel from Windows Explorer . You can now make changes to the exported Excel files, and then import those c hanges into the Specification Editor. For more information on importing specifications to the Specification Editor, see Import Update From Excel (on page 172), Import data from Excel to a specification (on page 173), Cell Name Reference - Specification Properties (on page 162), and Cell Name Reference - Component Properties (on page 165).


171

Home Project Tab

Export to Text CADWorx Spec Editor Home Project tab: Export/Import Data > Export to Text Exports data from the selected specification to a text fil e. 1.


2.

On the Home tab, click Export to Text on the Export/Import Data panel. Alternatively, right-click, and then select Export Specific ation To Text. The Export Specification to Text dialog box displays.

3.

Select location to save the document, and then click Save. The text document saves to the selected folder.

To view the document open it in Windows Explorer .

Import Update From Excel CADWorx Spec Editor Project: Home Tab > Export/Import Data > Import Update From Excel

Imports data from an Excel file to a specification. File Path

Specifies the location of the Excel file. Select the components for import

Displays the information details for the import. Import

Enables you to select the items to import. Type

Displays the type of import if the im port contains a type. Description

Displays a description of the im port. For example, if you made a change t o the Pipe component, the Description displays the long description of the piping. However, if you changed the Component ID or the Program Code of Pipe in the Excel file, the description displays the Table Field types that display in Long in the New and Edit Component pane. Property

Displays the property that you changed in the Excel file. Ac ti on

Displays the action taken for the import. For example, if you change the Weight factor in the Excel file, the Acti on reads Update, because the action taken updates the specification. In addition, if you changed the Component ID or the Program Code of Pipe in the Excel file, the Acti on reads Addi tio n , because this action adds a new component to the specification.


172

Home Project Tab Existing Spec

Displays the value of the property from the existing sp ecification. Excel Spec

Displays the value of the property from the Excel file. The value displa yed here comes from the changes made to the Excel file. Result

Displays success or failure of the imported property.



Success =



Failure = Import data displays in red before import. After import you receive the following:

Saves backup pr oject

Saves a backup of the original project. View Lo g

Enables you to view a log of the import.

Import data from Excel to a specifi cation 1.


2.

On the Home tab, click Import Update From Excel on the Export/Import Data panel. Alternatively, right-click, and the select Import Update From Excel . The Import Excel Specification dialog box displays.

3.

Click the File Path ellipsis, browse to the location where you stored the export, select it, and then click Open . The changes from the exported file populate the Import Excel Specification dialog box.

4. Review the data, and then select the check boxes of the components and properties you want to import. 5. Click Import . The data import runs.

6. Click Close. The Excel updates display in the required properties and components.


173

Home Project Tab

Editing Panel CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Editing Enables you to edit specified values. Find and Replace - Finds and replaces specific values. For more information, see Find and Replace (on page 174).

Find and Replace CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Editing > Find and Replace Finds and replaces specific values in the Spec Editor data.

Look in Current Project

Searches in the current project. Current Specification

Searches in the current specification.

Find options Search keyword m ode

Matches the search to the keyword in the Find what box. If you use the Replace option, the software replaces the keyword with the word you type in the Replace wit h box. For example, if you type COMPTYPE in the Find what box, then type Steam in the Replace with box, and then click Replace All, t he software replaces any component long descriptions that have the keyword COMPTYPE with the word Steam . For example, COMPTYPE_CMP_TBL becomes Steam_CMP_TBL . The software also changes the keywords into non-keywords. In the above example, the software displays Steam_CMP_TBL as the name of your component. Match case

Matches the search to the case (lower or upper) in the Find what box. Match w hole word

Matches the search to the exact whole word in the Find what box. Search Up

Matches the search moving upwards in the Spec Editor rather than downwards.


174

Home Project Tab Find type Long description

Matches the search to the long description. Short description

Matches the search to the short description. Tag

Matches the search to the tag data. Long description , Short description , and Tag can be selected at the same time so that the search finds all types associated with the text.

Find 1.

On the Home tab, click Find and Replace

on the Editing panel.

The Find and Replace dialog box displays.

2.

Type the text you want to find in the Find what box.

3.

Specify parameters for Look in , Find options , and Find type.

4.

Click Find Next . The value displays.

Replace 1.

On the Home tab, click Find and Replace

on the Editing panel.

The Find and Replace dialog box displays.

2.

Type the text you want to find in the Find what box.

3.

Select the Replace wit h check box. The Replace wit h box activates.

4.

Type the text to replace in the Replace wit h box.

5.

Specify parameters in Look in , Find options , and Find type.

6.

Click Find Next, and then click Replace. OR Click Replace. OR Click Replace All . Replace All replaces every instance of the text in the Find what box throughout the Spec Editor for the open project. Use this option with caution. The value replaces.


175

SECTION 6

View Project Tab Select a check box to open each window. Display - Displays the Project Specs , Base Catalog Data, Project Catalog Data, Pipe Support Library , and Properties . For more information, see Display Panel (on page 176). Spec Lis t Mode - Displays the views of the specifications in t he Category Li st Mode or the Group List Mode. For more information, see Spec List Mode Panel (on page 209).

Display Panel CADWorx Spec Editor View tab: Display Project Specs - Displays the current project, and enables you to add, delete, o pen, and import specification data. For more information, see Project Specs (on page 176). Base Catalog Data - Displays all the information in the base catalog of CADWorx. For more information, see Base Catalog Data (on page 115). Project Catalog Data - Displays all the information attached to the open project. For more information, see Project Catalog Data (on page 176). Pipe Suppor t Library - Displays the Pipe Support Library pane, and enables you to add or import pipe supports to the project or pipe support libraries file. For more information, see Pipe Support Library (on page 177). Properties - Displays the properties of all the data in t he project. For more information, see Properties (on page 192).

Project Specs CADWorx Spec Editor View tab: Project Specs Displays the current project, and enables you to add, delete, open, and import specification data. For more information, see Specification Panel (on page 122). Selecting the Project Specs check box, hides or displays the Project Specs view.

Project Catalog Data CADWorx Spec Editor View tab: Project Catalog Data Displays all the information attached to the open project. The Project Catalog Data includes the information taken from the catalog and the information from the added specifications. Project Catalog Data enables you to view, but not change, the information. Edits can onl y be made when working with the edit options in the Home tab of the Spec Editor. Selecting the Project Catalog Data check box hides or displays the Project Catalog Data view.


176

View Project Tab

Pipe Suppor t Li brary CADWorx Spec Editor View tab: Pipe Support Library Displays the pipe supports associated with the current project, and enables you to add additional supports.

Right-click Menus Right-click the project or pipe support libraries file listed in the Pipe Support Library pane to access the following options: Ad d Pi pe Su pp or t L ib rar y Enables you to add a new pipe support library to the proj ect. For more information, see Add Pipe Support Library (on page 154). Import Pipe Support Library Enables you to import a pipe support library. For more information, see Import Legacy Pipe Support Library (on page 156). Expand/Collapse Expands or collapses the pipe supports i n the project. Properties Displays the Properties for the project. After adding a new pipe support, right-click the pipe support to get the following options: Open Displays the pipe support New Component pane. Ad d Gr ou p Pip e Sup po rt As sem bl y Enables you to add a new group to store a set of assemblies under. For more information, see Add Group Pipe Support Assembly (on page 178). Ad d Pi pe Su pp or t As sem bl y Enables you to add a new assembly to a group assembly folder. For more information, see Add Pipe Support Assembly (on page 178). Copy Support Assembly Enables you to make a c opy of the pipe support. Remove Enables you to remove the pipe support from the project. Rename Enables you to rename the assembly file. Expand/Collapse Expands or collapses the pipe supports i n the project. Properties Displays the Pipe Support Library properties.

Properties for the component table can be found in the Appendix. For more information, see PipeSupport (on page 264).

What do you w ant to do?        

Add Pipe Support Library (on page 154) Import Legacy Pipe Support Library (on page 156) Add Group Pipe Support Assembly (on page 178) Add Pipe Support Assembly (on page 178) Add a new support assembly (on page 181) Edit a support assembly (on page 182) Edit Pipe Support Component Pane (on page 183) Edit a support component (on page 192)


177

View Project Tab

Add Gr ou p Pi pe Supp or t As sem bl y CADWorx Spec Editor Project: View Tab > Pipe Support Library > Right-click the project in the Pipe Support Library pane > Right-click the pipe support library > Select Ad d Gr ou p Pi pe Support Assembly CADWorx Spec Editor Pipe Support Library File: View Tab > Pipe Support Library > Rightclick the library in the Pipe Support Library pane > Select Add Gro up Pip e Sup po rt As sem bl y Adds a new support group to the pipe support library in the .prj or .psl file. Group Name

Specifies the group name for a group of assemblies. This name displays in the CADWorx Support Modeler palette. Expanding the group name lists the assemblies under this group. From this location, you can edit the data contained in a specific assembly or a pipe support component. Description

Specifies a description of the assembly group.

Add Pi pe Supp or t Assem bl y CADWorx Spec Editor Project: View Tab > Pipe Support Library > Right-click the project in the Pipe Support Library pane > Right-click the pipe support libraries file > Select Add Pi pe Support Assembly CADWorx Spec Editor Pipe Support Library File: View Tab > Pipe Support Library > Rightclick the library in the Pipe Support Library pane > Select Add Pi pe Su pp or t Assem bl y Controls parameters for adding and editing supports to the .prj or .psl file. General:

Specifies general information about the pipe su pport such as the Name and Size Range. 

Group Name

Specifies the name for a group of assemblies. This name displays in the CADWorx Support Modeler palette. Expanding the group name lists the assemblies under this group. From this location, you can edit the data contained in a specific assembly or a pipe support component. Specifies the name of the su pport. 

As sem bl y Nam e

Specifies the name of the assembly. 

Size Range

Specifies the sizes for the assembly. Click the Component Size Setup ellipsis define default sizes for each Pipe Size of the support. For more information, see Component Size Setup (on page 181).


to

178

View Project Tab Insulation Options: 

Increase suppor t size if component is insu lated

Automatically selects a larger size support component based on the insulation thickness. For example, a six-inch nominal si ze pipe (6.625 inch actual OD) has fourinch thick insulation (14.625 inch OD). This makes the total pipe diameter 6.625 i nch actual OD plus 8 inch insulation OD. The software determines the support by looking it up in the data file. 

Use next larger s ize if exact size is not available

Specifies that if the software does not contain the exact size support in the data file with the insulation, then the software selects the next larger size support. Components Available

Displays the support components that you can use to make an assembly. After you select a type, the list box shows the available data table for that type of support. Ad d

Moves the selected item from the Components Available list to the Components Selected list. Remove

Moves the selected item from the Components Selected list to the Components Available list. Components Selected

Displays the components in the assembly. The support builds using the selected components in the order shown. After you add an assembly with a group of components, the individual pipe support components can be edited by expanding the assem bly, and then selecting the component you want to edit. For m ore information, see Edit Pipe Support Component Pane (on page 183). Move Up

Moves the selected item one position higher i n the assembly sequence. Move Down

Moves the selected item one position lower in the assembly sequence. CAESAR II Type

Specifies the restraint type of the support for use i n CAESAR II pipe stress analysis. BOM: 

Sort

Locates a component item in the bill of material schedule. Type the needed value. Type 0 to place the item first in the schedule. Type 999 to place the item last. If the same sort numbers are used for different components, they are placed in alphabetical order. 

Type

Specifies the bill of m aterial type. Select Fabrication , Erection , Offshore, or Misc .


179

View Project Tab Isogen Options: 

Identifier

Specifies the identifier value Isogen uses f or an isometric drawing. For more information, see SKEY Information in the CADWorx Plant Users Guide. 

SKEY

Specifies the SKEY value Isogen uses for an isometric drawing. If you do not specify an SKEY value, then CADWorx uses the default Isogen Support symbol during Isometric Drawing generation. For more information, see SKEY Information in the CADWorx Plant Users Guide. 

Message Type

Specifies the format of text displayed with the support. 

Message Text

Specifies text displayed with the support. 

Detail Sketch

Specifies a CAD .dwg file containing details about the support. Select the file from the Select detail sketch file dialog box. Description: 

Long

Describes the pipe support assembly. The bill of materials uses this description. 

Short

Specifies the abbreviated description for the pipe support assembly. 

Tag

Specifies an optional tag description for the pipe support assembly. 

Part Number

Specifies the part number information of the pipe su pport assembly. For more information, see Pipe Support Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 214). 

Notes

Specifies any notes attached to the pipe support assembly.




Add a new support assembly (on page 181) Edit a support assembly (on page 182)


180

View Project Tab Component Size Setup Pipe Size

Specifies the size of the pip e for the pipe support. You can change the size of a support member that attaches to a nominal pipe size. For example, if you want a five-inch clevis hanger and rod around a four-inch pipe, do the following: Select 4.0000, click the ellipsis next to the size under Size/Member , select 5.0000, and then click OK . Size/Member

Specifies the nominal size for the pipe support. If you have a steel part in the support, then this area specifies the steel member. Click the ellipsis to select a different si ze for the part from the dialog box. The dialog box contains information pertaining to the specific pipe support part, such as Nominal Size, Thickness , Length , Width, and Weight . Name

Specifies the name of the pipe su pport component. Length

Specifies the length of the pipe support component. If there is no available length for a pipe support component, then this box displays Disable. You can change this value when a length is available. Width

Specifies the width of the pipe support component. If there is no available width for a pipe support component, then this box displays Disable. You can change this value when a width is available. Cascade size selection

Specifies that any size change you make in the Pipe Support Data size selection dialog box updates all parts in the Size/Member column. If you do not want to update all sizes, clear the Cascade size selection check box.

Add a new support assembly 1.

Right-click the pipe support under the project or libraries file in the Pipe Support Library pane.

2.

Click Add Pi pe Su pp or t As sem bl y . The New assembly pane displays.

3.

Type a Group Name.

4. Type an As sem bl y Nam e or use the default. 5. Select the Size Range list, and then select or clear sizes from the list. You can click the Component Size Setup ellipsis to change the Size\Member sizes for each Pipe Size. 6. Select the Insulation Options as needed by selecting their respective check boxes. 7. Select a component from the Components Available list. You can repeat this as needed to build an assembly of c omponents.


181

View Project Tab 8.

Use the Add or Remove arrows to move the component parts needed to the Components Selected box. Alternatively, you can drag the component parts needed to the Components Selected box. Use the Move Up or Move Down arrows to rearrange the order of the parts as they display in the drawing in the Components Selected box.

9.

Select a CAESAR II Type.

10. Type the Sort for the bill of materials. 11. Select the Type for the bill of materials. 12. Type an Identifier . 13. Select the SKEY for the support for isometric generation. 14. Type a message text to appear for the pipe support. 15. Select a Message Type. 16. Select a Detail Sketch , by selecting the ellipsis. 17. Type the long description in the Long box, or click … to set up a format. 18. Type the short description in the Short box, or click … to set up a format. 19. Type the tag in the Tag box, or click … to set up a format. 20. Type the part number in the Part Number box, or click … to set up a format. 21. Type the notes in the Notes box. 22. Click Ad d .

See Also 

Edit Pipe Support Component Pane (on page 183)



Edit a support component (on page 192)

Edit a suppor t assembly 1.

Click the pipe support assembly in the Pipe Support Library pane. The Edit assembly pane displays.

2.

Change the Group Name, if needed.

3.

Change the As sem bl y Nam e, if needed.

4.

Select the Size Range list, and then select or clear sizes from the list as needed. You can click the Component Size Setup ellipsis to change Size/Member sizes for each Pipe Size.

5.

Select or clear the Insulation Options as needed.

6.

Select a component from the Components Available list to add a new component to the assembly.

7.

Use the Add or Remove Components Selected box.

arrows to move the component parts needed to or from the

Use the Move Up or Move Down arrows to rearrange the order of the parts as they display in the drawing in the Components Selected box.


182

View Project Tab 8.

Change the CAESAR II Type as needed.

9.

Change the Sort for the bill of materials, if needed.

10. Change the Type for the bill of materials, if needed. 11. Change the identifier for Isogen in the Identifier box, if needed. 12. Change the SKEY for Isogen, if needed. 13. Select a Message Type, if needed. 14. Type a message text to appear for the pipe support. 15. Select a Detail Sketch , by selecting the ellipsis. 16. Update the long description in the Long box. 17. Update the short description in the Short box. 18. Update the tag in the Tag box. 19. Update the part number in the Part Number box. 20. Update the notes in the Notes box.

See Also Edit Pipe Support Component Pane (on page 183)

Edit Pipe Support Component Pane CADWorx Spec Editor Project: View Tab > Pipe Support Library > click a pipe support component, such as Pipe I_sup . CADWorx Spec Editor Pipe Support Library File: View Tab > Pipe Support Library > click a pipe support component, such as Pipe I_sup . Controls parameters for editing pipe support components in the project or .psl file. BOM: 

Sort

Locates a component item in the bill of material schedule. Type the needed value. Type 0 to place the item first in the schedule. Type 999 to place the item last. If you specify the same sort numbers for different components, the software places those components in alphabetical order. 

Type

Specifies the type of bill of material item. Select Fabrication , Erection , Offshore, or Misc .

Steel Option The information in Steel Opt ion comes from the steel library that you set in the SteelLibrary property of you Pipe Support Library . These options only display if you have a steel component in your assembly, and only when you select that steel component. Steel L ength

Specifies the length of the steel.


183

View Project Tab Member

Specifies the steel member name. Plate Width

Specifies the width of the plate on the steel. Center Lin e

Specifies the center line of the s teel member. Plate Length

Specifies the length of the plate o n the steel.

Connections Ad d

Adds a connection point to the Connection list. Remove

Removes a connection point from the Connection list Connection List

Displays the connections on the pipe support component. Select a connection to change the At tac h To , the End Type, and the Connect To options. 

At tac h To

Specifies whether the connection of the part attaches to another pipe support part (Other ), a Pipe, or a Steel component. 

Pipe

Specifies that the selected connection attaches to a piece of pipe. 

Direction Vector

Sets the direction vector for connection points attached to Pipe in the direction that aligns with the support insertion direction. 

Al ig nm ent Vect or

Sets the alignment vector for connection points attached to Pipe in the direction that aligns with the centerline of the pipe. See Example of Direction and Alig nment Vector s using Pipe (on page 187) 

Other

Specifies that the selected connection attaches to another pipe su pport part. 

Direction Vector

Sets the direction vector for connection points attached to Other in the direction toward the connected component. 


Sets the alignment vector in any direction perpendicular to the direction vector. See Example of Direction and Alignment Vectors u sing Other (on page 189)


184

View Project Tab 

Steel

Specifies that the selected connection attaches to a steel component. 

Direction Vector

Sets the direction vector for connection points attached to Steel in the direction you want the Steel Detect to search. This direction specifies where the attachment point makes contact with a steel member. 


Sets the alignment vector for Steel connections in any direction perpendicular to the direction vector. See Example of Direction and Alignm ent Vectors u sing Steel (on page 191) 

Connect

Specifies the connection point to which to attach the pipe support component. This option becomes available when you select Other in the At tac h t o list. If you select None, the currently selected pipe support for that sele cted connection does not have a connecting component. 

Offset to outsid e diameter of pipe

When you check this box, the com ponent connects to the outside diameter of the pipe. When you clear this box, the component connects on the centerline of the pip e. You can only use this option when you select Pipe in the At tac h To list. When you select Pipe with the Offset to outsi de diameter of pipe option, the pipe support part sets perpendicular to the diameter of the pipe. When you select Pipe without Offset to outsi de diameter of pipe option, the pipe support p art sets perpendicular to the centerline of the pipe.

Connection Point You can use the following values in the X, Y, and Z boxes: 

Numeric Values



Operators or Functions: 



+, -, *, /, SIN(), COS(), EXP(), SQRT() , LN(), TG(), CTG(), ASIN(), ACOS(), ATG(), SINH(), COSH(), TGH(), and CTGH()

Component Keywords: 

Dimensional field names from underlying data table or data file: Examples: Steel Plate has the THK , LENGTH, and WIDTH dimensional fields available from the underlying data file. Spring Hanger has the DIAMETER, and LENGTH dimensional fields available from the underlying data file.


185


Component Field Names: 



You can reference any field or column {FIELDNAME} in a data table or a data file between curly brackets, for example {CONN0}. When you use the {FIELDNAME} for the connection point, then the format of the data in that field in the data table of the Specification Editor must be in the (x,y,z) format as shown in the image below:

Assembly Keywords: 

You can use the properties of the parent piping component accessible at the pipe support component level, such as PIPEOD, PIPEID, PIPETHK and PIPESIZE. To use the Insulation offset, you must use Offset to pipe outs ide diameter.

X

Specifies the x direction of the connection point. Y

Specifies the y direction of the connection point. Z

Specifies the z direction of the connection point. Direction

Specifies the direction coordinates of the connection p oint, such as 0,0,0. Al ig nm ent

Specifies the alignment coordinates of the connection point, such as 1,0,0. For more information on setting the Direction and Al ig nm ent , see Example of Direction and Alignment Vectors using Pipe (on page 187), Example of Direction and Alignment Vectors using Other (on page 189), and Example of Direction and Alignment Vectors using Steel (on page 191).


186

View Project Tab Description: 

Long

Describes the pipe support component. The bill of materials uses this description. 

Short

Specifies the abbreviated description for the pipe support component. 

Tag

Specifies an optional tag description for the pipe support component. 

Part Number

Specifies the part number information of the pipe su pport component. For more information, see Pipe Support Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 214). 

Notes

Specifies any notes attached to the pipe support component.

See Also 

Edit a support component (on page 192)

Example of Direction and Al ignment Vectors us ing Pipe When you start a new assembly, such as a hanger, you select an insertion point, and then select an insertion direction. In this example, you select upwards for the insertion direction because when placing a hanger, you want the hanger to place upwards.


187

View Project Tab Then, insert a clamp as the first component in the hanger assembly. The Direction Vector designates which part of the clamp points in the insertion direction. In the following im age, if you selected in the Y direction up or down the pipe, the curved section of the clamp would be on the top of the pipe. You want the bolt section to be at the top of the pipe, so you select in the X direction.

The Al ig nm ent Vect or for the clamp comes out from the eye of the clamp. This specifies the centerline of the pipe for the c lamp.

The clamp arrangement inserts based on the direction and alignment vectors.


188

View Project Tab Example of Direction and Alig nment Vectors using Other If you attach a support component to another support component, you need a connection point in the location where the next component attaches. The Direction Vector must point in the direction of the connecting support component. For example, if you attach a Weldless Eye Nut to the top of a clamp bolt, you need to add a connection at the bolt location on the clamp where the Weldless Eye Nut attaches. Then, the Direction Vector for the added connection point at the clamp bolt location points up, in the direction of the Weldless Eye Nut.

The software uses the direction you define as the Al ig nm ent Vect or for the next component. Point the Al ig nm ent Vect or perpendicular to the next support component to ru n parallel with the centerline of the pipe.

When you add the Weldless Eye Nut, its connection to the clamp orients toward the connecting component. Set the Direction Vector in the same direction in which the Weldless Eye Nut needs to point. In the following example, select the Direction Vector northeast of the Y direction


189

View Project Tab so that the curve of the W eldless Eye Nut points down and the bolt on the clamp rests in that curve.

Because the Al ig nm ent Vect or at the bolt connection of the clamp runs along the pipe centerline, we set the Alig nm ent Vect or of the Weldless Eye Nut in the same direction. In the following example, select north in the Z direction so that the top of the Weldless Eye Nut points up and sets the side of Weldless Eye Nut in the Y direction.


190

View Project Tab The Weldless Eye Nut arrangement places based on the direction and alignment vectors.

Example of Direction and Al ignment Vectors us ing Steel If you want to attach a support component to a s teel member, then the Direction Vector of the Steel connection must be i n the direction of the steel member because the software uses the Detect Steel option to place the support. For example, if you have a W elded Beam Attachment, the top of the support attaches to the bottom of the steel. Therefore, the top of the Welded Beam Attachment points outward, or up, toward the connecting steel member. 1. Towards the steel member

You can set the alignment vector in any direction, as long as it is perpendicular to the previously selected direction vector.


191

View Project Tab Edit a support component 1.

Click the pipe support component under the assembly in the Pipe Support Library pane. The Edit component pane displays.

2.

Change the Sort for the bill of materials, if needed.

3.

Change the Type for the bill of materials, if needed.

4.

Update the Steel Length , if needed.

5.

Update the Member , if needed.

6.

Update the Plate Width , if needed.

7.

Update the Center Li ne, if needed.

8.

Update the Plate Length , if needed.

9.

Remove or add connections as needed in the Connection list.

10. Select a connection in the connection list, and then change the At tac h Ty pe , the End Type, and the Connect To , as needed. 11. Update the X, Y, Z, Direction , and Al ig nm ent of the connection point. 12. Update the long description in the Long box. 13. Update the short description in the Short box. 14. Update the tag in the Tag box. 15. Update the part number in the Part Number box. 16. Update the notes in the Notes box. 17. Click Ap pl y .

Properties CADWorx Spec Editor View tab: Properties Displays the properties of the specific data you have selected in the project. You can use the Properties view to change the asp ects of a specification, project, catalog, or catalog table f ile. Selecting the Fields ellipsis or double clicking Custom Data brings up the New Field or Edit Field dialog box. For more information, see New Field Dialog Box (on page 116). You can also access the Long Desc Form at Setup , Short Desc Format Setup , Tag Format Setup , Part Number Format Setup , Layer Manager , Material Ass ignment Setup , and Schedule As si gn men t Setu p and make changes. Different types of available options vary by component. Some components have available options that others do not have. You can find the property explanations in the Appendix.

See Also Property Descriptions (on page 217) Description Format Dialog Boxes (on page 193) Layer Manager Dialog Box (on page 196) Matching End Type Table Dialog Box (on page 197) Material Assignment Setup (on page 198) Schedule Assignment Setup (on page 208)


192

View Project Tab

Descri ption Format Dialog Box es CADWorx Spec Editor View tab: Display > Properties > Format Setup ellipsis Specifies the description format. Descriptions display in the Short annotation , Long annotation , Tag , and Code boxes shown in the Component Edit dialog box in CADWorx Plant. For more information, see Local Edit in the CADWorx Plant Users Guide. The information the software displays in the Component Edit dialog box is based on the associated component definition in the specification. The com ponent definition in the specification contains fields for Short Annotation , Long Annotation , Tag , and Part Number . These boxes can be populated with text data or by setting the schema in the Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 134) or Descript ion Format Dialog Box . You can access the Long Descript ion Format, Short Description Format, Tag Format, and Part Number Format dialog boxes for components from the Define User Shape dialog box. These formats can only be defined during or after you have created a user shape. If you do not define formats for the user shape, then the format is based on the specification level or the project level set in the Description Format dialog boxes in the CADWorx Spec Editor. After creation of the user shape the Long , Short , Tag , and Part Number of the Define User Shape dialog box displays in the same place as all other components. You can configure a description schema for the short annotation, long annotation, tag, and part number boxes at the project level, the specif ication level, and the component level. If you define a schema at any of these le vels, then the software derives the description from that level. Component level schemas take precedence over specification level schem as and specification level schemas take precedence over project level schemas. For instance, if the sub-category Nipple under Pipe in the Component List tree has a schema defined, then the information displaying in CADWorx for Nipple derives from this schema. If you remove the schema definition from the Nipple sub category, then when you place a Nipple in the model, the schema derives from the Pipe category description schema under the Component List tree. If you remove the description schema in Pipe, the description derives from the Component description schema in the Component List tree. If you delete all of the description schemas at the component level, then the software repeats the above process in ternally at the specification level. Next, the software repeats this process at the project le vel. When the description format is empty at the component le vel, then the box under Description in the New and Edit Compon ent Pane reads Using Specification Format. If the description format is empty at the component level and at the specification level, then the box under Description in the New and Edit Compon ent Pane reads Using Project Format . You can only access the New and Edit Compon ent Pane and the Description Format dialog boxes in the CADWorx Spec Editor. For more information on these features, see New and Edit Component Pane and Description Format Dialog Box in the CADWorx Spec Editor Users Guide. For more information on the component level, se e Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 134).


193

View Project Tab Components List

Displays the available list o f components. The Component List consists of levels of formats as described above. The main Component level covers all components. Next, the category level covers each category type of component. The next level contains the individual components. The software reads the schemas that you place in each of these areas in order from bottom to top. The software always reads the individual com ponents level first. If the individual component format is empty, then the software reads the category component level. If the category component level is empty, then the software reads the main component format. Component Tables drop-down

Displays the list of catalog tables to choose a format. 

Component Tables

Lists the format types available for component tables i n Table Fields . 

Material Tables

Lists the format types available for material tables in Table Fields . 

Size Tables

Lists the format types available for size tables in Table Fields . 

Schedule Tables

Lists the format types available for schedule tables in Table Fields . 

DBCode Tables

Lists the format types available for database code tabl es in Table Fields . 

IndexCode Table

Lists the format types available for index c odes tables in Table Fields. 

Thickness Tables

Lists the format types available for thickness tables in Table Fields . This table is not available in Part Numb er Format. 

End Type Tables

Lists the format types available for end t ype tables in Table Fields . 

Spec Tables

Lists the format types available for spec tables in Table Fields . This table is not available in Part Numb er Format. 

End Prep Tables

Lists the format types available for the end prep tables in the Table Fields . This format contains the END_PREP_PTN schema. Select the END_PREP_PTN schema to add the PTN value from the end preparation table to your descriptions. You must select an End Prep Table Name in the specification Properties for the end preparation part number to display correctly. Then, set the Appl y Pi pe En d Prep Rule to Auto mat ic in CADWorx Plant for the END_PREP_PTN to display in your model. For more information, see PipeDescriptionCat and Apply Pipe End Prep Rule in the CADWorx Plant Users Guide. To add an end preparation table, see End Prep Table (on page 97).


194

View Project Tab Table Fields

Lists the formats for the chosen table, and enables you to add the table field to the format. The DEFINED COMPTYPE in the Component Types view affects the COMPTYPE_CMP_TBL table field. Changing the value in the DEFINED COMPTYPE box changes the descriptions using COMPTYPE_CMP_TBL. The software reads the DEFINED COMPTYPE you specified for the component. The software then displa ys the new DEFINED COMPTYPE value as the description when using the COMPTYPE_CMP_TBL table field schema. For more information, see Component Types (on page 120). Format

Lists the format, and enables you to add the needed formats from the Table Fields box. If you have added a space or text in the Format box, then you can select and edit the space or text. Select the space or text, right-click, and then select Edit . Format

Displays the appearance of the format. You can now add a space or text to the format. When you click in the Format the space or text you have a dded appears. You can then edit the information here or in the Format. Blue words in Format are keywords and can be selected to copy. Black text is a simple text string and can be edited as needed. Example

Displays an example of the f ormat as it would appear in the software. Import

Imports formats from other projects. Export

Exports formats for use in other projects. 1.

Open an existing project or create a new project. The Format dialog boxes can be opened in both places. If creating a new project, skip to the second part of step 3.

2.

Click the View tab, and then select Properties in the Display panel.

3.

Click the Long Desc, Short Desc, Tag, or Part Numb er Format Setup box in the Properties window, and then click an ellipsis. OR Click Long Desc, Short Desc, Tag, or Part Number in the New Project window when creating a new project. The Format dialog box displays.

4.

Select a component from the Components List . You can also import a form at, and then edit it as needed. If you import a format and do not want to edit it, s kip to step 9.

5.

Select a table from the tables list above Table fields .

6. Use the left or right arrows to move table boxes from one field to another. Alternatively, you can drag or double-click a format to add it from Table Fields to the format box.


195

View Project Tab 7.

Use the up

or down

arrows to move the format if needed.

If you want to remove a format, select it, and then press DELETE. 8.

To edit the format appearance, select the format in the Format box, and then change the format in the Format box.

9. Click OK when finished. You can export the format for use in other specifications. 10. Click File > Save to save changes to the project. The Format dialog boxes can also be accessed using the Ad d Specification command from the Home tab in the Specification panel.

Layer Manager Dialog Bo x CADWorx Spec Editor View tab: Display > Properties > Layer Manager ellipsis Specifies layers that can be added to the project. The layers you create can be selected at the specification and component level from Layer Name in the Specification properties or the New Comp onent pane. Whichever color you set the Layer Color to in the Layer Manager for any layer appears in the dra wing when piping with that specification or drawing a component. This option can be accessed from the project properties or from the New Project dialog box. New Layer

Enables you to add a new layer to the Layer Manager . Delete Layer

Enables you to delete a layer from the Layer Manager . Layer Name

Specifies the name of the created la yer. The layer name is a default, such as New1, when first created. Select a layer name, then type the new name in the box to change any Layer Name. Layer Color

Specifies the color of the created l ayer. Select a Layer Color to display a list and change the layer color. The default color is 1- Red . Select 1 - Red , 2 - Yello w , 3 - Green , 4 - Cyan , 5 - Blue, 6 - Magenta, 7 - White/Black from the list, or type 1 t hrough 255 to specify other colors. You cannot use 0 - ByLayer. If you type 0, you receive the following message box: Invalid Color. Color must be 1 - 255. Click OK to return to the Layer Manager dialog box. Use the up

or down

arrows to move the layers around.

1.

Open an existing project or create a new project. The Layer Manager dialog box can be opened in both places. If creating a new project, skip to the second part of step 3.

2.



196

View Project Tab 3.

Click the Layer Manager box in the Properties window, and then click the Layer Manager ellipsis. OR Click Layer Manager in the New Project window when creating a new project. The Layer Manager dialog box displays.

4.

Click New Layer

.

A new layer is added to the Layer Manager .



You can add as many layers as you want at the same time by repeatedly clicking New Layer .



Use the up

or down

arrows to move the layers up or down.



If you want to remove a format from Layer Manager , select it by clicking to the left of the name, and then click Delete Layer

.

5. Click OK when finished. 6.

Click File > Save to save changes to the project.

Match ing End Type Table Dialog Box CADWorx Spec Editor View tab: Display > Properties > Match End Type ellipsis Enables you to match end types with each other to be used in the drawing. When placed in the model components are validated against this Matching End Types Table . The table works in conjunction with the Ap pl y En d Ty pe Ru le . For more information, see Apply End Type Rule in the CADWorx Plant Users Guide. End Type List

Lists the available end types to match. The End Type List includes custom end types created in the catalog. You can match these custom end types with other out-of-the-box end types. Ad d L eft

Adds the end type to the left in the End Type Left column. Ad d Ri gh t

Adds the end type to the right in the End Type Right column. New

Creates a new line that enables you to add more matched end types to the Matched End Type list. Remove

Removes a matched end type from the Matched End Type list. Remove All

Removes all matching end type pairs from the Matched End Type list.


197

View Project Tab Default

Sets the default matching end type pairs f or the software. Matched End Type

Specifies the matched end types. All end types can be changed on either the right or the left by selecting an end type from the End Types List , selecting a row in Matched End Type, and then clicking either Ad d Ri gh t or Add Lef t. 

End Type Left

Specifies the end type to the left column. 

End Type Right

Specifies the end type to the right column. Import

Imports matching end types from other projects. Export

Exports matching end types for use in other projects.

Material Assignment Setup CADWorx Spec Editor View tab: Display > Properties > Material Assig nment Setup ellipsis Specifies the material assignment for each component and si ze. You can configure material assignments at the Components Group level, the Al l Com po nen ts level, the component group node level, and the component type node level. To assign a material to a component, you must select your material option from the Material list in the New and Edit Component Pane (on page 125). Components List

Displays the Component Groups folder, the Al l Co mp on ent s folder, and the available list of components. The Component Groups folder contains all components for the specification. You use this to assign material to a component when you have no need to manage material assignment by nominal pipe size. F or the software to read the components group folder, you n eed to select Use Specific ation Material from the Material list in the New and Edit Component pane. The Al l Co mp on ent s folder contains options to create a Component Material Assign ment Setup . Inside the component material assignment setup you can assign material to the sizes. The component material assignment setup folders enable you to use the materials assigned to the sizes for all components in the software. When you select Use Specification Material and want the software to read from the Al l Com po nen ts folder , you cannot have any other material assignments in the Component Group node, or the Component Type node. To force the software to read the material from the All Components folder, select Al l Co mp on ent _1 from the Material list in the New and Edit Component pane. If you rename Al l Co mp on ent s_1 , then you need to select it by the name you created.


198

View Project Tab When you add a Component Material Assignment Setup to a Component Group node, such as Caps , Couplings, or Crosses , those assignments become available to all components under the matching component group in the specification. The Component Material Assi gnment Setup under the component group node provides the material assignment by Nominal Pipe Size. W hen you select Use Specification Material and want the software to read from the Component Group node, you cannot have any othe r material assignments in the Component Type node. To force the software to read the material from the Component Group folder, select _1 from the Material list in the New and Edit Component pane. If you rename _1 , then you need to select it by the name you created. When you add a Component Material Assi gnment Setup to a Component Type node, such as Caps Buttweld , Cap Socket Weld , or Cap Threaded , those assignments become available to all components under the m atching component type in the specification. The Component Material Assignment Setup under a piping component type node provides material assignment by nominal pipe size. The Component Material Assignment Setup under the Stud Bolts component type provides material assignment by bo lt diameter. For the software to read the component type material assignments, you can select either Use Specifi cation Material, or _1 in the Material list in the New and Edit Component pane. If you select _1 from the Material list in the New and Edit Component pane, this forces the software to read from that node. If you rename _1 , then you need to select it by the name you created. The material assignments in the software read from the bottom upwards when you select Use Specifi cation Material from the Material list in the New and Edit Component pane. The software first checks the Component Type node, followed by the Component Group node, the Al l Com po nen ts folder, and finally, the Component Groups folder. If a component in the Component Type node, Component Group node, Al l Co mp on ent s folder, and the Component Groups folder does not contain a material setting for the size or component, then that component displays in CADWorx Plant without a m aterial assigned.





= A place holder for the name of the component. For example, Caps . = A place holder for the name of the component and the end type. For example, Cap Buttweld . Export Material

Exports material assignment data for use in another p roject. Import Material

Imports material assignment data for use in a project. Add n ew i tem

Adds new component material assignment setups to the Component Material Assign ment Setup list. Edit item name

Enables you to rename the component material assign ment setup. Remove selected item

Removes the selected component material assignment setup.


199

View Project Tab Component Groups folder

Enables you to assign material for each component at the specification level. 

Specifi cation-Level Material Assi gnment

Displays the details of the m aterial assignment. 

As si gn Mat eri al

Enables you to assign material to a component. 

Component List

Displays a list of components to which you can assign material. 

Material Selection Li st

Enables you to select material for a specific component. Al l Co mp on ent s f ol der

Customizes the materials for all sizes for all components. 

Component Material Assignm ent Setup

Enables you to create, rename, remove, export, and import component material assignment setups. You can either select a c omponent material assignment setup in the Components List , or double-click it in the Component Material Assignment Setup to display and edit the sizes. 

Material Assi gnment Details

Specifies the material assignment data by size for all components. 

Size range fi lter

Enables you to filter sizes to quickly update the material assignments for a specific group of sizes. The sizes availabl e to filter are read from the Limit Spec Size Range To property in the Specification properties. If you want more default sizes to display in the filter, then you must select them in this property. You can also add sizes using the right-click option, Add New Si ze.


200


Clear

Resets the size range filter. 

As si gn Mat eri al

Enables you to assign material to a size. 

Sizes Li st

Displays a list of sizes where you can assign material. 


Enables you to select material for a specific size. Component Group Node

Customizes the material for sizes of a specific com ponent. For instance, you can customize the materials for the Caps , the Crosses , or the Flanges , and so on. 


Specifies the material assignment data by size for the selected component group. 


Enables you to create, rename, remove, export, and import component material assignment setups. You can either select a c omponent material assignment setup in the Components List , or double-click it in the Component Material Assi gnment Setup to display and edit the sizes. 

Size range filter

Enables you to filter sizes to quickly update the material assignments for a specific group of sizes. The sizes available to filter are read from the Limit Spec Size Range To property in the Specification properties. If you want more default sizes to display in the filter, then you must select them in this property. You can also add sizes using the right-click option, Ad d New Size . 

Clear


As si gn Materi al

Enables you to assign material to a size. 

Sizes Li st

Displays a list of sizes where you can assign material. 


Enables you to select material for a specific size. Component Type Node

Customizes the material for sizes of a specific com ponent with a specific end type. For example, you can customize the materials for the Cap Buttweld , the Cap Socket Weld , or the Cap Threaded, and so on. 


Specifies the material assignment data by size for the selected component type.


201



Enables you to create, rename, remove, export, and import component material assignment setups. You can either select a c omponent material assignment setup in the Components List , or double-click it in the Component Material Assignment Setup to display and edit the material for the sizes. 

Size range fil ter

Enables you to filter sizes to quickly update the material assignments for a specific group of sizes. The sizes availabl e to filter are read from the Limit Spec Size Range To property in the Specification properties. If you want more default sizes to display in the filter, then you must select them in this property. You can also add sizes using the right-click option, Add New Si ze. 

Clear




As si gn Mat eri al

Enables you to assign material to a size. Sizes Li st Displays a list of sizes where you can assign material.




Enables you to select material for a specific size.

Right-click Menu Options There are several right-click menus in the Material Assign ment dialog box. You can right-click in Components List , the Component Material Assignment Setup list, and the Material As si gn men t Detai ls list. Ad d Mater ial As si gn men t Set up

Adds a material assignment schedule to the component group for you to edit. Remove All Material Ass ignm ent Setup

Removes all material assignment schedules from a com ponent group. Ad d It em

Adds a component material assignment setup to the Component Material Assignment Setup list. Set Defaul t

Sets the selected material to the default selection in the Material option in the New and Edit Component pane. If you have more than one m aterial assignment in the Component Material As si gn men t Setu p list, you can right-click it and set as default. If you only have one material assignment in the Component Material Assignm ent Setup list, then it automatically becomes the default. Remove Default

Removes the default Component Material Assignm ent Setup that the Material list uses when you have selected Use Specification Material in the New and Edit Compo nent pane. When you remove the default of the component material assignment setup, the Material list selection of Use Specification Material in the New and Edit Component pane defaults to the Component Group folder. For more information, see New and Edit Component Pane (on page 125).


202

View Project Tab Remove

Removes the selected item from the Component List , and removes multiple items from the Component Material Assignment Setup list. Rename

Enables you to rename the selected item. You can also click the item to rename it, or select the toolbar option.

Right-click Menu Options for Material Assignm ent Details Ad d New Si ze

Enables you to add a new nominal pipe size to the Material Assi gnment Details list. Displays the New Nominal Pipe Size dialog box. Edit Size

Enables you to edit an existing size in the Material Ass ignment Details list. Displays the Edit Nominal Pipe Size dialog box. Remove

Enables you to remove an existing si ze from the Material Assi gnment Details list. Material Lis t

Lists all available materials for the nominal pipe size. You can only access the follo wing right-click options after you create a component material assignment setup for Stud Bolts . Ad d New Di amet er

Enables you to add a new bolt diameter to the Material Assi gnment Details list. Displays the New Bolt Diameter dialog box. Edit Bolt Diameter

Enables you to edit an existing bolt diameter in the Material Ass ignment Details list. Displays the Edit Bol t Diameter dialog box.

Import Material Assignment Setup File Dialog Box Enables you to review and i mport a component material assignment setup. File Path

Specifies the location of the file for import. Material Assign ment Setup Li st

Lists the material assignment setups for import, and enables you to review the content.

New or Edit Nomi nal Pipe Size Dialog Box Enables you to add or edit a size for the Material Assi gnment Details list. Nominal Pipe Size

Enables you to add or edit a size. If you are adding a new size or editing a size, type the new size in the Nominal Pipe Size box, and then click OK . The new size adds to the Material Assi gnment Details list.


203

View Project Tab New or Edit Bol t Diameter Size Dialog Box Enables you to add or edit a bolt diameter for the Material Ass ignment Details list. Bolt Diameter

Enables you to add or edit a bolt diameter. If you are adding a new bolt diameter or editing a bolt diameter, type the new bolt diameter in t he Bolt Diameter box, and then click OK . The new bolt diameter adds to the Material Assi gnment Details list.

What do you w ant to do?       

Set material assignment for all components (on page 204) Set material assignment for all components based on size (on page 205) Set material assignment for a specific component (on page 206) Set material assignment for a specific component with a specific end type (on page 207) Export a material assignment setup (on page 207) Import a material assignment setup (on page 208) Display the material assigned to the component in CADWorx Plant (on page 208)

Set material assignm ent for all com ponents 1.

Select a specification from Project Specs.

2. Select Material Assi gnment Setup in the Properties window, and then click the Material As si gn men t ellipsis. The Material Assi gnment dialog box displays.

3. Select Component Groups . 4.

In the As si gn Materi al list, select a new material in the right column from the list that displays for the component. Material numbers in this lis t are based on industry standards. To access detailed information on a m aterial number in the Assi gn Materi al list, open the Base Catalog Data, and then open the Material Table. You can export or import material data while assigning material to all components.

5.

Click OK .

6.

In the Main Spec List View, expand a component list, such as Caps , and then select a component, such as Cap Buttw eld to assign a material.

7.

Select the Material list in the Edit component pane, and then select Use Specificatio n Material . For the software to read the material from the Component Groups folder, you cannot have any other material assignments in the All Com po nen ts folder, the Component Group node, or the Component Type node. The software reads the Material Assig nment set for the component you selected. For example, if you set the Caps material to ASTM A105 in the Component Groups folder of the Material Assig nment dialog box, and then set the Cap Butt weld material in the specification to Use Specification Material, the Cap Butt weld material would be ASTM A105.

See Also Display the material assigned to the component in CADWorx Plant (on page 208)


204

View Project Tab Set material assignment fo r all c omponents based on size 1.



3. Select All Com po nen ts . 4.

Click Add n ew i tem

. You can repeat this step as necessary.

A new component material assignment setup displays.

5.

Double-click the new component material assignment setup.

6.

In the As si gn Materi al list, select a new material in the right column from the list that displays for each size. Material numbers in this list are based on industry standards. To access detailed information on a material number in the Assi gn Materi al list, open the Base Catalog Data, and then open the Material Table. Use the Size Filter sliders to quickly display the sizes you need to change.

7.

Click OK .

8.

In the Main Spec List View, expand a component list, such as Caps , and then select a component, such as Caps Buttweld, to assign a material.

9.

Select the Material list in the Edit component pane, and then select Use Specificatio n Material or All Co mp on ent _1.





When you select Use Specification Material and want the software to read from the All Components folder , you cannot have any other material assignments in the Component Group node, or in the Component Type node. To force the software to read the material from the All Components folder, select All Co mp on ent _1. You can rename the component material assignment setups. However, if you rename the material setup, you must remember the name of the all components material assignment setup and select it in step 9.

The software reads the Material Assig nment set for the size in the Material Assignment Details. For example, if you set the material of the 2.0000 inch size to ASTM A105 in the Al l Co mp on ent _1 folder of the Material Assig nment dialog box, and then set the material for any component to Al l Com po nen t_1, the 2-inch component material would be ASTM A105. However, if you set the material of the 4.0000 inch size to ASTM A193-B 7, then the 4-inch component material would be ASTM A193-B 7.



205

View Project Tab Set material assignment for a specifi c comp onent 1.



3.

Select a component, such as Caps .

4.




5.


6.

In the As si gn Materi al list, select a new material in the right column from the list that displays for each size. Material numbers in t his list are based on industry standards. To access detailed information on a material number in the Assi gn Materi al list, open the Base Catalog Data, and then open the Material Table. Use the Size Filt er sliders to quickly display the sizes you need to change.

7.

Click OK .

8.

In the Main Spec List View, expand a component list, such as Caps , and then select a component, such as Caps Buttweld, to assign a material.

9.

Select the Material list in the Edit component pane, and then select Use Specification Material or _1.





When you select Use Specification Material and want the software to read from the Component Group node, you cannot have any other material assignments in the Component Type node. To force the software to read the material from the Component Group folder, select < Component>_1. You can rename the component material assignment setups. However, if you rename the material setup, then you must remember the name of the component m aterial assignment setup and select it in step 9.

The software reads the Material Assig nment set for the size in the Material Assign ment Details. For example, if you set the material of the 2.0000 inch size to ASTM A105 in the Cap_1 folder of the Material Assig nment dialog box, and then set the component material of the Cap Buttweld to Cap_1, the 2-inch Cap Butt weld material would be ASTM A105. In addition, if you set the material of the 4.0000 inch size to ASTM A193-B 7, then the 4-inch Cap Butt weld material would be ASTM A193-B 7.



206

View Project Tab Set material assignm ent for a specific com ponent with a specific end type 1.



3.

Select a component type node, such as Cap Butt weld .

4.




5.


6.

In the As si gn Materi al list, select a new material in the right column from the list that displays for each size. Material numbers in this list are based on industry standards. To access detailed information on a material number in the Assi gn Materi al list, open the Base Catalog Data, and then open the Material Table. Use the Size Filt er sliders to quickly display the sizes you need to change.

7.

Click OK .

8.

In the Main Spec List View, expand a component list, such as Caps , and then select a component, such as Cap Buttweld, to assign a material.

9.

Select the Material list in the Edit component pane, and then select Use Specification Material or _1 . You can rename the component material assignment setups. However, if you rename the material setup, then you must remember the name of the component m aterial assignment setup and select it in step 9. The software reads the Material Assi gnment set for the size in the Material Assignment Details. For example, if you set the material of the 2.0000 inch size to ASTM A105 in Cap Buttweld_1 of the Material Assi gnment dialog box, and then set the component material of Cap Butt weld to Use Specification Material or Cap Buttweld_1, the 2-inch Cap Buttweld material would be ASTM A 105. In addition, if you set the material of the 4.0000 inch size to ASTM A 193-B7, then the 4-inch Cap Buttweld material would be ASTM A193B7.


Export a material assignment setup 1.


2. Select Material Assi gnment Setup in the Properties window, and then click the ellipsis. The Material Assi gnment dialog box displays.

3.

Select a component or folder.

4. Click Export Material

.

5. Browse to the location where you want to store the exported material, and then click Save. 6. Click OK .


207

View Project Tab Import a material assignm ent setup 1.


2. Select Material Assi gnment Setup in the Properties window, and then click the ellipsis. The Material Assi gnment dialog box displays.

3.

Select a component or folder.

4. Click Import Material

.

5. Browse to the location of the material you exported, select it, and then click Open . The Import Material Assig nment dialog box displays

6. Check the File Path . 7. Expand the list of component material assignment setups to review the data. 8. Click Import . 9. Click Close. The software places the material assignment in the correct component group.

Display the material assigned to th e component i n CADWorx Plant After you have assigned material in the Material Assig nment dialog box, and defined the material in the Material list of the Edit component pane, you must complete the following steps to display the material correctly in CADWorx Plant. 1.

Click a Description ellipsis.

2. Select Material Tables from the Component Tables list. 3. Select SPEC_MAT_TBL and GRADE_MAT_TBL, and then click Move right

.

4. Click OK . The material for the component now displays in CADWorx plant based on the Spec and Grade.

Schedule As signment Setup CADWorx Spec Editor View tab: Display > Properties > Schedule Assignment Setup ellipsis Specifies the schedule assigned to each size. The schedule assignment for a size can be changed. 1. Select Schedule Assignment Setup in the Properties window, then click the Schedule As si gn men t Set up ellipsis. 2. Select a size in Schedule Assignment , and then select a new schedule in the right column, by using the drop-down arrow. Schedules in this list are based on the sc hedules assigned to the sizes in the Schedule Tables file. To access detailed information on a schedule in the schedule list, open the Base Catalog Data, and then open the Schedule Table.


208

View Project Tab

Spec List Mode Panel Category List Mod e

Displays the components in the Spec View tab in component category mode view. For example, each valve displays under the category name for that valve, such as Valves, 3Way , and each elbow displa ys under the category name for that elbow, such as Elbows, 90. Group List Mode

Displays the components in the Spec View tab in group mode view. For example, all the valves display under the Valves group name, and all elbows display under the Elbows group name.


209

SECTION 7

Pipe Support Library File Home Tab Gives you access to the features in an open pipe support libraries file. Unavailable features are grayed out. Clipboard - Enables you to edit the boxes within the Spec Editor. For more information, see Clipboard Panel (on page 21). Pipe Suppor t - Enables you to add pipe supports to the project. For m ore information, see Pipe Support Panel (on page 154). Catalog - Enables you to update the project with changes made to the base catalog. For more information, see Catalog Panel (on page 157). Transfer Data - Enables you to transfer project, catalog, or pipe support data. For more information, see Transfer Data Panel (on page 107). Exit Spec Editor - Closes the Intergraph CADWorx Catalog and Specification Editor.


210

SECTION 8

Pipe Support Library File View Tab Select a check box to open each window. Display - Displays the Pipe Support Library , Base Catalog Data, Project Catalog Data, and Properties. For more information, see Display Panel (on page 211).

Display Panel CADWorx Spec Editor View tab: Display Pipe Suppor t Library - Displays the Pipe Support Library pane, and enables you to add or import pipe supports to the pipe support libraries file. For more information, see Pipe Support Library (on page 177). Base Catalog Data - Displays all the information in the base catalog of CADWorx. For more information, see Base Catalog Data (on page 115). Project Catalog Data - Displays all the information attached to the open project. For more information, see Project Catalog Data (on page 176). Properties - Displays the properties of all the data in the pipe support libraries file. For more information, see Properties (on page 192).

Properties CADWorx Spec Editor View tab: Properties Displays the properties of the specific data you have selected in the pipe support libraries file. You can use the Properties view to change the aspects of a pipe support libraries file, the pipe support library, the pipe support assembly, and the pi pe support component. Double-clicking Custom Data brings up the New Field or Edit Field dialog box. For more information, see New Field Dialog Box (on page 116). You can also access the Long Desc Format Setup , Short Desc Format Setup , Tag Format Setup , Part Number Format Setup , and make changes. You can find the property explanations in the Appendix.

See Also Property Descriptions (on page 217) Pipe Support Description Format Dialog Boxes (on page 212) Pipe Support Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 214)


211

Pipe Support Library File View Tab

Pipe Support Descri ption Format Dialog Boxes CADWorx Spec Editor View tab: Display > Properties > Format Setup ellipsis Specifies the description format for a pipe support. Descriptions display in the Long , Short , Tag , and Part Number boxes for an assembly and in Long , Short , Tag , and Part Number boxes for a part shown in the Pipe support assembly edit dialog box when you double-click a pipe support i n CADWorx Plant. For more information, see Local Edit in the CADWorx Plant Users Guide. The information the software displays in the Pipe support assembly edit dialog box is based on the associated pipe support definition in the specification. The pipe support definition in the specification contains fields for Long , Short , Tag , and Part Number . You can populate these boxes with text data or set the schema in the Pipe Support Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 214) or Pipe Support Description Format Dialog Boxes (on page 212). You can configure a description schema for the Long , Short , Tag , and Part Number boxes at the libraries level, the library level, the pipe support assembly level, and the pipe support component level. If you define a schema at any of these levels, then the software derives the description from that level. Pipe support component schemas and pipe support assembly schemas take precedence over pipe support library level schemas, and p ipe support library level schemas take precedence over pipe support libraries level schemas. For instance, if the component Beam Clamp has a schema defined, then the information displaying in CADWorx for Beam Clamp derives from this schema. If you remove the schema definition from the Beam Clamp , then when a Beam Clamp places as part of an assembl y in the model, the schema derives from the main Pipe Suppor t Library tree description schema. If you delete all of the description schemas at the pipe support component level or at the pipe support assembly level, then the software repeats the above process at the pipe support library level. Next, the software repeats this process at the lib raries level. When the description format is empty at the component level or the assembly level, then the boxes under Description in the Edit panes read Using Pipe Suppor t Libr ary Format. If the description format is empty at the component level or the assembly level and at the library level, then the boxes under Description in the Edit panes read Using Pipe Support Libr ary Format. For more information on the pipe support component l evel and the pipe support assembly l evel, see Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 134). Pipe Support Libraries Component List

Displays the available list of pipe support components. The Pipe Suppor t Librari es Component List consists of two levels of formats. The main Pipe Suppor t Libr aries level covers all components. Next, the pipe support component level co vers each type of component and the steel components. The next level contains the individual components. The software reads the schemas that you place in each of these areas in order from bottom to top. The software always reads the individual compo nents level first. If the individual component format is empty, then the software reads the category component level. If the category component level is empty, then the software reads the m ain component format.


212

Pipe Support Library File View Tab Tables

Displays a list of tables, which allow you to choose formats to place f or descriptions. 

Size Tables

Lists the format types available for si ze tables in Table Fields . These properties are contained in the Size Table in the catalog. 

Pipe Support or Steel Component Table

Lists the format types available for the selected pipe support or steel component in Table Fields . The properties listed come f rom the components listed under PipeSupport in the Data Tables of the catalog. 

Pipe Support Li braries Tables

Lists the format types available for pipe support libraries tables in Table Fields . The properties listed come from the Name and Description fields in the Pipe Support Libraries Properties . 

Pipe Support Library Tables

Lists the format types available for pipe support library tables in Table Fields . The properties listed come from the Name and Description fields in the Pipe Support Library Properties . Table Fields

Lists the formats for the chosen table, and enables you to add the table field to the format. Format

Lists the format, and enables you to add the needed formats from the Table Fields box. If you have added a space or text in the Format box, then you can select and edit the space or text. Select the space or text, right-click, and then select Edit . Format

Displays the appearance of the format. You can add a space or text to the format. Blue words in Format are keywords and can be selected to copy. Black text is a simple text string and can be edited as needed. Example

Displays an example of the f ormat as it would display in the software. Import

Imports formats from other projects. Export

Exports formats for use in other projects. 1.

Open an existing pipe support libraries file, or create a new pipe support libraries file. You can open the Format dialog boxes in both places. If creating a new pipe support libraries file, skip to the second part of step 3.

2.



213

Pipe Support Library File View Tab 3.

Desc, Short Desc, Desc, Tag, or Part Part Number Format Setup box in the Click the Long Desc, Properties window, and then click ….

OR Part Number in the New Pipe Pipe Support Li braries Click Long Desc, Short Desc, Tag, or Part dialog box when creating a new pipe support libraries file. The Format Format dialog dialog box displays.

4.

Select the main Pipe Support Libraries folder, or select a pi pe support component from the Pipe Support Lib raries Component List . You can also import a form at, and then edit it as needed. If you import a format and do not want to edit it, s kip to step 9.

5.

Table fi elds . Select a table from the Tables list above Table

6.

Use the left or right arrows to move table properties from one field to another. Alternatively, you can drag or double-click a format to add it from Table Fields to the Format box.

7.

Use the up

or down


If you want to remove a format, select it, and then press DELETE. 8.

Format Format box, To edit the format appearance, select the format in the
9. Click OK when finished. You can export the format for use in other projects or pipe support libraries files. 10. Click File > Save to save changes to the project.

Pipe Supp Support ort Long , Shor Short, t, Tag, Tag, and Part Part Number Format Dialog Boxes Part Number CADWorx Spec Editor New component pane: Click the Long , Short , Tag , or Part ellipsis

Specifies the description format for pipe support components or pipe support assemblies. Descriptions display in the Long , Short , Tag , and Part Number boxes boxes for an assembly and in Long , Short , Tag , and Part Part Number boxes boxes for a part s hown in the Pipe support assembly edit dialog box when you double-click a pipe support in CADWorx Plant. For more information, see Local Edit in the CADWorx Plant Users Guide. The information the software displays in the Pipe support assembly edit dialog box is based on the associated pipe support definition in the specification. The pipe support definition in the specification contains fields for Long , Short , Tag , and Part Number . You can populate these boxes with text data or set the schema in the Pipe Support Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 214) page 214) or or Pipe Support Description Format Dialog Boxes (on page 212). 212). You can configure a description schema for the Long , Short , Tag , and Part Number boxes boxes at the libraries level, the library level, the pipe support assembly level, and the pipe support component level. If you define a schema at any of these levels, then the software derives the description from that level.


214

Pipe Support Library File View Tab Pipe support component schemas and pipe support assembly schemas take precedence over pipe support library level schemas, and pipe support library level schemas take precedence over pipe support libraries level schemas. For instance, if the component Beam Clamp has a schema defined, then the information displaying in CADWorx for Beam Clamp derives from this schema. If you remove the schema definition from the Beam Clamp , then when a Beam Clamp Suppor t places as part of an assembl y in the model, the schema derives from the m ain Pipe Suppor Library tree description schema. If you delete all of the description schemas at the pipe support component level or at the pipe support assembly level, then the software repeats the above process at the pipe support library level. Next, the software repeats this process at the libraries le vel. When the description format is empty at the component le vel or the assembly level, then the Support Libr ary Format. If the boxes under Description in the Edit panes read Using Pipe Support description format is empty at the component level or t he assembly level and at the library level, Suppor t Libr ary Format. then the boxes under Description in the Edit panes read Using Pipe Suppor

Tables Size Tables

Lists the format types available for size tables in Table Fields . These properties are contained in the Size Table in the catalog. The properties listed in Table Fields come from the components listed under PipeSupport in the Data Tables of the catalog. Pipe Support Li braries Tables

Lists the format types available for pipe sup port libraries tables in Table Fields . The properties listed in Table Fields come from the Name and Description fields in the Pipe Support Libraries Properties . Pipe Suppor Suppor t Lib rary Tables

Lists the format types available for pipe sup port library tables in Table Fields . The properties listed in Table Fields come from the Name and Description fields in the Pipe Support Library Properties . Pipe Support Support Assembly Tables

Lists the format types available for pipe sup port assembly tables in Table Fields . The properties listed in Table Fields come from the data displa yed in the Edit assembly pane, Suppor t Assembly Properti es. and the Name and Description in the Pipe Suppor Pipe Suppor Suppor t Compon ent Tables

Lists the format types available for pipe support com ponent tables in Table Fields . The properties listed in Table Fields come from the components listed under PipeSupport in the Data Tables of the catalog.

Long, Short, Tag, or Part Number Format dialog box fields Table Fields

Lists the long or short description format, the tag format, or the part number format for the chosen table, and enables you to add the table field to the Long Desc Format , Short Desc Format , Tag Format , or Part Part Number Format.


215

Pipe Support Library File View Tab Long Desc Desc Format , Short Desc Format , Tag Format , or Part Part Number

Lists the actual long or short description format, tag format, or part number format, and enables you to add information. Use the arrows to add formats from the Table Fields box. Alternatively, you can drag or double-click a format to add it from Table Fields to Long Desc, Short Desc , Tag, or Part Part Number Format . Format

Displays the actual appearance of the long or short description, the tag, or part num ber Desc Format , Short Desc Format , Tag Format , or format. When you click in the Long Desc Part Number box, box, the space or text you added displays. You can then edit the information Desc Format , Short Desc Format , Tag Format , or Part Number box here or in the Long Desc box. Blue words in Format are keywords. You can select k eywords and then copy them. Black text is a simple text string and you can edit as needed. Example

Displays an example of the long or short description, tag, or part number as it displays in the software.

Setup Setup t he Assembly or Component Formats Formats 1.

Click … for the field to edit. The Format Format dialog dialog box displays.

2.

Select the Tables list, and change if needed.

3.

Use the left or right arrows to move table properties from one field to another. Alternatively, you can drag or double-click a format to add it from Table Fields to the corresponding format.

4.

Use the up

5.

Format box, and To edit the format appearance, select the table in the
6.

Click OK when finished.

7.

Click File > Save to save the changes to the project.

or down



216

A P P E N D I X A

Property Descriptions This appendix contains all the property descriptions available in CADWorx Spec Editor.

In This This Ap pendix Project Properties .......................................................................... 217 Pipe Support Libraries Properties.................................................. 221 Catalog Properties ......................................................................... ......................................................................... 225

Proj roje ect Prop roperties erties Project Name

Specifies the name of the project. Catalog Name

Specifies the name of the base catalog. You can only edit this in the catalog or by selecting a different base catalog. Catalog Path

Specifies the folder location of the base catalog. You can change the base catalog by using the Catalog Path ellipsis. Pipe Support Support Libraries Path

Specifies the folder location of the p ipe support library. You can add a pipe support library to Suppor t Libr aries Path Path ellipsis. This allows you to have your specification using the Pipe Suppor more than one set of libraries attached to a project. DBCode Table Name

Specifies the name of the database code table from the base catalog. Long Desc Desc Format Setup

Specifies the appearance of the long d escription attached to the components. Short Desc Format Setup

Specifies the appearance of the short description format attached to the components. Tag Format Setup

Specifies the appearance of the tag format attached to the com ponents. Part Part Number Format Setup

Specifies the appearance of the part number attached to the components. Format Setups , see Description Format Dialog Boxes For more on the
Specifies the bill of material type associated with the project. You can edit this by clicking the name of the BOM Type, and using the list that displays.


217

Property Descriptions Layer Manager

Specifies the layers associated with a project and displays the Layer Manager dialog dialog box. For more information, see Layer Manager Dialog Box (on page 196) page 196).. Match End Type

Displays the Matching End Type Table dialog box. You can match end types with other end types for use in CADWorx. For more information, see Matching End Type Table Dialog Box (on page 197) page 197).. Version

Specifies the version of the CADWorx Spec Editor. You cannot edit this property. Created By

Specifies the person who created the data. You can edit this property. Edited By

Specifies the person who edited the data. Yo u can edit this property. Description

Specifies the description of the project. Default OTAP SKEY

Specifies the default SKEY that the software uses for OTAPs. This property enables you to standardize the OTAP for isometric notation for the project. You can edit this property. If you open a project created with CADWorx 2015 SP1 or earlier in CADWorx Spec Editor 2016, the software updates the OTAP SKEY of the specification automatically. Custom Data

Add custom data to the project. For more information information see, New Field Dialog Box (on page 116). 116).

Specification Properti Properti es Specifi Specifi cation Name

Specifies the name of the specification being worked in. You can edit this property. Catalog Name

Specifies the name of the base catalog. You can only edit this property in the catalog or b y selecting a different base catalog. Catalog Path

Specifies the folder location of the base catalog. You can change the base catalog by using the Catalog Path ellipsis. Pipe Support Support Libraries Path

Specifies the folder location of the pipe support library. You can add a pipe support library to Suppor t Libr aries Path Path ellipsis. This allows you to have your specification using the Pipe Suppor another pipe support library attached to the specification. Measure/Bore

Specifies the units tied to this specification. You cannot edit this property.


218

Property Descriptions Size Table Name

Specifies the current size table being used by the specification. You can only edit this property in the catalog. DBCode Table Name

Specifies the name of the database code table from the base catalog. Thickness Table Name

Specifies the current thickness table being used by the specification. To update thi s value with available or newly created thickness tables, click the name of the first table, and then select the new table from the list. For m ore information, see Thickness Table (on page 41) page 41).. Material Table Name

Specifies the current material table being used b y the specification. To update this value with available or newly created material tables, click the name of the first table, and select the new table from the list. For m ore information, see Material Table (on page 37) page 37).. Bolt Diameter Table Name

Specifies the current bolt diameter table assigned to the specification. To update this value with available or newly created bolt diam eter tables, click the name or the blank space, and then select a table from the list. For more information, see Bolt Diameter Table (on page 31). 31). Bolt Length Table Name Name

Specifies the current bolt length table assigned to the specification. To update this value with available or newly created bolt length tables, click the name or the blank space, and then select a table from the list. For more information, see Bolt Length Table (on page 34) page 34).. End Prep Table Name

Specifies the current end prep table assig ned to the specification. To update this value with available or newly created end prep tables, click the name or the blank space, and then select a table from the list. F or more information, see End Prep Table (on page 97) page 97).. Weight Weight Factor Factor

Specifies the weight of the component. You can edit this property. Component Class

Specifies the classification of the components in the specification. Temperature Rating

Specifies the temperature rating a component can handle. Pressure Rating

Specifies the pressure rating a component can h andle. Layer Name

Specifies the numerical value of the layer spec. CAD Color Index Color Index [0-255]

Specifies the color appearance of the com ponents for this specification. Select 0 - ByLayer , 1 - Red , 2 - Yello Yello w , 3 - Green , 4 - Cyan , 5 - Blue, 6 - Magenta, 7 - White/Black , from the list or type 0 through 255 to specify other colors.


219

Property Descriptions Long Desc Format Setup Specifies the appearance of the long d escription attached to the components. Short Desc Format Setup Specifies the appearance of the short description format attached to the components. Tag Format Setup Specifies the appearance of the tag format attached to the com ponents. Part Number Format Setup Specifies the appearance of the part number attached to the components. For more on the Format Setups , see Description Format Dialog Boxes (on page 193). Lim it Spec Size Range To Specifies the size limit for components within this specification. This can be edited. You must select newly added sizes in the Lim it Spec Size Range To list. Otherwise, the software does not display the sizes in the Size Range list on the New and Edit Component Pane (on page 125). Material Assign ment Setup

Specifies material numbers for specific components. For more information, see Material Assignment Setup (on page 198). Schedule Assignment Setup

Specifies the schedule values for specific sizes based on the schedule table. For more information, see Schedule Assignment Setup (on page 208). Default Flange Type

Specifies the default flange type for the specification. You can edit this property. Reducing Component Size Selection

Specifies the reduction size for displaying reducing components in the Spec View and Component List . There are three options: 

Use Reduction Size

Uses the reduction size for the component when selecting from the Spec View palette or routing with Component List . For example, if you set Main to 2 and Reduction to 1 in the Spec View palette, and your concentric reducer only has 2, 4, and 6 as the available main sizes in the project, then when you set Use Reduction Size, that component does not display in Spec View or Component List . If you specify a 1-inch concentric reducer, then the concentric reducer displa ys. 

Use Main Size

Uses the main size for the component when selecting from the Spec View palette or routing with Component List . For example, if you set Main to 2 and Reduction to 1 in the Spec View palette, and your reducer has 2, 4, and 6 as the available main sizes in the project, then when you set Use Main Size, that component displays in Spec View or Component List . 

Use Larger Wall Thickness

Works only with component insertion from the command line or toolbar based on the Main size selection in the Spec View palette. For example, if you have three concentric reducer default components of varying schedule, the CONC command inserts the concentric reducer component with the thickest wall.


220

Property Descriptions Version



Specifies the person who edited the data. You can edit this property. Spec Descriptio n

Specifies the description of the spec. Default OTAP SKEY

Specifies the default SKEY that the software uses for OTAPs. This property enables you to standardize the OTAP for isometric notation for the specification. If you d o not set a default OTAP SKEY for the specification, then the software tak es the SKEY from the project properties setting. You can edit this property. If you open a project created with CADWorx 2015 SP 1 or earlier in CADWorx Spec Editor 2016, the software updates the OTAP SKEY of the specification automatically. Custom Data

Add custom data to the specification. For more information see, New Field Dialog Box (on page 116).

Pipe Support Libraries Properties Pipe Support Libraries Name

Specifies the name of the selected pipe support libraries file. If you are working in a project, the name defaults to the name of the project. If you are working in a pipe support libraries file, the name defaults to the name of the pipe support libraries file. You can edit this property. Catalog Name Specifies the name of the base catalog. You can only change this in the catalog or by selecting a different base catalog. Catalog Path Specifies the folder location of the base catalog. You can change the base catalog by using the Catalog Path ellipsis. Long Desc Format Setup Specifies the appearance of the long d escription attached to the assemblies or components. Short Desc Format Setup Specifies the appearance of the short description format attached to the assemblies or components. Tag Format Setup Specifies the appearance of the tag format attached to the assem blies or components. Part Number Format Setup

Specifies the appearance of the part number attached to the assemblies or components. For more information on the Format Setups , see Pipe Support Description Format Dialog Boxes (on page 212).


221

Property Descriptions BOM Type

Specifies the bill of material type associated with the pipe support libraries file. You can edit this by clicking the name of the BOM Type, and using the list that displays. Version



Specifies the person who edited the data. You can edit this property. Description

Specifies the description of the catalog. Change as needed. Custom Data

Add custom data to the project. For more information see, New Field Dialog Box (on page 116). To see the Component Table properties, see Common Component Properties (on page 237) and PipeSupport (on page 264).

Pipe Support Libr ary Properties Name

Specifies the name of the selected pipe support library. You can edit this property. Catalog Name

Specifies the name of the base catalog. You can only change this in the catalog or by selecting a different base catalog. Catalog Path

Specifies the folder location of the base catalog. You can change the base catalog by using the Catalog Path ellipsis. Measure/Bore

Specifies the units tied to this pipe support library. You cannot edit this property. Size Table Name

Specifies the current size table being used by the pipe support library. You can only edit this property in the catalog. Lim it Spec Size Range To

Specifies the size limit for components within this pipe support library. Select or cl ear the check boxes in the list to add or remove size ranges. You m ust select newly-added sizes in the Limit Spec Size Range To list. Otherwise, the software does not display the si zes in the Size Range list on the Edit assembly pane. See Add Pipe Support Assembly (on page 178).


222

Property Descriptions Long Desc Format Setup

Specifies the appearance of the long d escription attached to the assemblies or components. Short Desc Format Setup

Specifies the appearance of the short description format attached to the assemblies or components. Tag Format Setup

Specifies the appearance of the tag format attached to the assemblies or components. Part Number Format Setup

Specifies the appearance of the part number attached to the assemblies or components. For more information on the Format Setups , see Pipe Support Description Format Dialog Boxes (on page 212). Version



Specifies the person who edited the d ata. You can edit this property. Description

Specifies the description of the catalog. Change as needed. Steel Lib rary

Specifies the location of the steel library, and enables you to include a steel component in your assembly. SteelPartNumberFile

Specifies the steel part number file from the s teel library. Custom Data

Add custom data to the project. For more information see, New Field Dialog Box (on page 116).

Pipe Support Assembly and Component Properties Name

Specifies the name of the selected support component. You can edit this property. Long Desc Format Setup

Specifies the long description for the pipe support assembly or component. You can change the long description, by clicking the Long ellipsis which opens the Long Description Format dialog box. You can also type information in the Long box, and then click Ap pl y to add the information. Blue words are keywords and you can select and copy them. Black text is a simple text string and c an be edited as needed. For more information, see Pipe Support Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 214).


223

Property Descriptions Short Desc Format Setup

Specifies the short description of the pipe su pport assembly or component. You can change the short description, by clicking the Short ellipsis which opens the Short Description Format dialog box. You can also type information in the Short box, and then click Appl y to add the information. Blue words are keywords and you can select and copy them. Black text is a simple text string and c an be edited as needed. F or more information, see Pipe Support Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 214). Tag Format Setup

Specifies the tag information of the pipe support assembly or component. You can change the tag format, by clicking the Tag ellipsis which opens the Tag Format dialog box. You can also type information in the Tag box, and then click Ap pl y to add the information. Blue words are keywords and you can select and copy them. Black text is a simple text string and can be edited as needed. F or more information, see Pipe Support Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 214). Part Numb er Format Setup

Specifies the part number information of the pipe su pport assembly or component. You can change the part number format, by clicking the Part Number ellipsis which opens the Part Number Format dialog box. You can also type information in the Part Number box, and then click Ap pl y to add the information. Blue words are keywords and you can select and copy them. Black text is a s imple text string and can be edited as needed. For more information, see Pipe Support Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 214). Version


Specifies the person who created the data. You c an edit this property. Edited By

Specifies the person who edited the d ata. You can edit this property. Description

Specifies the description of the catalog. You can edit this property. Custom Data

Enables you to input fields using the New Field Dialog Box (on page 116). You can access the custom data fields in CADWorx Plant through the Component Edit dialog box. For more information, see Component Custom Data Dialog Box and Local Edit in the CADWorx Plant Users Guide.


224

Property Descriptions

Catalog Properties Name

Specifies the name of the catalog being worked in. You can edit this property. Measure/Bore

Specifies the units tied to this catalog. You can edit this property. Base Catalog Name

Specifies the name of the base catalog. You can only change this i n the Catalog or by selecting a different base catalog. Catalog Path

Specifies the folder location of the base catalog. You can change the base catalog by using the Catalog Path ellipsis. Version


Specifies the person who created the data. You ca n edit this property. Edited By

Specifies the person who edited the data. You can edit this property. Catalog Descriptio n

Specifies the description of the catalog. You c an edit this property. Each of the tables in the catalog has its own properties. Some fields in the Specification Editor create new records in the database immediately when you edit them. For example, if you change the MAINSIZE value in the Size Tables , the software creates a new record in the da tabase. When you edit one of these fields, CADWorx Spec Editor displays a message explaining that you are creating a new record and asking if you want to continue. For more information, see the following topics: 

Size Tables Properties (on page 226)



Bolt Diameter Table Properties (on page 226)



Bolt Length Table Properties (on page 227)



Material Tables Properties (on page 228)



Schedule Tables Properties (on page 229)



Thickness Tables Properties (on page 230)



End Type Tables Properties (on page 231)



Data Tables Properties (on page 236)



IndexCode Tables Properties (on page 294)



DBCode Tables Properties (on page 295)



End Prep Tables Properties (on page 296)


225


Size Tables Properties Table Name

Specifies the name of the table sel ected. This can be edited. Measure/Bore

Specifies the units tied to this catalog. You cannot edit this. The value comes from the units selected when creating the catalog. Default Part Number

Specifies the default part number assigned to the table. This can be edited. T he default is 001 and auto-populated by the Specification Editor. Version




Specifies the description of the table. This can be edited.

Fields NOM - Nominal Pipe Size The nominal sizes of the pipe. OD - Outside Diameter The diameter of the pipe. DESCRIPTION - Description The description of the pipe size. PTN - Part Number The part number assigned to the si ze. Custom Data

Enables you to input fields using the New Field Dialog Box (on page 116).

Bolt Diameter Table Properti es Table Name


Specifies the units tied to this catalog. You cannot edit this. The value comes from the units selected when creating the catalog.


226

Property Descriptions Default Part Number

Specifies the default part number assigned to the table. This can be edited. T he default is 001 and auto-populated by the Specification E ditor. Version





Fields DIAMETER - Diameter Specifies the diameters of each bolt. DESCRIPTION - Description Specifies the description of the bolt diam eter. PTN - Part Number Specifies the part number assigned to the bolt diameter. Custom Data


Bolt Length Table Properties Table Name


Specifies the units tied to this catalog. You cannot edit this. The value comes from the units selected when creating the catalog. Default Part Number

Specifies the default part number assigned to the table. This can be edited. T he default is 001 and auto-populated by the Specification Editor. Version






227

Property Descriptions Fields LENGTH - Length The lengths of each bolt. DESCRIPTION - Description The description of the bolt length. PTN - Part Number The part number assigned to the bolt length. Custom Data


Material Tables Properties Table Name

Specifies the name of the table sel ected. This can be edited. Version





Fields SPEC - Material Specification Value that specifies the material spec. GRADE - Grade Value that specifies the grade of the material. COMPOSITION - Composition Value that specifies the composition of the m aterial. COMPTYPES - Component Types The type of component the material type is associated with. Use the list to add component types. DENSITY - Density Value that specifies the density of the material. PTN - Part Number The part number associated with a particular value of material. Custom Data



228


Schedule Tables Properti es Table Name

Specifies the name of the table sel ected. This can be edited. Default Part Number

Specifies the default part number assigned to the table. This can be edited. Version





Fields SCH - Schedule The schedule of the thickness for components. SCHENCWT - Schedule Enhance Weight The schedule used with enhanced weight calculation. Enhanced weight calculation calculates the weights of components based on the CAD pl atform solid geometry, calculated by (the hollow enhanced solid v olume multiplied by the com ponent density). A manufactured component may have a larger wall thickness then the schedule requires. To make the enhanced weight calculation more accurate, SCHENCWT can be set to a larger wall thickness schedule. The Enhanced weight calculation i s used anytime the WEIGHT column is 0.0 in a data table. The component drawing mode (2D Double line, 2D Single line, 3D Solid, or 3D Enhanced) does not have any effect on the weight calculation. The weight calculation is run in back ground using a temporary 3D enhanced CAD solid when using 2D Double line, 2D Single line, or 3D Solid drawing mode. Weights of the following components are based on the CAD platform solid geometry when the WEIGHT column is 0.0 in the component data table: PIPE

SCH thickness value used to create the CAD platform solid geometry

ELBOWS


O_LETS


TEES

SCHENCWT thickness value used to create the CAD platform solid geometry


229

Property Descriptions CAPS


CROSSES


LATERALS


REDUCERS SCHENCWT thickness value used to create the CAD platform solid geometry FLANGES

Enhanced Data Table Values used to create the CAD platform solid geometry

Weights of the following components are always based on the Data Table WEIGHT column: COUPLINGS GASKETS BOLTS WELDS SANITARY SPEC_BLIND BLEED_RING EXPANSION JOINTS STRAINERS UNIONS USER_SHAPES VALVES Y_SHAPE PTN - Part Number Value assigned to specific schedules. Custom Data


Thickn ess Tables Properties Table Name

Specifies the name of the table sel ected. This can be edited. Size Table

Specifies the size table associated with the Thickness Table. This cannot be changed, it is set up when the Thickness Table is created.


230

Property Descriptions Schedule Table

Specifies the schedule table associated with the T hickness Table. This cannot be changed, it is set up when the Thickness Table is created. Version





Fields NOM - Nominal Pipe Size The size of the component from the si ze table. Schedule types The values in this area are schedule table values associated with the thickness table. They represent the weight and thickness of the c omponent.

End Type Tables Properties The properties for each component within the End T ype Tables are all the sam e. They are as follows:

End Type Properties Name Specifies the name of the end t ype. You can only edit the Name of a custom end type. You cannot change the name of any out-of-the-box end type deli vered with CADWorx Plant. Base End Type Specifies the base end type for the custom end type. You cannot edit this property. Force Match End Type Table Forces the custom end type to only al low connections that you define in the Matching End Type Table. You can set this option to True or False. Stub End Type Specifies if the end type is a stub end type. You can set this option to True or False. Disable Weld Selection Specifies whether automatic weld insertion for the end type is enabled. You can set this option to True or False. Disable Bolt Selection

Specifies whether automatic bolt insertion for the end t ype is enabled. You can set this option to True or False. Disable Gasket Selection

Specifies whether automatic gasket insertion for the end type is enabled. You can set this option to True or False.


231

Property Descriptions Force End Type Length withi n Component

Forces the end type length to be included in the overall length of the component. You can set this option to True or False. Isogen Symbol

Specifies the Isogen symbol that you associated with the end type. You can change the Isogen symbol as needed. This value d esignates the symbol that the isometric drawing displays for the end type when you run ISOGENOUT . Version




Specifies the description of the end t ype.

End Type Table Properties Table Name

Specifies the name of the table sel ected. End Type

Specifies the end type for that particular component. You cannot edit this property. Size Table

Specifies the size table associated with the End Type Table . This is set up when you create the end type. Part Number

Specifies the part number associated with that particular component end t ype. Version






232

Property Descriptions Default Settings Isogen Symbol

Specifies the Isogen symbol associated with the selected e nd type. This is the en d type symbol that displays when you run Isogen Out . Component Class



Specifies the maximum allowable pressure for the component. Ap pl ic abl e Gask ets

Specifies the applicable gasket for the com ponent based on the selection code. The value that you choose in the Ap pl ic abl e Gask ets list determines the gasket that inserts when you place a component pair that requires a gask et, such as flanged components, clamped components, flanged end-types, and clamped end types. You can either type the code in the Ap pl ic abl e Gask ets box, or select an available code from the list. The Appl ic abl e Gask ets option only displays when the component allo ws a gasket. To assign selection co des, see Selection Codes Tutorial (on page 65), and Assign selection codes to components without catalog defaults (on page 142). Ap pl icab le B ol ts

Specifies the applicable bolt for the component based on the selection code. The value that you choose in the Appl ic abl e Bo lt s list determines the bolt that inserts when you place a component pair that requires a bolt, such as flanged components, clamped components, flanged end-types, and clamped end types. You can either type the code i n the Ap pl ic abl e Bolts box, or select an available code from the list. The Appl ic abl e Bo lt s option only displays when the component allows a bolt. To assign selection codes, see Selection Codes Tutorial (on page 65), and Assign selection codes to components without cata log defaults (on page 142).

Fields MAINSIZE - Main size Specifies the main sizes used for that end type. OAL - Overall length Specifies the overall length used for that end type. FACELEN - face length Specifies the face length of that end type. CFD - connection face diameter Specifies the connection face diameter for that end type. FFD - face face diameter Specifies the face face diameter for that end t ype.


233

Property Descriptions CHD - connection hub diameter Specifies the connection hub diameter for that end t ype. FHD - face hub diameter Specifies the face hub diameter for that end type. PENGLEN - pipe engagement length Specifies the pipe engagement length for that end type. CPENGD - connection pipe engagement diameter Specifies the connection pipe engagement diameter for that end type. FPENGD - face pipe engagement diameter Specifies the face pipe engagement diam eter for that end type. Custom Data

Enables you to input fields using the New Field Dialog Box (on page 116). You can access the custom data fields in CADWorx Plant through the Component Edit dialog box. For more information, see Component Custom Data Dialog Box and Local Edit in the CADWorx Plant Users Guide. Picture Description

Displays an image of the component. Listed below are the types of components available for selection in the table. Images are provided when available. For custom pipe supports, user shapes, and custom topworks, the Picture Description displays Image Path. The software allows you to browse for a .png or .gif drawing, and then displays the drawing below the Image Path under Picture Description .

Examples of Compon ent End Types Buttweld

Ferrul e Engagement and Ferrule Hub

1. OAL

1. OAL

2. FFD

2. CPENGD = FPENGD

3. PID 4. CFD

3. PENGLEN 4. PID 5. FHD


234

Property Descriptions Flanged

H, I, Q, and Tri -Clamp Engagements

1. FFD

1. CFD

2. FACELEN

2. FACELEN

3. PID

3. PID

4. CFD

4. FFD

Socket Engagement

Specifi c Engagement

1. PID

1. OAL

2. OAL

2. PID

3. FHD

Threaded and Socket Weld

Threaded Engagement

1. OAL

1. PENGLEN

2. FHD

2. OAL

3. CPENGD = FPENGD

3. PID

4. PENGLEN 5. PID


235


Data Tables Properties Properties in the data table are broken down by the specific components, known as a category. Most component properties are similar. This list provides the properties for each category. Properties for each Data Table are listed by type. For more information, see the list of categories below.

Category Properties Name

Specifies the name of the category. Type

Specifies the type of component contained in the c ategory. Description

Specifies a description of the category.

List of Categories 

Common Component Properties (on page 237)



Caps (on page 240)



Couplings (on page 241)



Crosses (on page 243)



Elbows (on page 245)



Flanges (on page 248)



Gaskets/Bolts/Welds (on page 252)



Laterals (on page 259)



O-Lets (on page 260)



Pipe (on page 262)



PipeSupport (on page 264)



Reducers (on page 271)



Sanitary (on page 273)



Spec Blind/Bleed Ring/Exp Joint (on page 276)



Strainers (on page 278)



Tees (on page 280)



Topworks (on page 282)



Unions (on page 285)



User Shapes (on page 286)



Valves (on page 288)



Wye Shape (on page 293)


236


Common Component Properties This list of properties specifies the common properties attached to all components within each category. The rest of the properties are broken down i n their respective category for the component type. Each of the following properties is contained under Component Table in each category. Name

Specifies the specific name of each com ponent based on type and schedule. This can be changed. Type

Specifies the type of the actual com ponent. This is the common name of the component and cannot be changed. Size Table

Specifies the size table attached to the component. This is based on the size table selected when the component was added to the category. This cannot be changed. Part Number

Specifies the part number assigned to that particular com ponent type. Version


Specifies the person who created the data. You can edit this property. Edited By Specifies the person who edited the data. Yo u can edit this property. Description Specifies the long description of the com ponent. This includes the common name, the end type, and the weight. This can be changed. Short Description Specifies the short description of the component. This can be changed. Tag Specifies the tag of the component. This can be changed.

Default Component Settings Specifies the default settings of the component. Group Name

Specifies a group for the data table. T o add groups to the Group Data Table Manager select a category from the list, type a name in the Group box, or click the Group ellipsis The Group box defaults to the group folder you select in Data Tables . For more information, see Data Table List Mode Panel (on page 121), and Group Data Table Manager Dialog Box (on page 54).

.

BOM Type

Specifies the default bill of material type for the component.


237

Property Descriptions Layer Name

Specifies the default layer of the component. Color Index

Specifies the default color of the component in a drawing. Select 0 - ByLayer , 1 - Red , 2 Yellow , 3 - Green , 4 - Cyan , 5 - Blue, 6 - Magenta, 7 - Whit e/Black from the list or type 0 through 255 to specify other colors. Isogen Identifier

Specifies the default identifier used b y Isogen for the component. For more information, see SKEY Information in the CADWorx Plant User's Guide. Isogen SKEY

Specifies the default SKEY used b y Isogen for the component. For more information, see SKEY Information in the CADWorx Plant User's Guide. Topworks

Specifies the default topworks for the component. The Topworks option enables when the component requires a topwork detail. Sort Sequence

Specifies the location of the item in the bill of material. This number is pulled from the program code when adding a new component. However, when editing an existing component, the program code from the original selection stays the sam e. You have the option to leave this number as it is or change it based on the following. If you entered 999, this component is placed last in the list. If you enter 0, i t is first in the list. If you set the same sort numbers for different components in the specification, CADWorx places the components in the list in an alphabetical order. Optional Component

Sets the component to an optional component. Ap pl ic abl e Gask et

Specifies default gasket selection codes available for flange components, clamp components, flanged end-types, and clamped end types. For more information, see Selection Codes (on page 60). Ap pl ic abl e Bo lt

Specifies default bolt selection codes avail able for flange components, clamp components, flanged end-types, and clamped end types. For m ore information, see Selection Codes (on page 60).

ETS ETS or Bitwise End Type Placement Control is common to most but not all data tables. ETS controls the end type display.


238

Property Descriptions ETS Description In the 2012 legacy program, flanged components such as 45FL, 90FL, CONFL, ECCFL, PIPFL, TEEFL, and YFL use the FLGS variable to control displaying of end type at the ends. This variable is a bitwise flag (0 , 1, 2…) and depends on the numbered connections of the component, as shown in the graphic below.

In the 2013 and later s ystems, the data tables also have an ET S variable (End type bitwise flag) to control display end types. This is similar to the legacy FLGS variable, as shown in the graphic below.

When importing, the FLGS variable converts to the ET S variable. Otherwise, a default value is set that depends on the number connection of components. For example: the value is 1 for CAPS and 15 for CROSSES. Flanged pipes use special components. PIPFL is a special end type component, and PIPFL2 is a flanged component. In 2D single mode, the components have different shapes. The ETS of PIPFL is a design value of 100, 101, 102, or 103, such as ETS = 103.

The design of PIPFL2 is ETS with a value of 0, 1, 2, or 3, such as ETS = 3


239


Caps Specifies the caps properties. To view the properties: 1. 2.

Click the plus (+) sign next to Caps to expand the category. Click a plus (+) sign next to Cap or Plug .

3.

Click the actual data table. Some of the components do not have a ll properties. If a property is not listed for a component, then that component does not use the property. If the property is c ommon to all components, you can find the information on that property in Common Component Properties (on page 237).

Default Connection Settings Ap pl y s ame en d t yp e to all end s

Applies the same end type connection, such as Buttw eld (BW), to all ends when set to True. When set to False, the software uses more than one end type connection. Start

Specifies the start connection associated with the component.

Required MAINSIZE - Main Size Specifies the main sizes for the component. LEN - Length Specifies the lengths for the component. HUBOD - Hub Outside Diameter Specifies the diameter value for the component. WEIGHT - Weight Specifies the weight for the component. ETS - Bitwise End Type Placement Control Specifies the value for the placement control. The software calculates placement control using the end type number for each port. For more information, see Common Component Properties (on page 237). USER_PART_NUMBER - User Part Number Enables you to specify uniq ue part numbers for each individual c omponent. To insert the USER_PART_NUMBER field, right-click the data table, and then select Add Us er Par t Number Column . You can also accomplish this by double-clicking Custom Data in the Properties pane and creating the USER_PART_NUMBER field exactly as it appears here. If you do not need the USER_PART_NUMBER column, click Cancel . Custom Data



240

Property Descriptions Picture Description

Displays an image of the component. Listed below are the types of components available for selection in the table. Images are provided when available. For custom pipe supports, user shapes, and custom topworks, the Picture Description displays Image Path. The software allows you to browse for a .png or .gif drawing, and then displays the drawing below the Image Path under Picture Description . Cap

Plug

1. LEN

1. LEN

2.MAINSIZE

2. HUBOD

3. HUBOD

3. REDSIZE

Couplings Specifies the couplings properties. To view the properties: 1.

Click the plus (+) sign next to Couplings to expand the category.

2.

Click a plus (+) sign next to a coupling component.

3.




Specifies the start connection associated with the component. End

Specifies the end connection associated with the component.


241

Property Descriptions Required MAINSIZE - Main Size Specifies the main sizes for the component. REDSIZE - Reduction Size Specifies the reduction sizes for the com ponent. The reduction property is only available o n reducing components. SUBDIRECTORY - Sub Directory Specifies the location of the graphics overlay folder. You can save in any folder location as needed. You must type the entire path of the local or network folder location i n the SUBDIRECTORY value. For example, type Z:\[Name of user shape folder] in the SUBDIRECTORY value for a local location. For a network location, type \\[Network Name]\[Name of drawing folder]. DWGNAME - Drawing File Name Specifies the name of the graphic o verlay drawing. LEN - Length Specifies the lengths for the component. HUBOD - Hub Outside Diameter Specifies the diameter value for the com ponent. WEIGHT - Weight Specifies the weight for the component. ROTATION_X_AXIS - Drawing Rotation X Axis Specifies the angle of the clamp graphic overlay drawing. ETS - Bitwise End Type Placement Control Specifies the value for the placement control. T he software calculates placement control using the end type number for each port. For more information, see Common Component Properties (on page 237). USER_PART_NUMBER - User Part Number Enables you to specify unique part numbers for each individual component. To insert the USER_PART_NUMBER field, right-click the data table, and then select Add Us er Par t Number Column . You can also accomplish this by double-clicking Custom Data in the Properties pane and creating the USER_PART_NUMBER field exactly as it appears here. If you do not need the USER_PART_NUMBER column, click Cancel . Custom Data



242


Displays an image of the component. Listed below are the types of components available for selection in the table. Images are provided when available. For custom pipe supports, user shapes, and custom topworks, the Picture Description displays Image Path. The software allows you to browse for a .png or .gif drawing, and then displays the drawing below the Image Path under Picture Description . Coupling

Coupling Reducing

1. MAINSIZE

1. MAINSIZE

2. LEN

2. LEN

3. HUBOD

3. REDSIZE

Coupling Half

Coupling Nut

1. MAINSIZE

1. HUBOD

2. LEN

2. LEN

3. HUBOD

Crosses Specifies the crosses properties. To view the properties: 1.

Click the plus (+) sign next to Crosses to expand the category.

2.

Click a plus (+) sign next to a cross component.

3.

Click the actual data table. Some of the components do not have a ll properties. If a property is not listed for a component, then that component does not use the property. If the property is common to all components, you can find the information on that property in Common Component Properties (on page 237).


243

Property Descriptions Default Connection Settings Ap pl y s ame en d t yp e to all end s



Specifies the end connection associated with the component. Branch1

Specifies the first branch connection associated with the component. Branch2

Specifies the second branch connection associated with the component.

Required MAINSIZE - Main Size Specifies the main sizes for the component. REDSIZE - Reduction Size Specifies the reduction sizes for the com ponent. The reduction property is only available o n reducing components. CENEND1 - Center to Branch 1 End Specifies the distance from the center to an end. CENEND2 - Center to Branch 2 End Specifies the distance from the center to an end. CENEND3 - Center to Branch 3 End Specifies the distance from the center to an end. CENEND4 - Center to Branch 4 End Specifies the distance from the center to an end. WEIGHT - Weight Specifies the weight for the component. ETS - Bitwise End Type Placement Control Specifies the value for the placement control. T he software calculates placement control using the end type number for each port. For more information, see Common Component Properties (on page 237). USER_PART_NUMBER - User Part Number Enables you to specify uniq ue part numbers for each individual component. To insert the USER_PART_NUMBER field, right-click the data table, and then select Add Us er Par t Number Column . You can also accomplish this by double-clicking Custom Data in the Properties pane and creating the USER_PART_NUMBER field exactly as it appears here. If you do not need the USER_PART_NUMBER column, click Cancel .


244

Property Descriptions Custom Data


Displays an image of the com ponent. Listed below are the types of components available for selection in the table. Images are provided when available. For custom pipe supports, user shapes, and custom topworks, the Picture Description displays Image Path. The software allows you to browse for a .png or .gif drawing, and then displays the drawing below the Image Path under Picture Description . Cross

Cross Reducing

1. CENEND1

1. CENEND1

2. CENEND2

2. CENEND2

3. CENEND3

3. CENEND3

4. CENEND4

4. CENEND4

5. MAINSIZE

5. MAINSIZE 6. REDSIZE

Elbows Specifies the elbow properties. To view the properties: 1.

Click the plus (+) sign next to Elbows to expand the category.

2.

Click a plus (+) sign next to an elbow component.

3.







245

Property Descriptions Required MAINSIZE - Main Size Specifies the main sizes for the component. REDSIZE - Reduction Size Specifies the reduction sizes for the com ponent. The reduction property is only available o n reducing components. RAD - Radius Specifies the radius of the elbow. The type of the elbow is determined b y the size of the Radius. For a long-radius elbow, RAD is greater than 1 .5 * MAINSIZE. For a short-radius elbow, RAD is less than MAINSIZE. The RAD formula that you use should be the sam e for each row in the RAD column. If they are different, then the software determines the elbow type by the majority (more than 60% of the RAD boxes containing the same formula) of the formulas that you have entered. ANG - Angle Specifies the angle of the elbow. SEGS - Number of Segments Specifies the number of segments on a Mitered Elbow. SEGS is only available on a Mitered Elbow. STLEN - Start Tangent Length Specifies a tangent length. ETLEN - End Tangent Length Specifies a tangent length. WEIGHT - Weight Specifies the weight for the component. ETS - Bitwise End Type Placement Control Specifies the value for the placement control. T he software calculates placement control using the end type number for each port. For more information, see Common Component Properties (on page 237). USER_PART_NUMBER - User Part Number Enables you to specify unique part numbers for each individual component. To insert the USER_PART_NUMBER field, right-click the data table, and then select Add Us er Par t Number Column . You can also accomplish this by double-clicking Custom Data in the Properties pane and creating the USER_PART_NUMBER field exactly as it appears here. If you do not need the USER_PART_NUMBER column, click Cancel . Custom Data



246


Displays an image of the component. Listed below are the types of components available for selection in the table. Images are provided when available. For custom pipe supports, user shapes, and custom topworks, the Picture Description displays Image Path. The software allows you to browse for a .png or .gif drawing, and then displays the drawing below the Image Path under Picture Description . Elbow (180_BW, 45L_BW, 90L_BW)

Elbow (90L_SR_BW, 180_SR_BW)

1. MAINSIZE

1. ANG

2. RAD

2. MAINSIZE 3. RAD

Elbow (45L_SW/TR, 90L_SW/TR)

Reducing Elbo w

1. RAD

1. REDSIZE

2. MAINSIZE

2. RAD

3. STLEN

3. MAINSIZE

4. ETLEN

Street Elbow

Mitered Elbow

1. RAD

1. MAINSIZE

2. MAINSIZE

2. RADIUS 3. ETLEN 4. ANGLE 5. STLEN


247


Flanges Specifies the flanges properties. To view the properties: 1.

Click the plus (+) sign next to Flanges to expand the category.

2.

Click a plus (+) sign next to a flange component.

3.






Required MAINSIZE - Main Size Specifies the main sizes for the component. REDSIZE - Reduction Size Specifies the reduction sizes for the com ponent. The reduction property is only available o n reducing components. LEN - Length Specifies the lengths for the component. FLGTHK - Flange Thickness Specifies the thickness of the flange. FLGDIA - Flange Diameter Specifies the diameter of the flange. HDLE - HUB Diameter Large End Specifies the diameter of the large end of the flange. HDSE - HUB Diameter Small End Specifies the diameter of the small end of the flange. PENG - Pipe Engagement Specifies the value of the pipe engagement.


248

Property Descriptions PSB - Pipe Set Back Specifies the value of the pipe setback for the flange. Use this property to set the pipe back in the socket weld flange component. LJLEN - Lap Joint Length Specifies the lab joint length for the flange. WEIGHT - Weight Specifies the weight for the component. USER_PART_NUMBER - User Part Number Enables you to specify uniq ue part numbers for each individual com ponent. To insert the USER_PART_NUMBER field, right-click the data table, and then select Add Us er Par t Number Column . You can also accomplish this by double-clicking Custom Data in the Properties pane and creating the USER_PART_NUMBER field exactly as it appears here. If you do not need the USER_PART_NUMBER column, click Cancel .

Enhancement RFD - Raised Face Diameter Specifies the diameter of the raised face. RFLEN - Raised Face Length Specifies the length of the raised face. BHD - Bolt Hole Diameter Specifies the diameter of the bolt hole. BCD - Bolt Circle Diameter Specifies the diameter of the bolt circle. BHN - Bolt Hole Number Specifies the number of bolt holes. OTD - Orifice Tap Diameter Specifies the diameter of the orifice tab. OTA - Orifice Tap Angle Specifies the angle of the orifice tab. OTN - Orifice Tap Number Specifies the value attached to that specific orifice tab. PID - Pipe Inside Diameter Specifies the diameter of the inside of the pipe. RF - Fillet Radius Specifies the radius of the fillet.


249


Enables you to input fields using the New Field Dialog Box (on page 116). You can access the custom data fields in CADWorx Plant through the Component Edit dialog box. For more information, see Component Custom Data Dialog Box and Local Edit in the CADWorx Plant Users Guide. Picture Description Displays an image of the com ponent. Listed below are the types of components available for selection in the table. Images are provided when available. For custom pipe supports, user shapes, and custom topworks, the Picture Description displays Image Path. The software allows you to browse for a .png or .gif drawing, and then displays the drawing below the Image Path under Picture Description . Flange Blind Flange Lap Joi nt 1. BHD 1. HDLE=HDSE 2. RFLEN 2. PID 3 and 4. FLGTHK = LEN 3. FLGTHK 5. RFD 4. RFLEN 6. BCD 5. RFD 7. FLGDIA 6. BCD 7. FLGDIA 8. LEN 9. BHD Long Weld Neck Flange Weld Neck 1. HDLE 1. HDLE 2. HDSE 2. HDSE 3. PID 3. PID 4. FLGTHK 4. FLGTHK 5. RFLEN 5. RFLEN 6. RFD 6. RFD 7. BCD 7. BCD 8. FLGDIA 8. FLGDIA 9. LEN 9. LEN 10. BHD 10. BHD Flange Reducing Slip On

Flange Reducing Threaded

1. HDLE = HDSE 2. PENG 3. REDSIZE 4. LEN 5. RFD 6. BCD 7. FLGDIA 8. RFLEN 9. FLGTHK 10. BHD


1. HDLE 2. HDSE 3. PENG 4. LEN 5. REDSIZE 6. RFD 7. BCD 8. FLGDIA 9. RFLEN 10. FLGTHK 11. BHD

250

Property Descriptions Flange Reducing Weld Neck

Flange Slip On

1. HDLE = HDSE 2. MAINSIZE 3. PENG 4. LEN 5. RFD 6. BCD 7. FLGDIA 8. RFLEN 9. FLGTHK 10. BHD

1. HDLE 2. HDSE 3. PID 4. FLGTHK 5. RFLEN 6. RFD 7. BCD 8. FLGDIA 9. LEN 10. BHD Flange Socket Weld

Flange Threaded

1. HDLE 2. HDSE 3. PENG 4. PSB 5. LEN 6. PID 7. RFD 8. BCD 9. FLGDIA 10. RFLEN 11. FLGTHK 12. BHD

1. HDLE = HDSE 2. MAINSIZE 3. PENG 4. LEN 5. RFD 6. BCD 7. FLGDIA 8. RFLEN 9. FLGTHK 10. BHD

Stub

1. HDLE 2. HDSE 3. PIPETHK 4. FLGTHK 5. FLGDIA 6. LEN


251


Gaskets/Bolts/Welds Specifies the gasket, bolt, and weld properties. To v iew the properties: 1.

Click the plus (+) sign next to Gaskets/Bolds/Welds to expand the category.

2.

Click a plus (+) sign next to a weld, gasket, or bolt.

3.

Click the actual data table. Some of the components do not have a ll properties. If a property is not listed for a component, then that component does not use the property.

See Also   

Gaskets (on page 252) Bolts (on page 253) Welds (on page 258)

Gaskets Selection Code

Specifies the code assigned to the gasket from the Selection Code that you set when you create the data table. If you did not assign a Selection Code when you created the data table, you can assign one i n this property. For more information, see Data Table (on page 54).

Required MAINSIZE - Main Size Specifies the main sizes for the component. FLGOD - Flange Outside Diameter Specifies the outside diameter of a flange for a gasket. THK - Thickness Specifies the thickness of a gasket. RNO - Ring Number Specifies the ring number of a gasket. WEIGHT - Weight Specifies the weight for the component. INSIDEDIAMETER - Inside Diameter Specifies the inside diameter of the g asket. USER_PART_NUMBER - User Part Number Enables you to specify uniq ue part numbers for each individual com ponent. To insert the USER_PART_NUMBER field, right-click the data table, and then select Add Us er Par t Number Column . You can also accomplish this by double-clicking Custom Data in the Properties pane and creating the USER_PART_NUMBER field exactly as it appears here. If you do not need the USER_PART_NUMBER column, click Cancel .


252



Displays an image of the com ponent. Listed below are the types of components available for selection in the table. Images are provided when available. For custom pipe supports, user shapes, and custom topworks, the Picture Description displays Image Path. The software allows you to browse for a .png or .gif drawing, and then displays the drawing below the Image Path under Picture Description . Gasket

1. MAINSIZE 2. THCK 3. FLGOD

Bolts Selection Code

Specifies the code assigned to the bolt from the Selection Code that you set when you create the data table. If you did not assign a Selection Code when you created the data table, you can assign one i n this property. For more information, see Data Table (on page 54). Bolt Designator

Specifies the letter that displays when you ins ert bolts in the 3D model. The letter for bolts displays only in non-enhanced modes. For example, when you insert a bolt in the model in a non-enhanced mode, the software by default adds the letter B to the drawing. However, if you change the Bolt Designator , then the software displays the value assig ned in the Bolt Designator box for the bolt. If you set your Bolt Designator in the catalog properties, you must reselect the data table in the New and Edit Component Pane (on page 125) from the Data Table list.


253

Property Descriptions Required MAINSIZE - Main Size Specifies the main sizes for the component. NOSET - Number of bolts in set Specifies the amount of bolts for a set of flanges or connections. DIA - Bolt Diameter Specifies the diameter of a bolt. LEN - Length Specifies the length of a bolt. TYPE - Bolt Type Specifies the bolt type. NUTCNT - Nut Count Specifies the number of nuts per bo lt. NUTTHK - Nut Thickness Specifies the thickness of the nut associa ted with the bolt. EXT - Bolt Extension Specifies the extension of the bolt. TOL - Tolerance Specifies the tolerance of the bolt and used to round the bolt length after calculation. WEIGHT - Weight Specifies the weight for the component. If the bolt Weight equals 0.0 in the Stud Bolts data table, the software calculates the weight using the Density value from the Material Table and the CAD platform solid vol ume of the whole set of bolts. If the bolt Weight is greater than 0.0, then the following applies: 

The software calculates the bolt weight as long as the bolt length calculated in the model is longer than in the data table. 

Bolt weight = (Actual bolt length / length value of the data table)*Weight value of the data table.

WASHERTHK - Washer Thickness Specifies the thickness of the washer on a bolt. WASHERCNT - Washer Count Specifies the number of washers per bolt. USER_PART_NUMBER - User Part Number Enables you to specify uniq ue part numbers for each individual com ponent. To insert the USER_PART_NUMBER field, right-click the data table, and then select Add Us er Par t Number Column . You can also accomplish this by double-clicking Custom Data in the Properties pane and creating the USER_PART_NUMBER field exactly as it appears here. If you do not need the USER_PART_NUMBER column, click Cancel . Custom Data



254



Bolt Length Calculation Bolt Type = 0: Fixed Length Bolt

CADWorx does not calculate bolt lengths for type 0 bolts. Bolt Type = 1: 1 - Thread 2 - Nut 3 - Runout

4 - Shank 5 - Radius 6 - Head 7 - Thread Length 8 - Grip Length 9 - Nominal Length Bolt Type = 2: wit h bolt extension

1 - Nuts 2 - Thread 3 - Nominal Length 4 - Bolt Extension


255

Property Descriptions Nut Count

Nut count = 1, Washer count = 0



Bolt Length Formula

Bolt Type = 1: BOLT LEN = Round (X + Nut Count * Nut Thickness + Bolt extension + Number Washer * Washer Thickness) Bolt Type = 2: BOLT LEN = Round (X + Nut Count * Nut Thickness + 2 * Bolt extension + Number Washer * Washer Thickness) The bolt length = maximum of (BOLT LEN, Length in the data table).


256

Property Descriptions Where X is:

The round function works with the BoltRoundControl setting. BoltRoundControl specifies the rounding of bolt length: 

0 - No rounding is performed.



1 - Rounds the value up to the nearest multiple of the value specified in Tolerance.



2 - Rounds the value down to the nearest multiple of the value specified in Tolerance.



3 - Rounds the value up or down to the nearest multiple of the value specified in Tolerance.

If the bolt Weight equals 0.0 in the Stud Bolts data table, the software calculates the weight using the Density value from the Material Table and the CAD platform solid v olume of the whole set of bolts. If the bolt Weight is greater than 0.0, then the following applies: 



The software calculates the bolt weight as long as the bolt length calculated in the model is longer than in the data table. Bolt weight = (Actual bolt length / length value of the data table)*Weight value of the data table.

Bolt Flanges

Two flange components are required, with optional gaskets and components. Components in the middle must have a wafer end type on both ends. Two components are allowed.

1 - Bleed ring 2 - Spectacle blind


257

Property Descriptions Welds Required MAINSIZE - Main Size Specifies the main sizes for the component. THK - Thickness Specifies the thickness of a weld. TYPE - Type Specifies the type of weld. WEIGHT - Weight Specifies the weight for the component. PENETRATION - Penetration Specifies the penetration value of the weld. REINFORCEMENTOUTSIDE - Reinforcement Outside Specifies the outside reinforcement of the weld.

USER_PART_NUMBER - User Part Number Enables you to specify unique p art numbers for each individual component. To i nsert the USER_PART_NUMBER field, right-click the data table, and then select Add Us er Part Number Column . You can also accomplish this by double-clicking Custom Data in the Properties pane and creating the USER_PART_NUMBER field exactly as it appears here. If you do not need the USER_PART_NUMBER column, click Cancel . Custom Data Enables you to input fields using the New Field Dialog Box (on page 116). You can access the custom data fields in CADWorx Plant through the Component Edit dialog box. For more information, see Component Custom Data Dialog Box and Local Edit in the CADWorx Plant Users Guide. Picture Description Displays an image of the component. Listed below are the types of components available for selection in the table. Images are provided when available. For custom pipe supports, user shapes, and custom topworks, the Picture Description displays Image Path. The software allows you to browse for a .png or .gif drawing, and then displays the drawing below the Image Path under Picture Description . Weld

1. Thickness


258


Laterals Specifies the laterals properties. To view the properties: 1.

Click the plus (+) sign next to Laterals to expand the category.

2.

Click a plus (+) sign next to a lateral component.

3.






Specifies the first branch connection associated with the component.

Required MAINSIZE - Main Size Specifies the main sizes for the component. REDSIZE - Reduction Size Specifies the reduction sizes for the com ponent. The reduction option is only available on reducing components. CSEND - Center to Small End Specifies the small center end. CLEND - Center to Large End Specifies the large center end. CBRH - Center to Branch Specifies the center branch. WEIGHT - Weight Specifies the weight for the component.


259

Property Descriptions ETS - Bitwise End Type Placement Control Specifies the value for the placement control. The software calculates placement control using the end type number for each port. For more information, see Common Component Properties (on page 237). USER_PART_NUMBER - User Part Number Enables you to specify unique p art numbers for each individual component. To i nsert the USER_PART_NUMBER field, right-click the data table, and then select Add Us er Par t Number Column . You can also accomplish this by double-clicking Custom Data in the Properties pane and creating the USER_PART_NUMBER field exactly as it appears here. If you do not need the USER_PART_NUMBER column, click Cancel . Custom Data


Displays an image of the component. Listed below are the types of components available for selection in the table. Images are provided when available. For custom pipe supports, user shapes, and custom topworks, the Picture Description displays Image Path. The software allows you to browse for a .png or .gif drawing, and then displays the drawing below the Image Path under Picture Description . Lateral

Lateral Reducing

1. CBRH

1. CBRH

2. MAINSIZE

2. REDSIZE

3. CSEND

3. MAINSIZE

4. CLEND

4. CLEND 5. CSEND

O-Lets Specifies the o-lets properties. To view the properties: 1.

Click the plus (+) sign next to O-Lets to expand the category.

2.

Click a plus (+) sign next to an o-let component.

3.



260


Applies the same end type connection, such as Buttw eld (BW), to all ends when set to True. When set to False, the software uses more than one end type connection. End


Required MAINSIZE - Main Size Specifies the main sizes for the component. PSA - Pipe Sizes Allowed Specifies the pipe size allo wed for the O-let. HUBOD - HUB Outside Diameter Specifies the outside diameter of the O-let. PROJ - Outside Projection Specifies the projection from the outer point. OLETANGLE - Olet Angle Specifies the angle of the O-let. PENG - Pipe Engagement Specifies the pipe engagement of the O-let. PSB - Pipe Set Back Specifies the set back of the pipe from the end point. POD - Pipe Outside Diameter Specifies the outside diameter of the pipe. WEIGHT - Weight Specifies the weight for the component. ETS - Bitwise End Type Placement Control Specifies the value for the placement control. T he software calculates placement control using the end type number for each port. For more information, see Common Component Properties (on page 237). USER_PART_NUMBER - User Part Number Enables you to specify unique part numbers for each individual component. To i nsert the USER_PART_NUMBER field, right-click the data table, and then select Ad d Us er Par t Number Column . You can also accomplish this by double-clicking Custom Data in the Properties pane and creating the USER_PART_NUMBER field exactly as it appears here. If you do not need the USER_PART_NUMBER column, click Cancel .


261



Displays an image of the com ponent. Listed below are the types of components available for selection in the table. Images are provided when available. For custom pipe supports, user shapes, and custom topworks, the Picture Description displays Image Path. The software allows you to browse for a .png or .gif drawing, and then displays the drawing below the Image Path under Picture Description . Elbow-O-Let

Nip-O-Let

1. HUBOD

1. PROJ

2. PROJ

2. HUBOD 3. PSA

O-Let Lateral-O-Let

Pipe Specifies the pipe properties. To view the properties: 1.

Click the plus (+) sign next to Pipe to expand the category.

2.

Click a plus (+) sign next to a pipe component.

3.



262





Required MAINSIZE - Main Size Specifies the main sizes for the component. MINLEN - Optional Minimum Pipe Length Specifies the optional minimum lengths for the com ponent. MAXLEN - Optional Maximum Pipe Length Specifies the optional maximum lengths for the component. THRDCL - Threaded close length Specifies the length of a threaded close for a nipple. SOCCL - Socket close length Specifies the length of a socket close for a nipple. WEIGHT - Weight Specifies the weight for the component. ETS - Bitwise End Type Placement Control Specifies the value for the placement control. T he software calculates placement control using the end type number for each port. For more information, see Common Component Properties (on page 237). USER_PART_NUMBER - User Part Number Enables you to specify uniq ue part numbers for each individual component. To insert the USER_PART_NUMBER field, right-click the data table, and then select Add Us er Par t Number Column . You can also accomplish this by double-clicking Custom Data in the Properties pane and creating the USER_PART_NUMBER field exactly as it appears here. If you do not need the USER_PART_NUMBER column, click Cancel . Custom Data



263


Displays an image of the component. Listed below are the types of components available for selection in the table. Images are provided when available. For custom pipe supports, user shapes, and custom topworks, the Picture Description displays Image Path. The software allows you to browse for a .png or .gif drawing, and then displays the drawing below the Image Path under Picture Description . Pipe

1. MAXLEN 2. MINLEN 3. MAINSIZE

Nipple

PipeSupport Specifies the pipe support properties. To view the properties: 1.

Click the plus (+) sign next to PipeSuppor t to expand the category.

2.

Click a plus (+) sign next to pipe support.

3.

Click the actual data table. Some of the components do not have a ll properties specified. If a property is not listed for a pipe support, then that support does not use the property. In the list below, some descriptions contain specific support names because they are o nly available with those supports.

Show Optional

Specifies how the variable length can be selected in the Pipe Support Data dialog box. This property appears under the Component Table list, but is unique to the PipeSupport data table. For more information on the Pipe Support Data dialog box, see Support Modeler Palette in the CADWorx Plant Users Guide. 

0

Specifies that the components in the Pipe Support Data dialog box use the default data in the Data Table. 

1

Specifies that you can select specific sizes for the components of a pipe support in the Pipe Support Data dialog box. The sizes listed are based on the size of the support already selected. If duplicate sizes are available, they are listed here. Click the ellipsis under Data Table to make this selection. 

2

Specifies that you can select all sizes for the components of a pi pe support in the Pipe Support Data dialog box. All sizes for parts available in the data table are listed when this option is selected. Click the ellipsis under Data Table to make this selection.


264

Property Descriptions Required MAINSIZE - Main Size Specifies the main sizes for the component. MAXPIPEOD - Max Pipe Outside Diameter Specifies the maximum outside diameter for a pipe resting on a support. This is o nly available for the Clevis Hanger V Bott om . LENGTH1 - Length1 Specifies length one of the pipe support. LENGTH2 - Length2 Specifies length two of the pipe support. BOLTOD - Bolt OD Specifies the outside diameter of the bolt on the Ubolt support. LEGLENGTH - Leg Length Specifies the leg length on the Ubolt support. EXTENSION - Extension Specifies the extension of the strap. DROP - Drop Specifies the drop of the pipe support. GAP - Gap Specifies the gap of the pipe support. THK - Thickness Specifies the thickness of the pipe support. WIDTH - Width Specifies the width of the horizontal pipe clamp. NUMBEROFBOLT1 - Number Of Bolt1 Specifies the value of bolt one on the pipe clamps. BOLTDIAMETER1 - Bolt1 Diameter Specifies the diameter of bolt one on the horizontal pipe clamp. BOLTLENGTH1 - Bolt1 Length Specifies the length of bolt one on the horizontal pipe clamp. NUMBEROFBOLT2 - Number Of Bolt2 Specifies the value of bolt two on the pipe clamps. BOLTDIAMETER2 - Bolt2 Diameter Specifies the diameter of bolt one on the horizontal pipe clamp.


265

Property Descriptions BOLTLENGTH2 - Bolt2 Length Specifies the length of bolt one on the horizontal pipe clamp. BOLTSET - Bolt Set Specifies the value for the bolt set on the horizontal pipe clamp. SUBDIRECTORY - Sub Directory Specifies the location of the c ustom support folder. Sub Directory is only available in the Custom category. The subdirectory automatically defaults to the Spec folder located in [Product Folder]\Plant. You can use folders that you create in the C:\[Product Folder]\Plant\Spec folder in the SUBDIRECTORY value. If you need to use a folder location outside of the default Spec folder, then you must type the entire path of the loca l or network folder location in the SUBDIRECTORY value. For example, type Z:\[Name of custom drawing folder\[Name of custom support folder] in the SUBDIRECTORY value for the local location or \\[Network Name]\[Name of custom drawing folder]\[Name of custom support folder] for a network location. DWGNAME - Drawing Name Specifies the drawing name of the support. SCALE - Scale Specifies the scale of the pipe support. ROTATION - Rotation Specifies the direction of the support. CLAMPWEBTHK - Clamp Web Thickness Specifies the thickness for the clamp web. CLAMPDEPTH - Clamp Depth Specifies the depth of the beam clamp. CLAMPTHK - Clamp Thickness Specifies the thickness of the beam clamp. CLAMPWIDTH - Clamp Width Specifies the width of the beam clamp. BEAMFLGWIDTH - Beam FLG Width Specifies the width of the beam flange. BEAMFLGTHK - Beam FLG Thickness Specifies the thickness of the beam flange. BEAMWEBTHK - Beam Web Thickness Specifies the thickness of the beam web. LFB - Length From Bottom Specifies the length from the bottom of the clevis hanger types.


266

Property Descriptions LFC - Length From Center Specifies the length from the center of the cle vis and swivel ring hanger t ypes. UPPERTHK - Upper Thickness Specifies the upper thickness of the clevis hanger types. UPPERWIDTH - Upper Width Specifies the upper width of the clevis hanger types. LOWERTHK - Lower Thickness Specifies the lower thickness of the clevis hanger types. LOWERWIDTH - Lower Width Specifies the lower width of the clevis hanger types. UPPERLENGTH - Upper Length Specifies the upper length of the clevis and swivel ring hanger types. UPPERHEIGHT - Upper Height Specifies the upper height of the clevis hanger types. NUMBEROFBOLT - Number Of Bolt Specifies the number of bolts on the support. BOLTDIAMETER - Bolt Diameter Specifies the diameter of the bolt on the support. BOLTLENGTH - Bolt Length Specifies the length of the bolt on the support. WEBHEIGHT - Web Height Specifies the height of the web on the pipe shoe support. WEBTHK - Web Thickness Specifies the thickness of the web on the pipe shoe support. FLANGETHK - Flange Thickness Specifies the thickness of the flange on the pipe shoe support. FLANGEWIDTH - Flange Width Specifies the width of the flange on the pipe show support. DISTANCEWEB Distance Web Specifies the web distance on the pipe shoe support. IBHX - Insulation Band Hole X Specifies the X insulation band hole on the pipe shoe support. IBHY - Insulation Band Hole Y Specifies the Y insulation band hole on the pipe shoe support.


267

Property Descriptions IBHD - Insulation Band Hole D Specifies the D insulation band hole on the pipe shoe support. IBHTOP - Insulation Band Hole Top Specifies the top insulation band hole on the pipe shoe support. PLATEBW - End Plate Bottom Width Specifies the width of the bottom end plate on the pipe shoe support. PLATETW - End Plate Top Width Specifies the width of the top end plate on the pipe shoe support. PLATEOY - End Plate Offset From Bottom Specifies the offset from the bottom for the end plate o n the pipe shoe support. PLATEOX - End Plate Offset From Side Specifies the offset from the side for the end plate on the pipe shoe su pport. ANGLE - Angle The angle of the pipe cl amp. For 90 degrees create a hanger p ipe clamp. For 0 degrees create a horizontal pipe clamp. SUPPORTOD - Support OD Specifies the outside diameter of the pipe support. WALLTHK - Wall Thickness Specifies the thickness of the pipe support. LENGTH - Length Specifies the length of the pipe support. DIAMETER - Diameter Specifies the diameter of the rod and spring hanger supports. WIDTH - Width Specifies the width of the pipe support. WEIGHT - Weight Specifies the weight of the support. USER_PART_NUMBER - User Part Number Enables you to specify unique part numbers for each individual component. To insert the USER_PART_NUMBER field, right-click the data table, and then select Add Us er Par t Number Column . You can also accomplish this by double-clicking Custom Data in the Properties pane and creating the USER_PART_NUMBER field exactly as it appears here. If you do not need the USER_PART_NUMBER column, click Cancel . Custom Data

Enables you to input fields using the New Field Dialog Box (on page 116). You can access the custom data fields in CADWorx Plant through the Component Edit dialog box. For more information, see Component Custom Data Dialog Box and Local Edit in the CADWorx Plant Users Guide. For more information, see Pipe Support Assembly and Component Properties (on page 223).


268


Displays an image of the component. Listed below are the types of components available for selection in the table. Images are provided when available. For custom pipe supports, user shapes, and custom topworks, the Picture Description displays Image Path. The software allows you to browse for a .png or .gif drawing, and then displays the drawing below the Image Path under Picture Description . Beam Clamp

Clevis Hanger Flat Top

1. BEAM FLANGE THK 2. BEAM FLANGE WIDTH 3. BEAM WEB THK 4. CLAMP THK 5.CLAMP DEPTH 6. CLAMP WEB THK 7.CLAMP WIDTH Clevis Hanger

Clevis Hanger V Bott om

1. UPPER WIDTH 2. UPPER HEIGHT 3. UPPER LENGTH 4. UPPER THK 5.BOLT DIAMETER 6. LFC 7. MAIN SIZE 8. LOWER THK 9. 3 x BOLT DIAMETER 10. LOWER WIDTH


1. UPPER WIDTH 2. UPPER THK 3. BOLT DIAMETER 4. LFB 5. LOWER THK 6. 3 x BOLT DIAMETER 7.LOWER WIDTH

1. UPPER WIDTH 2. UPPER HEIGHT 3. UPPER THK 4. UPPER LENGTH 5. LFB 6. 3 x BOLT DIAMETER 7. MAIN SIZE 8. MAX OD 9. BOLT DIAMETER 10. LOWER THK 11. LOWER WIDTH

269

Property Descriptions Custom

Pipe Clamp

Image Path - Allows you to select a .png or .gif image that you created of your pipe support, topworks, or user shape. The image then displays below Image Path .

1. WIDTH 2. THK 3. LENGTH1 4. LENGTH2 5. GAP 6. MAIN SIZE

Pipe

Pipe Shoe

1. SUPPORT OD 2. LENGTH 3. WALL THK

Plate

1. LENGTH 2. FLANGE THK 3. WEB THK 4. FLANGE WIDTH 5. WEB HEIGHT

Rod

1. WIDTH 2. LENGTH 3. THK

Saddle

Split Ring Hanger

1. THK 2. MAIN SIZE 3. DROP 4. LENGTH1 5. LENGTH2 6. WIDTH


1. DIAMETER 2. LENGTH

1. WIDTH 2. GAP 3. MAIN SIZE 4. BOLD DIAMETER 5. THK

270

Property Descriptions Spring Hanger

Strap

1. LENGTH 2. DIAMETER

Swivel Ring Hanger

1. WIDTH 2. EXTENSION 3. THK 4. LENGTH1 5. LENGTH2 6. GAP 7. MAIN SIZE

UBolt

1. WIDTH 2. UPPER LENGTH 3. LFC 4. MAIN SIZE 5. THK

1. LEG LENGTH 2. BOLT OD 3. MAIN SIZE

Reducers Specifies the reducer's properties. To view the properties: 1.

Click the plus (+) sign next to Reducers to expand the category.

2.

Click a plus (+) sign next to a reducer component.

3.







271

Property Descriptions Required MAINSIZE - Main Size Specifies the main sizes for the component. REDSIZE - Reduction Size Specifies the reduction sizes for the com ponent. The reduction property is only available o n reducing components. LEN - Length Specifies the lengths for the component. CENOFF - Center Lines Offset Specifies the offset of the center line. SESLEN - Small End Straight Length Specifies the straight length of the small end of the reducer. LESLEN - Large End Straight Length Specifies the straight length of the large end of the reducer. WEIGHT - Weight Specifies the weight for the component. ETS - Bitwise End Type Placement Control Specifies the value for the placement control. T he software calculates placement control using the end type number for each port. For more information, see Common Component Properties (on page 237). USER_PART_NUMBER - User Part Number Enables you to specify uniq ue part numbers for each individual component. To insert the USER_PART_NUMBER field, right-click the data table, and then select Add Us er Par t Number Column . You can also accomplish this by double-clicking Custom Data in the Properties pane and creating the USER_PART_NUMBER field exactly as it appears here. If you do not need the USER_PART_NUMBER column, click Cancel . Custom Data



272


Displays an image of the component. Listed below are the types of components available for selection in the table. Images are provided when available. For custom pipe supports, user shapes, and custom topworks, the Picture Description displays Image Path. The software allows you to browse for a .png or .gif drawing, and then displays the drawing below the Image Path under Picture Description . Bushing

Concentric / Swage Concentric

1. LEN

1. MAINSIZE

2. MAINSIZE

2. LESLEN

3. REDSIZE

3. LEN 4. SESLEN 5. REDSIZE

Eccentric / Swage Eccentric

1. MAINSIZE 2. LESLEN 3. LEN 4. SESLEN 5. REDSIZE 6. CENOFF

Sanitary Specifies the sanitary properties. To view the properties: 1.

Click the plus (+) sign next to Sanitary to expand the category.

2.

Click a plus (+) sign next to a sanitary com ponent.

3.



273






Required MAINSIZE - Main Size Specifies the main sizes for the component. REDSIZE - Reduction Size Specifies the reduction sizes for the com ponent. The reduction property is only available o n reducing components. RAD - Radius Specifies the radius of the uben. ANG - Angle Specifies the angle of the uben. STLEN - Start Straight Length Specifies the distance from the start port to the start of the curve. ENLEN - End Straight Length Specifies the distance from the end port to the start of the curve. PROJ - Side to project branch Specifies the distance from the side to the projection branch. BRANPROJ - Branch projection Specifies the distance from the centerline of the bend to the end of branch projection. ACTLG - Actuator length Specifies the length of the actuator. ACTOD - Actuator outside diameter Specifies the outside diameter of the actuator. YOKELG - Yoke length Specifies the length of the yoke for a multi-port.


274

Property Descriptions CENCEN - Center to center ports Specifies the distance from the center to the center of ports. CENPORT - Center to port Specifies the distance from the center to the port. CENSTEM - Center to stem Specifies the distance from the center to the stem. Body Type - Expand for information on Body 1, Body 2, and Body 3. BODY1 - Body 1 - Specifies the component drawn for body 1 based off the image below. Values entered can be from 1 to 9. BODY2 - Body 2 - Specifies the component drawn for body 2 based off the image below. Values entered can be from 1 to 9. BODY3 - Body 3 - Specifies the component drawn for body 3 based off the image below. Values entered can be from 1 to 9.

ANGLE1 - Angle 1 Specifies the angle of the branch from the main line of the valve. ANGLE2 - Angel 2 Specifies the angle of the branch from the main line of the valve. ANGLE3 - Angle 3 Specifies the angle of the branch from the main line of the valve.


275

Property Descriptions WEIGHT - Weight Specifies the weight for the component. ETS - Bitwise End Type Placement Control Specifies the value for the placement control. The software calculates placement control using the end type number for each port. For more information, see Common Component Properties (on page 237). USER_PART_NUMBER - User Part Number Enables you to specify uniq ue part numbers for each individual com ponent. To insert the USER_PART_NUMBER field, right-click the data table, and then select Add Us er Par t Number Column . You can also accomplish this by double-clicking Custom Data in the Properties pane and creating the USER_PART_NUMBER field exactly as it appears here. If you do not need the USER_PART_NUMBER column, click Cancel . Custom Data



Spec Blind/Bleed Ring/Exp Join t Specifies the spectacle blind, bleed rin g, and expansion joint properties. To view the properties: 1.

Click the plus (+) sign next to Spec Blind/Bleed Ring/Exp Joint to expand the category.

2.

Click a plus (+) sign next to a spectacle blind, bleed ring, or expansion joint.

3.



276





Required MAINSIZE - Main Size Specifies the main sizes for the component. FLGOD - Flange Outside Diameter Specifies the outside diameter of a flange for a bleed ring, expansion j oint, or spectacle blind. THK - Thickness Specifies the thickness of a gasket or a weld. CCOAL - Center to Center / Overall Length Specifies the center to center distance or the overall length of the component. WEIGHT - Weight Specifies the weight for the component. ETS - Bitwise End Type Placement Control Specifies the value for the placement control. The software calculates placement control using the end type number for each port. For more information, see Common Component Properties (on page 237). USER_PART_NUMBER - User Part Number Enables you to specify uniq ue part numbers for each individual com ponent. To insert the USER_PART_NUMBER field, right-click the data table, and then select Add Us er Par t Number Column . You can also accomplish this by double-clicking Custom Data in the Properties pane and creating the USER_PART_NUMBER field exactly as it appears here. If you do not need the USER_PART_NUMBER column, click Cancel . Custom Data



277


Displays an image of the component. Listed below are the types of components available for selection in the table. Images are provided when available. For custom pipe supports, user shapes, and custom topworks, the Picture Description displays Image Path. The software allows you to browse for a .png or .gif drawing, and then displays the drawing below the Image Path under Picture Description . Bleed Ring

Expansion Joint

1. FLGOD

1. THK

2. THK

2. FLGOD 3. CCOAL 4. MAINSIZE

Spectacle Blin d

1. FLGOD 2. THK 3. CCOAL

Strainers Specifies the strainers properties. To view the properties: 1.

Click the plus (+) sign next to Strainers to expand the category.

2.

Click a plus (+) sign next to a strainer component.

3.



278






Required MAINSIZE - Main Size Specifies the main sizes for the component. LEN - Length Specifies the lengths for the component. CENBTM - Center to Branch End Specifies the distance from the center to the extreme bottom of the component. WEIGHT - Weight Specifies the weight for the component. ETS - Bitwise End Type Placement Control Specifies the value for the placement control. The software calculates placement control using the end type number for each port. For more information, see Common Component Properties (on page 237). USER_PART_NUMBER - User Part Number Enables you to specify uniq ue part numbers for each individual com ponent. To insert the USER_PART_NUMBER field, right-click the data table, and then select Add Us er Par t Number Column . You can also accomplish this by double-clicking Custom Data in the Properties pane and creating the USER_PART_NUMBER field exactly as it appears here. If you do not need the USER_PART_NUMBER column, click Cancel . Custom Data



279


Displays an image of the component. Listed below are the types of components available for selection in the table. Images are provided when available. For custom pipe supports, user shapes, and custom topworks, the Picture Description displays Image Path. The software allows you to browse for a .png or .gif drawing, and then displays the drawing below the Image Path under Picture Description . Strainer

1. LEN 2. CMAIN 3. MAINSIZE 4. ANGLE 5. CENBTM

Tees Specifies the tees properties. To view the properties: 1.

Click the plus (+) sign next to Tees to expand the category.

2.

Click a plus (+) sign next to a tee component.

3.








280

Property Descriptions Required MAINSIZE - Main Size Specifies the main sizes for the component. REDSIZE - Reduce Size Specifies the reduction sizes for the com ponent. Only available on reducing components. CMAIN - Center to End 1 Specifies the distance from the center to the m ain end. CEND - Center to End 2 Specifies the distance from the center to the end end. CBRH - Center to Branch End Specifies the distance from the center to the branch end. WEIGHT - Weight - Specifies the weight for the com ponent. ETS - Bitwise End Type Placement Control Specifies the value for the placement control. T he software calculates placement control using the end type number for each port. For more information, see Common Component Properties (on page 237). USER_PART_NUMBER - User Part Number Enables you to specify uniq ue part numbers for each individual com ponent. To insert the USER_PART_NUMBER field, right-click the data table, and then select Add Us er Par t Number Column . You can also accomplish this by double-clicking Custom Data in the Properties pane and creating the USER_PART_NUMBER field exactly as it appears here. If you do not need the USER_PART_NUMBER column, click Cancel . Custom Data


Displays an image of the component. Listed below are the types of components available for selection in the table. Images are provided when available. For custom pipe supports, user shapes, and custom topworks, the Picture Description displays Image Path. The software allows you to browse for a .png or .gif drawing, and then displays the drawing below the Image Path under Picture Description . Tee

Tee Reducing

1. MAINSIZE

1. MAINSIZE

2. CMAIN

2. CMAIN

3. CEND

3. CEND

4. CBRH

4. CBRH 5. REDSIZE


281


Topworks Specifies the topworks properties. To view the properties: 1.

Click the plus (+) sign next to Topworks to expand the category.

2.

Click a plus (+) sign next to a topworks component.

3.


Sub Folder

Specifies a sub folder for the ad ded topworks. You can select a topworks type from the list, or type a name in the Sub Folder box. You can also click the Sub Folder ellipsis , and then add sub folders to the Topwork Sub Folder Manager . For more information, see Add Sub Folder (on page 91) and Topwork Sub Folder Manager (on page 91).

Required MAINSIZE - Main Size Specifies the main sizes for the component. OPOR - Operator Outside Radius Specifies the radius from the center to the outside of the actuator wheel. OPTHK - Operator Thickness Specifies the thickness of the operator wheel. OPLENGTH - Operator Length Specifies the length of the operator stem. HANDLEOR - Handle Bar Outside Radius Specifies the outside radius of the handle. HANDLELENGTH - Handle Length Specifies the length of the handle to operate the valve. SUBDIRECTORY - Sub Directory Specifies the location of the c ustom topwork folder. Sub Directory is only available in the Custom category. The subdirectory automatically defaults to the Spec folder located in [Product Folder]\Plant. You can use folders that you create in the C:\[Product Folder]\Plant\Spec folder in the SUBDIRECTORY value. If you need to use a folder location outside of the default Spec folder, then you must type the entire path of the loca l or network folder location in the SUBDIRECTORY value. For example, type Z:\[Name of custom drawing folder\[Name of custom topwork folder] in the SUBDIRECTORY value for the local location or \\[Network Name]\[Name of custom drawing folder]\[Name of custom topwork folder] for a network location. DWGNAME - Drawing Name Specifies the drawing name of the topwork.


282

Property Descriptions ROTATION - Rotation Specifies the direction of the topwork. LEFTOR - Left Outside Radius Specifies the left outside radius. LEFTLENGTH - Left Side Length Specifies the left side length of the topwork. This property is only on a topwork that has sides. RIGHTOR - Right Outside Radius Specifies the right outside radius of the top work RIGHTLENGTH - Right Side Length Specifies the right length side of the topwork. This property is only on a topwork that has sides. NODERADIUS - Node Radius Specifies the radius of the node. This property is only on a topwork that contains a node. GEARBT - Gear Bottom to Stem Bottom Specifies the distance from the top of the stem to the bottom of the stem. WHEELBT - Gear Top to Gear Bottom Specifies the distance from the top of the gear box to the top of the stem. WHEELFT - Stem to Wheel Distance Specifies the distance of the wheel to the stem. WHEELOR - Wheel Outside Radius Specifies the outside radius of the wheel. WHEELLENGTH - Wheel Length Specifies the length of the wheel. SPOKENUMBER - Number of Spokes Specifies the number of spokes on the wheel. WEIGHT - Weight Specifies the weight for the component. Custom Data



283


Displays an image of the component. Listed below are the types of components available for selection in the table. Images are provided when available. For custom pipe supports, user shapes, and custom topworks, the Picture Description displays Image Path. The software allows you to browse for a .png or .gif drawing, and then displays the drawing below the Image Path under Picture Description . Ac tu ato r

Gear1

1. OPOR

1. WHEELFT

2. OPOR/2

2. 2*OPTHK

3. MAINSIZE

3. OPTHK

4. OPLENGTH

4. WHEELOR 5. GEARBT 6. WHEELBT 7. OPLENGTH

Gear2

GearActuator

1. 2*NODERADIUS

1. 2*OPOR 2. OPLENGTH

2. RIGHTLENGTH

3. GEARBT 4. WHEELLENGTH

3. OPTHK 4. OPLENGTH 5. 2*OPOR 6. LEFTLENGTH Lever1

Lever2

1. HANDLENGHT 2. OPLENGTH 3. 2*OPOR 4. 2*HANDOR


1. HANDLENGHT 2. 2*HANDOR 3. 2*OPOR 4. OPLENGTH 5. OPTHK

284

Property Descriptions Wheel

Custom

1. OPOR/5 2. 2*OPTHK 3. OPLENGTH 4. MAINSIZE

Image Path - Allows you to select a .png or .gif im age that you created of your pipe support, topworks, or user shape. The image then displays below Image Path .

5. OPOR

Unions Specifies the union's properties. To view the properties: 1.

Click the plus (+) sign next to Unions to expand the category.

2.

Click a plus (+) sign next to a union component.

3.






Required MAINSIZE - Main Size Specifies the main sizes for the component. LEN - Length Specifies the lengths for the component. NUTCRNS - Nut Crown distance Specifies the distance of the nut crown. WEIGHT - Weight Specifies the weight for the component.


285

Property Descriptions ETS - Bitwise End Type Placement Control Specifies the value for the placement control. The software calculates placement control using the end type number for each port. For more information, see Common Component Properties (on page 237). USER_PART_NUMBER - User Part Number Enables you to specify unique p art numbers for each individual component. To i nsert the USER_PART_NUMBER field, right-click the data table, and then select Add Us er Par t Number Column . You can also accomplish this by double-clicking Custom Data in the Properties pane and creating the USER_PART_NUMBER field exactly as it appears here. If you do not need the USER_PART_NUMBER column, click Cancel . Custom Data


Displays an image of the component. Listed below are the types of components available for selection in the table. Images are provided when available. For custom pipe supports, user shapes, and custom topworks, the Picture Description displays Image Path. The software allows you to browse for a .png or .gif drawing, and then displays the drawing below the Image Path under Picture Description . Union

1. NUTCRNS 2. LEN 3. MAINSIZE

User Shapes Specifies the user shapes properties. To view the properties: 1.

Click the plus (+) sign next to User Shapes to expand the category.

2.

Click a plus (+) sign next to a user sha pe component.

3.



286

Property Descriptions Required MAINSIZE - Main Size Specifies the main sizes for the component. REDSIZE - Reduction Size Specifies the reduction sizes for the com ponent. TYPE - Type Specifies the type of user shape. SUBDIRECTORY - Sub Directory Specifies the location of the user shapes folder. The subdirectory for user shapes does not require a value. User shapes automatically store in the Spec folder located in [Product Folder]\Plant if you do not specify a subdirectory. You can use folders that you create in the C:\[Product Folder]\Plant\Spec folder in the SUBDIRECTORY value. If you need to use a f older location outside of the default Spec folder, then you must type the entire path of the local or network folder location in the SUBDIRECTORY value. For example, type Z:\[Name of custom drawing folder]\[Name of user shape folder] in the SUBDIRECTORY value for a local location. For a network location type \\[Network Name]\[Name of custom drawing folder]\[Name of user shape folder] . This path must be the same as the one you set f or the folder under Folder settings in the Define User Shape dialog box in CADWorx Plant. For more information, see User Shapes in the CADWorx Plant Users Guide. DWG3DSOLID - Drawing Name for 3D Solid mode Specifies the drawing name you gave the user shape when you created it. DWG2DDOUBLE - Drawing Name for 2D Double Line mode Specifies the drawing name given to the user shape when it was created. DWG2DSINGLE - Drawing Name for 2D Single Line mode Specifies the drawing name given to the user shape when it was created. CONNPOINT - Connection points Specifies the value of the user shapes connection points. REFPOINT - Reference points Specifies the value of the reference connection po ints for the user shape. CONNDIRECT - Direction of each connection Specifies the value of the di rection for the connection points of the user shape. CONNSIZE - Size at each connection Specifies the size at each c onnection on the user shape. This al lows for user shapes with multiple reductions, because you can add m ultiple sizes to your user shape. CONNREDUCER - Reduction settings f or each connection Specifies the value for the reducing con nections flags.


287

Property Descriptions CONNENDTYPE - End type at each connection Specifies the value for the connection points end types. PROFILEPOINT - Array profile points Specifies the user shapes profile points if there are any. DENSITY - Density Specifies the density of the user shape. WEIGHT - Weight Specifies the weight for the component. LENGTH - Length Specifies the length for the component. USER_PART_NUMBER - User Part Number Enables you to specify uniq ue part numbers for each individual com ponent. To insert the USER_PART_NUMBER field, right-click the data table, and then select Add Us er Par t Number Column . You can also accomplish this by double-clicking Custom Data in the Properties pane and creating the USER_PART_NUMBER field exactly as it appears here. If you do not need the USER_PART_NUMBER column, click Cancel . Custom Data


Displays an image of the component. Listed below are the types of components available for selection in the table. Images are provided when available. For custom pipe supports, user shapes, and custom topworks, the Picture Description displays Image Path. The software allows you to browse f or a .png or .gif drawing, and then displays the drawing below the Image Path under Picture Description . Image Path

Allows you to select a .png or .gif image that you created of your pipe support, topworks, or user shape. The image then displa ys below Image Path .

Valves Specifies the valves properties. To view the properties: 1.

Click the plus (+) sign next to Valves to expand the category.

2.

Click a plus (+) sign next to a valve c omponent.

3.



288






Required MAINSIZE - Main Size Specifies the main sizes for the component. REDSIZE - Reduction Size Specifies the reduction sizes for the com ponent. The reduction property is only available o n reducing components. HUBOD - Hub Outside Diameter Specifies the diameter value for the com ponent. ODIN - Outside Diameter Inlet Specifies the outside diameter of the inl et. SQ - Square Dimension Specifies the square dimensions of the valve. LEN - Length Specifies the lengths for the component. OAL - Overall length Specifies the overall length of the component. ENDPORT - End to port outlet Specifies the distance from the end to the port outlet. CENFEMALE - Center to Female End Specifies the distance from the center to the female end. CPRES - Center to pressure end Specifies the distance from the center to the pressure end. ODPRES - Outside Diameter Pressure End Specifies the outside diameter of the pressure end.


289

Property Descriptions CREL - Center to relief end Specifies the distance from the center to the relief end. ODREL - Outside Diameter Relief End Specifies the outside diameter of the relief end. CMAIN - Center to End 1 Specifies the distance from the center to the m ain end. CEND - Center to End 2 Specifies the distance from the center to the end end. CBRH - Center to Branch End Specifies the distance from the center to the branch end. WEIGHT - Weight Specifies the weight for the component. ETS - Bitwise End Type Placement Control Specifies the value for the placement control. T he software calculates placement control using the end type number for each port. For more information, see Common Component Properties (on page 237). USER_PART_NUMBER - User Part Number Enables you to specify uniq ue part numbers for each individual com ponent. To insert the USER_PART_NUMBER field, right-click the data table, and then select Add Us er Par t Number Column . You can also accomplish this by double-clicking Custom Data in the Properties pane and creating the USER_PART_NUMBER field exactly as it appears here. If you do not need the USER_PART_NUMBER column, click Cancel . Custom Data


Displays an image of the component. Listed below are the types of components available for selection in the table. Images are provided when available. For custom pipe supports, user shapes, and custom topworks, the Picture Description displays Image Path. The software allows you to browse for a .png or .gif drawing, and then displays the drawing below the Image Path under Picture Description . 3-Way Valve

4-Way Valve

1. HUBOD

1. HUBOD

2. CMAIN

2. CMAIN

3. CEND

3. CBRH

4. CBRH


290

Property Descriptions An gl e Valv e

Ball Valve

1. ODPRES

1. MAINSIZE

2. CPRES

2. LENGTH

3. CREL

3. HUBOD

4. ODREL

Butterfly Valve

Check Valve

1. HUBOD

1. HUBOD

2. LENGTH

2. LENGTH

Control Valve

Dual Check Valve

1. HUBOD

1. HUBOD

2. LENGTH

2. LENGTH

Diaphragm Valve

Xbody Gate Valve

1. HUBOD

1. MAINSIZE

2. LENGTH

2. CENFEMALE 3. OAL 4. HUBOD


291

Property Descriptions Gage Valve

Gate Valve

1. MAINSIZE

1. HUBOD

2. ENDPORT

2. LENGTH

3. OAL 4. SQ

Globe Valve

Needle Valv e

1. MAINSIZE

1. HUBOD

2. LENGTH

2. LENGTH

Plug Valve

Relief Valve

1. HUBOD

1. CPRES

2. LENGTH

2. ODPRES 3. ODREL 4. CREL

Rotary Valve

1. HUBOD 2. LENGTH


292


Wye Shape Specifies the wye shape properties. To view the properties: 1.

Click the plus (+) sign next to Wye Shape to expand the category.

2.

Click a plus (+) sign next to a wye shape component.

3.







Required MAINSIZE - Main Size Specifies the main sizes for the component. CMAIN - Center to End 1 Specifies the center main to the end of the wye. CEND - Center to Branch 1 End Specifies the center of the first branch to the end of the wye. CBRH - Center to Branch 2 End Specifies the center of the second branch to the end of the wye. WEIGHT - Weight Specifies the weight for the component. ETS - Bitwise End Type Placement Control Specifies the value for the placement control. T he software calculates placement control using the end type number for each port. For more information, see Common Component Properties (on page 237).


293

Property Descriptions USER_PART_NUMBER - User Part Number Enables you to specify unique p art numbers for each individual component. To i nsert the USER_PART_NUMBER field, right-click the data table, and then select Add Us er Part Number Column . You can also accomplish this by double-clicking Custom Data in the Properties pane and creating the USER_PART_NUMBER field exactly as it appears here. If you do not need the USER_PART_NUMBER column, click Cancel . Custom Data


Displays an image of the component. Listed below are the types of components available for selection in the table. Images are provided when available. For custom pipe supports, user shapes, and custom topworks, the Picture Description displays Image Path. The software allows you to browse for a .png or .gif drawing, and then displays the drawing below the Image Path under Picture Description . Wye

1. CBRH 2. CEND 3. CMAIN 4. MAINSIZE

IndexCode Tables Properti es Table Name







294

Property Descriptions Fields INDEXCODE - Index Code Specifies the index code for a specific component. Index codes are associated with the database code property INDEXCODE. For more information, see DBCode Tables Properties (on page 295). DESCRIPTION - Description The description of the component associated with the index code. COMPTYPE - Component Type Specifies the component type associated with the index code. Custom Data


DBCode Tables Properti es Table Name


Specifies the Spec Editor version. This c annot be edited. IndexCode Table

Specifies the IndexCode Table selected when creating a DBCode table. T his cannot be edited. Created By

Specifies the person who created the project. This can be edited. Edited By

Specifies the person who edited the project. This can be edited. Description


Fields INDEXCODE - Index Code Specifies the index code associated with the selected database code table. DESCRIPTION - Description Specifies the description of the component associated with the index code in the INDEXCODE field. MAINSIZE - Main size Specifies the main sizes used for the specific index code and description. REDSIZE - Reduction Size Specifies the reduction sizes for the specific index code and description.


295

Property Descriptions PTN - Part Number Specifies the part number assigned to a specific index code row. When a d atabase code is imported, the part numbers that display contain the PTN designation, the index code, and an ascending numeric value. Custom Data


End Prep Tables Properti es Table Name

Specifies the name of the table sel ected. You can edit this property. Default Part Number

Specifies the default part number assigned to the table. You can edit this property. The default is 001 and auto-populated by the Specification Editor. Version




Specifies the description of the table. You ca n edit this property.

Fields NAME Specifies the name of the end preparation. T he name is an abbreviation of the description. DESCRIPTION Specifies the description of the end preparation. The description is the long d escription of the name. PTN Specifies the part number for the end preparation. Custom Data



296

A P P E N D I X B

Update History Items added and updated with CADWorx Specifi cation Edit or 2017 R1: 



Added support for the following SPRD interface imports, defined in the SPRD export content: 

Component connection class and rating.



Custom fields.

You can use Move Up and Move Down to sort the custom data list items. For m ore information, see List Items Dialog Box (on page 118).

Items added and updated with CADWorx Specifi cation Edit or 2017: Software Enhancements 











You can set the Selection Code for your gaskets and bolts, and then assign Applicable Gaskets and Appl ic abl e Bo lt s to your flange components, clamp components, flanged end-types, and clamped end-types. For more information, see Data Table (on page 54), End Type Table (on page 49), New and Edit Component Pane (on page 125), and Common Component Properties (on page 237). You can specify an alphanumeric designator to display for your bolts. For more information, see New and Edit Component Pane (on page 125). Added the SELECTION_CODE_CMP_TBL format in Component Tables list of the Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 134), and Description Format Dialog Boxes (on page 193). This format allows you to add the gasket and bolt selection codes to your description formats in Gaskets or Bolts. You can set default values for BOM Type, Layer Name, Color Index , Topworks , Sort Sequence , Isogen Identifier , Isogen SKEY , Optional Component , Ap pl ic abl e Gask ets , Ap pl icab le B ol ts , and Connection Settings for Start , End , Branch 1, and Branch 2 when creating a data table. For more information, see Data Table (on page 54) and Add a new data table to a category (on page 57). You can set default values for Isogen Symbol , Applicable Gaskets, Applic able Bolts , Component Class , Temperature Rating , and Pressure Rating when creating an end type table. For more information, see End Type Table (on page 49) and Add a new end type table (on page 51). You can set default values for BOM Type, Layer Name, Color Index , Topworks , Sort Sequence , Isogen Identifier , Isogen SKEY, Appl ic abl e Gask ets , Appl ic abl e Bo lt s , and Optional Component when creating a user shape in the Spec Editor. You can also add user shapes to any group folder when in Group List Mode. For more information, see New User Shape Table (on page 88) and Add new user shape (on page 89).


297

Update History 



















You can add custom end types to the catalog and specification. Custom end types allow you to transfer the data with the Transfer Data panel options; disable automatic gasket, weld, and bolt insertion for specific components; and setting the custom end types in the Matching End Type Table . For more information, see End Type Table (on page 49), New End Type (on page 42), New and Edit Component Pane (on page 125), Add single new component to a spec (on page 136), Add Multi Component Pane (on page 139), Add multiple new components to a spec (on page 140), Matching End Type Table Dialog Box (on page 197), and End Type Tables Properties (on page 231). You can view your list of components in the specification by category or group. For more information, see Spec List Mode Panel (on page 209). You can view your data tables by category or group. For more information, see Data Table List Mode Panel (on page 121). You can add groups that list multiple component types to the data tables folder. There are no restrictions to how you can define your groups. For more information, see New Group Table (on page 53), Group Data Table Manager Dialog Box (on page 54), and Common Component Properties (on page 237). You can create custom end types, such as stub end end type components, with the new end type feature. For more information, see New End Type (on page 42). You can add multiple sizes to create user shapes with multiple reductions. For more information, see User Shapes (on page 286). You can add a .png or .gif with the Image Path option under Picture Description in the Properties pane of custom pipe supports, custom topworks, and user shapes. For more information, see PipeSupport (on page 264), Topworks (on page 282), and User Shapes (on page 286). Updated component images in the Specification Editor Properties pane for Flange Slip On , Flange Reducing Slip On, Flange Threaded , Flange Reducing Threaded, Nip-O-Let , and Strainers. For more information, see Flanges (on page 248), O-Lets (on page 260), and Strainers (on page 278). You can define the default size of a pipe support assembly component to insert on a specific nominal pipe size. For more information, see Component Size Setup (on page 181). Sort order of the Data Tables saves with the catalog. Click the column header to sort by that column. Press SHIFT and click the column header to set a secondary sort order.



Updated the Default OTAP SKEY from TTSO to TSSO.



Enhanced custom data. 





You can change the default value of the project level custom data field individually at each specification level by typing a new value in the column in the Main Spec List View. You can reset the specification level default values of the project level custom data fields after you change them when editing Project Custom Data. You can update default values in project custom data to overwrite all values or only the values matching the original value.



Project Custom Data displays in your specification custom data.



Default value override is also available for pipe support libraries and assemblies.

For more information, see New Field Dialog Box (on page 116) and Edit a project custom data field (on page 119).


298

Update History 







Enhanced the Properties pane. Your properties pane no w stays at the same scroll location when you switch between tables under the same table folder. Added the Sub Folder option to the Topworks data table folder to make m anaging topworks easier. For more information, see New Topworks Table (on page 91), Add Sub Folder (on page 91), Topwork Sub Folder Manager (on page 91), and Add new topworks table (on page 92). Enhanced the tool tips for the Specification Editor fields such as data tables, end types, and more. When you hover over a name that extends beyond the boundary of the window, a tool tip displays the full name of the item. You can create graphic overlays of your coupling components in CADWorx Plant. In the CADWorx Spec Editor, you can specify the Subdirectory, the drawing name (DWGNAME), and the rotation around the X axis (ROTATION_X_AXIS) to define the graphic o verlay on your coupling component. This works in m uch the same way as you would defin e graphics for your custom topworks. You can also create graphic overlays with the Graphics Overlay Editor in CADWorx Plant. For more information, see Couplings (on page 241). Also see Graphics Overlay Editor in the CADWorx Plant Users Guide.

User Guide Revisions 



Updated information for direction and alignment vectors when creating custom pipe supports. For more information, see Edit Pipe Support Component Pane (on page 183). Enhanced the documentation on the pipe supports. For more information, see Edit Pipe Support Component Pane (on page 183), Example of Direction and Alignment Vectors using Pipe (on page 187), Example of Direction and Alignment Vectors using Other (on page 189), and Example of Direction and Alignment Vectors using Steel (on page 191).

Items added and updated with CADWorx Specifi cation Edit or 2016: Software Enhancements 





Improved the specification-level material assignment. You can set a material for each size of each component. You can define a m aterial assignment setup at the all component level based on sizes, at the component group le vel based on sizes, and at the component type level based on sizes. T he software still includes the previous material assignm ent options. For more information, see Material Assignment Setup (on page 198), Set material assignment for all components (on page 204), Set material assignment for all components based on size (on page 205), Set material assignment for a specific component (on page 206), Set material assignment for a specific component with a specific end type (on page 207), Export a material assignment setup (on page 207), Import a material assignment setup (on page 208), Display the material assigned to the component in CADWorx Plant (on page 208) and Material Table (on page 37). You can assign any Material Assi gnment Setup applicable to a component in the Material list in the New and Edit Component pane. You can also add a new material assignment setup with the Add M ater ial Setu p option in the Material list of the New and Edit Component pane. For more information, see New and Edit Component Pane (on page 125). You can now change the default OTAP SKEY using the specification or project level Default OTAP SKEY property. For more information, see Project Properties (on page 217), and Specification Properties (on page 218).


299

Update History 













You can save the project files to a previous version. You can then open them in CADWorx Spec Editor or CADWorx Plant for versions 2016, 2015 , or 2014. For more information, see Save As (on page 19). You can upgrade your projects and catalogs to the current version of the Specification Editor. This upgrade also adds the new features such as the Default OTAP SKEY to the upgraded specification. For more information, see Upgrade Previous Version Project and Catalog Files (on page 15). You can only use the Pipe Set Back (PSB) parameter to set the gap between the pipe and the socket weld flange. For more information, see Flanges (on page 248). Improved the Excel export. You can create your own export template or use one of the provided default templates to export your specifications. These export improvements enable you to import specifications from Excel back into the Specification Editor. For more information, see Export/Import Data Panel (on page 161), Export to Excel (on page 161), Cell Name Reference - Specification Properties (on page 162), Cell Name Reference Component Properties (on page 165), Export multiple specifications or an entire project to Excel (on page 171), and Export a single specification to Excel (on page 171). You can import specifications exported to Excel back into the Specification Editor. You must import an exported specification back into the same specification. For more information, see Import Update From Excel (on page 172), and Import data from Excel to a specification (on page 173). Enhancement of pipe supports. You can create new pipe support libraries, save your pipe support data as a separate libraries file, create new assemblies, and edit the p arts of those assemblies. You can edit the pipe support parts connection points and set description formats for pipe supports. For more information, see Pipe Support Library File Home Tab (on page 210), Pipe Support Library File View Tab (on page 211), Pipe Support Panel (on page 154), and Pipe Support Library (on page 177). You can transfer data from a pipe support libraries file to the pipe support data in a project or to another pipe support libraries file. For more information, see Support Data (on page 110).






Updated information on the SUBDIRECTORY for PipeSupport, Topworks, and User Shapes topics. For more information, see PipeSupport (on page 264), Topworks (on page 282), and User Shapes (on page 286). Due to the enhancements of the Excel export, the text export became a separate topic and the development team created a new icon. For m ore information, see Export to Text (on page 172). Added a Glossary of common terms.

Items added and up dated wit h CADWorx Spec Editor 2015 SP1: Software Enhancements 



Enhanced the import of the Smart Plant Reference Data (SPRD) specifications. This enhancement now includes importing the Ident , Short , and Option codes when the SPRD specification includes those codes. For more information, see Import Specification From SRD File (on page 152). When SPRD specifications include the unit basis applicable to the specification contents, then the CADWorx Specification Editor SPRD import automatically sets the conversion units accordingly. SPRD specification unit basis was not previousl y available in the SPRD specification files. Previously, you were required to specif y the unit basis for the conversion manually. The SPRD import now only requires you to specify the unit basis when the SPRD specification source file does not contain the relevant unit details. For more information, see Import Specification From SRD File (on page 152).


300

Update History User Guide Revisions 

Improved instructions for displaying the bolt length and bolt diameter part numbers in CADWorx. These instructions detail a workflow from the catalog, to the project, and then to the drawing. This procedure allows you to display the part numbering of the bo lt lengths and the bolt diameters. For more information, see Display the bolt diameter part number in CADWorx Plant (on page 33), and Display the bolt length part number in CADWorx Plant (on page 36).

Items added and updated wi th CADWorx Spec Editor 2015: Software Enhancements 





















You can now add bolt length tables and bolt diameter tables to the Size Tables folder by clicking Bolt Diameter Table or Bolt Length Table in the Ad d Tab le panel on the Home tab, or by using the right-click options Add Bo lt Diam eter Tab le and Add B ol t L eng th Table. For more information, see Add Table Panel (on page 23), Edit Table Features (on page 24), Bolt Diameter Table (on page 31), Add a new bolt diameter t able (on page 32), Bolt Length Table (on page 34), and Add a new bolt length table (on page 35). You can now select the bolt length and bolt diameter tables in the Specification Properties . For more information, see Specification Properties (on page 218). You can now add end prep tables to the Miscellaneous folder with the right-click option Ad d End Prep Tabl e or from End Prep Table on the Ad d Tabl e panel. For more information, see Add Table Panel (on page 23), End Prep Table (on page 97), Add a new end prep table (on page 98), Edit end prep table (on page 99), Miscellaneous folder (on page 115), and End Prep Tables Properties (on page 296). You can now select the end prep table in the Specification Properties . For more information, see Specification Properties (on page 218). You can now select the Isogen symbol for end types in the New and Edit Compo nent Pane. For more information, see New and Edit Component Pane (on page 125) and Add single new component to a spec (on page 136). You can now use the index code tables in your long, short, tag, and part number description formats. For more information, see Description Format Dialog Boxes (on page 193) and Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 134). You can now add custom data and property details to your pipe support components in Support Component of the Properties . For more information, see Pipe Support Assembly and Component Properties (on page 223). You can now select Straight Tee/Cross + Reducer in the branch table. Select Straight Tee/Cross + Reducer to insert crosses and tees based on the size of the branch. For more information, see New and Edit Component Pane (on page 125). You can create a pull-down list of items for custom data. For more information, see New Field Dialog Box (on page 116) and List Items Dialog Box (on page 118). You can now use spaces and underscores in the description formats. For more information, see Description Format Dialog Boxes (on page 193). You can now add Component Class , Temperature Rating , and Pressure Rating s for Start , End , Branch 1, and Branch 2 end points for Valves. For more information, see New and Edit Component Pane (on page 125).


301

Update History 



You can now use the OD_RED_SIZ_TBL and the DESCRIPTION_CMP_TBL schemas in the Description Format Dialog Boxes (on page 193). Improved import of AutoCAD Plant 3D specifications and catalogs. For more information, see Import AutoCAD Plant 3D Specification Data (on page 147), Import a single specification using an AutoCAD Plant 3D catalog (on page 149), Import a single specification using a CADWorx catalog (on page 150), and Import multiple specifications using a CADWorx catalog (on page 151).



You can now cancel the Ad d Us er Par t Nu mb er Col um n message box.



Improved the load time of the description format dialog boxes.


Added the bolt length and bolt diameter properties to the properties descriptions. For more information, see Specification Properties (on page 218), Bolt Diameter Table Properties (on page 226), and Bolt Length Table Properties (on page 227).


302

Glossary abstract part

A part that is only defined by a partial specification and that cannot be materially provided by the organization that defines the specification. actuator

A device used to operate a valve using electric, pneumatic, or hydraulic pressure. AISC (A meri can Ins ti tu te of Steel Con st ru ct io n)

An organization responsible for defining American steel construction standards. AISI

American Iron and Steel Institute anchor bolts

Bolts used to connect structural members to concrete footings. angle

The circular measurement taken from the intersection of two pipes at a turn or branch. arc element

A structural member of constant radius used to model curved elements. arrangement (accommod ation)

Those components of a system arranged in three-dimensional space with accurate dimensional representation for installation. Various types include electrical, HVAC, machinery, outfitting, and piping. arrangement (HVAC)

Components and ductwork of a ventilation system arranged in three-dimensional space with accurate dimensional representation. arrangement (outfitting)

Outfitting structure arranged in three-dimensional space with accurate dimensional representation. assembly

Unit composed of a collection of parts or other assemblies. Assembly creation consumes the individual part names and provides the unit a unique identification in the fabrication process. attribute

A single type of non-graphics information that is stored about an object such as diameter or end preparation.


303

Glossary axis

An imaginary line used to define the orientation of a system or object normally defined in terms of an x-, y-, and z-axis. Some 3-D graphic objects have an associated axis used to define the center or axis for rotations. bar

A steel rod used to reinforce concrete. basic design

Engineering definition of the model an d its systems. bay

The distance between two trusses. BCSA (British Constructional Steelwork Association)

An organization responsible for defining British steel construction standards. beam

A structural member type typically placed with the member axis in a nominal horizontal orientation. bearing plate

A steel plate used to distribute a load over a larger area. Usually used at the base of a column. bent

A vertical framework usually consisting of a truss or beam supported at the ends on columns. bill of m aterial (BOM)

Hierarchical decomposition of a product into constituent assemblies and parts. Specific types of BOMs exist (for example, an EBOM is a b ill of material from the point of view of an engineering department; an MBOM is a bill of m aterial from the point of view of manufacturing). brace

A diagonal member used to stiffen a framework. cans

A reinforcing connection piece placed at member intersections. cantilever

A beam, girder, or truss that overhangs one or both supports. catalog

Repository of information about components and materials used in construction. W hen you use catalog parts in the model, the software places an occurrence of the catalog part in the project. This occurrence is a copy of the actual catalog part.


304

Glossary change history

Process of recording information such as who, when, and why for any given modification. change management

Software features or manual procedures for managing the consequence of change. F or example, software can support a change management feature to report drawings that need updating as a result of a change in a 3-D model. change propagation

Ability of the software to intelligently modify dependent design information to reflect change in a higher order object. channel

A structural shape referring to a three-sided member type with each of the sides joined at a right angle. chord

The principal member of a truss. Can be on either the top or bottom of the truss. circular tube

A structural shape referring to a hollow cylindrical member type or pipe. CISC (Canadian Inst itute of Steel Cons truct ion)

An organization responsible for defining Canadian steel construction standards. class

Grouping of individual objects that share some very significant, common characteristics. clip angle

A small angle-shaped piece of steel used for fastening members together. codelist

A set of acceptable values for a particular property that can be referred to by an index number or selected in a combo box. For example, the codelist for the material specification a llows you to select from a set of standard entries, such as ASTM A183-F316 Stainless Steel. column

A vertical structural member usually attached to a footing and extending to the roof of a building. commodity code

A user-defined code that provides an index to parts in a catalog. commodity item

A standard component found in a manufacturer catalog (an off-the-shelf component). component

Physical part that a feature generates.


305

Glossary concurrent access

Ability of the software to allow multiple users to simultaneously access and modify the design of a model. coordinate

The location of a point along the X-, Y-, or Z-axis. coordinate system

A geometric relation used to denote the location of points in the model. The most common coordinate system is the rectangular coordinate system, whereby points are located b y traversing the X-, Y-, and Z-axes of the m odel. Normally, coordinate systems have their origin defined as 0,0,0. cope

To cut out the top or bottom flanges an d possibly the web so that one member frames into another. cross section

The shape of a member when viewed along the member line. cutback

An axial offset that typically represents the distance from a member centerline to its face. Cutbacks are used to account for the difference between how a structure is modeled and constructed in terms of lengths of members and quantities of m aterials. cutting plane

A plane that cuts through an object. damage records

Data relating to the damage and repair of structure or components that occurred during or after construction of a model. data interchange

Capability to output the design, or portions of the design, in a standard format for use or movement to another computer software system. database

Repository for the product model data. The database contains information to describe individual objects in the data model and the relationships between objects as appropriate. database backup

Process of recording a backup copy of the complete database or the incremental changes after the date that the last complete copy was created. database break and r ecovery

Utilities used to restore a database after files are corrupted.


306

Glossary database copy

Functionality to copy large collections of model objects from one design project to another design project. database management

Functionality related to managing a product model database. degree

The highest polynomial factor in the curve or surface mathematical definition. A line is a degree 1 curve, while a cubic B-spline is a degree 3 curve. degree of freedom

An allowable direction of movement, either translation or rotation. There are six possible degrees of freedom (DOFs): translation X, Y, and Z, and rotation RX, RY, and RZ. design alternative

Difference in a design represented by a separate version. A design alternative can be a new design prepared as a proposed change, or one of several elective options that the builder or customer selects. Each design alternative has an identification assigned so you can uniquely refer to the design alternatives. design approval log

Record of review and approval of parts of the des ign. design documents

Drawings, sketches, material lists, procedures, and so forth that are generated during the design phase. design object

Any object with properties that you can select. A design object can be related to one or more contracts of different types, but related only to one contract of a given type. design progress check

Analysis of the content of the design to some metric unit that gives an idea of the degree of completion. design review

Functionality to support rapid viewing of the des ign and markup of features with comments. design service

Any general system services related to the design function. design standard

Feature or object used in model des ign that has been determined to the normal or approved way of accomplishing a design requirement. In the c ontext of computer software, the term refers to computer functionality to support standards, not the standard itself.


307

Glossary detail schedule

Lowest level of schedule used to manage and track work progress. diagonals

A member used for stiffening and wind bracing. distributed systems

Systems consisting of sequential parts with a dis tributive characteristic (for example, pipes distribute fluids, HVAC distributes air, cabling distributes power, and structure distributes loads). distribution systems

Term synonymous and used interchangeably with the term distributed systems. documentation

Drawings and other records that you must produce to document, obtain approval, or build the design. drawing tool

Tool that helps in the process of creating, modifying, or manipulating objects. Examples are PinPoint and SmartSketch. driftpin

A tapered steel pin used to align bolt or rivet holes when assembling steel. easting

A term that describes an east coordinate location in a coordinate system. edge

A topological object that represents a trimmed curve bounded by a start and end vertex. edge distance

The distance from the center of a bo lt or rivet to the edge of a plate or flange. equipment

Pieces that a foundation supports. Examples are engin es, generators, pumps, fans, consoles, large valves, large strainers, and winches. Usually, you can find these pieces on a machinery arrangement plan. Equipment is most often associated with a s ystem. equipment catalog

Catalog of equipment geometry and limited properties that the software uses to identify and visualize equipment and its placement i n the model. The catalog is not the source for the total specification and ordering data for the object. erection clearance

The amount of space left between members to ease a ssembly.


308

Glossary fabricate

To cut, punch, and sub-assemble members in the sho p. face

A topological object that represents a trimmed surface bounded by a loop of edges. face plate

An edge reinforcement type that places a plate or profile at the selected plate edge. face-to-face

The overall length of a component from the inlet face to the outlet face. fasteners

Bolts and rivets used to connect structural members. feature

A logical collection of parts driven by the piping specification. There are four basic features: straight, turn, branch, and inline component. element

Primitive geometric shape such as a l ine, circle, or arc. fence

Boundary or barrier that separates or closes off an area. To surround or close like a fence. field adjustment

Material added to the neat design geometry of piping or structural parts to allow for extra material when it is required due to uncontrolled variance in the m anufacturing and construction process. flange

The projecting portion of a beam, channel, or column. flavor

A different variation of a symbol. Each variation has different occurrence property values. flexure

A term used for describing bending behavior. focus of rotation

A point or line about which an object or view turns. footing

An enlargement at the base of a column, or at the bottom of a wall, that distributes the load over a greater portion of ground and thereby prevents settling.


309

Glossary frame connection

A way of establishing connectivity between member parts to represent physical relationships such as work point offsets, and logical relationships such as end releases. A placement positioning mechanism to represent physical relationships between member s ystems that establishes and maintains connectivity. framing plan

A structural drawing plan view, drawn to scale, providing an overhead view of the structural components of a building. Columns, beams, and girders, roof m embers, floor members, and wall members all require separate framing plans. full penetration weld

A type of weld in which the weld material extends through the complete thickness of the components being joined. function points

Part of the requirements documentation, function points are the smallest granularity of a requirement statement that describe specific detailed actions that the software performs. functional block diagram

Schematic representation of a system (piping, electrical, ventilation) showing s ystem parts and their relationship. You use symbols to r epresent equipment and components. A connecting network of lines illustrates their relationship. Taken together, the symbols and the network illustrate the function of the system. furnishings

Parts such as movable articles and f ittings that normally are not associated with a s ystem (for example, a chair). generic specific

Object that is parametrically defined or defined to suit a family of specific parts (for example, International Standards parametrics). For example, a 100 - 200 gpm pump in the catalog can provide a general shape to appear in the model until a specific object has been identified. girder

A horizontal support member similar to a beam. Some people maintain that girders span from column to column, and beams span from girder to girder. Other people maintain that beams span column to column and girders span from beam to beam. girt

A beam, usually bolted to columns, to support the side covering or to serve as a window lintel. grade

The material grade of the structural member.


310

Glossary GUIDs

Acronym that stands for Globally Unique Identifiers. The software automatically creates the GUIDs sheet in the Excel workbooks when you create the Catalog database and schema. The purpose of storing GUIDs within Excel workbooks is to help you keep track of what has been loaded into the database. Storing GUIDs also helps to avoid the situation in which a replacement Catalog database causes existing models to become invalid. gusset plate

A plate used to connect various members, such as in a truss. hook element

An analytical element or boundary condition used to simulate one-way tension-only behavior. A hook element is a backwards gap with the ability to resist tension o nly when the hook is closed. It resists neither tension nor compression when it is open. Typical uses of hook elements in modeling include structural bracing, cables, tension, bolts, and the separation of two connected regions. HVAC

Acronym for heating, ventilation and cooling. This system is the distribution system design for heating or cooling. HVAC analysis

Analysis routines that address heating and cooling loads required for the compartments and that size or evaluate ventilation ducts and blower requirements. initial design

Early stage of design work, generally before contract, used to estimate construction costs and provide a rough concept of the intended model. Contains information relating to a model c reated during its initial (concept) design period. initial structural plan

Principal structural plan for the model; also called a construction profile. inline

A term used to refer to those piping components that can be inserted in a pipe feature. instantiation

Occurrence of a catalog object at a specific geometric location in the model. interference checking

A process that identifies possible collisions or insufficient clearance between objects in the model. I-Section

A structural shape referring to any member type in the form of an I. jo b o rd er

Industrial authorization for accomplishing work; synonymous with a work order.


311

Glossary jo is t

A horizontal structural members that support the floor or roof of a building. kinematics analysis

Analysis of mechanical motion. knee brace

A corner brace used to prevent angular movement. leg length analysis

Preferred term is welding length analysis. library

Resource of reference information that you can access in developing a model design. life cy cle database

Information developed to assist in the maintenance and modernization of delivered models. link

Way to store information about another file in your document. You can update a link so that changes in the file appear in your document. lintel

A horizontal member used to carry a wall over an opening. load (structure)

A force vector applied to a member. logical member

An object in the model used to represent the design topology. machinery

Major pieces of equipment installed in a model. macro

A sequence of actions or commands that can be named and stored. When you run the macro, the software performs the actions or runs the commands. You can create the m acros in Visual Basic or other OLE-aware programming applications. Some of the other OLE-aware programming applications are Visual Basic for Applications, Visual C++, and so forth. maintenance envelope

A rectangular box around the part for clearance during maintenance operations. maintenance parts

Required material for depot or on-board repair or o verhaul of equipment, as determined by engineering study. Generally at a level below the purchased construction object of the m odel.


312

Glossary maintenance records

Records of breakdown, repair, and overhaul of equipment. material analysis

Analysis of a completed design work for extracting detailed material requirements; also called material lists. material list

An option category that controls the format and content of the bill of materials. material properties

Properties of the material useful in the analysis process. member name

A user-definable alphanumeric code used to uniquely identify individual members in the model. member part

A model object derived from the logical model that represents the manufactured physical member parts. member system

A logical collection of member parts that can be moved as a single entity. move from point

Starting point for an action. For example, when you move an equipment object, the Move From point determines the point of origin for the move. move to point

Ending point for an action. For example, when you move an equipment object, the Move To point determines where you want the move to stop. natural surface

A surface without a boundary curve. node 





One of the set of discrete points in a flow graph. A terminal of any branch of a network or a terminal common to two or more branches of a network. An end point of any branch or a network or graph, or a junction common to two or more branches.

northing

A term that describes a north coordinate location in a coordinate system. nozzle

A piping connection point to a piece of equipment.


313

Glossary nozzle standout

The shortest allowable distance between the connection poin t of a nozzle and the start point of a turn on the leg connected to the nozzle. NPD (Nominal Piping Diameter)

The diameter of a pipe. object

A type of data other than the native graphic format of the application. orientation vector

A vector used to define the local y-x plane of a physical member when combined with the local x-axis defined by the start and end n odes. origin

In coordinate geometry, the point where the X-, Y-, and Z-axes intersect. origin point

The point at which the coordinate s ystem is placed, providing a full Cartesian coordinate system with positive and negative quadrants. Points are placed at coordinates relative to the or igin point, represented by the X, Y, and Z values. orthogonal

The characteristic of an element consisting completely of elements positioned at 90-degree angles. A square is an orthogonal element. orthographic

A depiction of an object created by projecting its features onto a plane along lines perpendicular to the plane. orthotropic material

A material that has two material directions that are orthogonal to one another. An example of an orthotropic material is wood. P&ID

Diagram that shows the topology, functional components, and special requirements of a piping system; generally represents the engineering design of the system. package

Set of closely related classes. (UML) panel

The space between adjacent floor supports, or purlins, in a roof. parameter

A property whose value determines the characteristics or behavior of something.


314

Glossary part class

A group of similar objects. You can define part classes in the Excel workbooks. A part class can have multiple parts. For example, a heat exchanger part class can contain heat e xchangers with different dimensions. part number

Unique identifier of a part. parts

The physical components that comprise a feature and are generally selected by the software. For example, the flanges, gaskets, and the gate val ve itself are examples of the parts comprising the gate valve feature. PDS (Plant Design System)

A comprehensive, intelligent, computer-aided design and engineering application for the process, power, and marine industries. PDS consists of integrated 2-D and 3-D modules that correspond to engineering tasks in the design workflow. physical member

A concept that helps to eliminate modeling errors by providing a straightforward method for defining structure geometry by placing members in a model in much the same way that they would be framed in the field. During a nalysis pre-processing, physical members are split into finite elements (segments) while still maintaining the coll ective status of the physical member during model revisions. The software assigns member releases at each end of the true physical member, while preventing release assignments from being made to interior n odes of the finite elements. pitch

The ratio of rise to run for roofs. Pitch is also the cente r distance between bolts or rivets, parallel to the axis of the member. plate

A flat, rectangular steel shape. port

A connection point to a pipe or a component such as a valve. post tensioning

A method of pre-stressing concrete, by stressing the steel strands after the concrete has been poured and allowed to harden. precast concrete

Concrete members that are poured in forms at a plant or factory and allowed to harden. Two types of precast products exist: pre-stressed products and reinforced products. pre-stressed concrete

Concrete products that are stressed by passing high-strength steel strands through the form and applying stress to the strands either before or after the concrete is poured.


315

Glossary pretensioning

Stressing the steel strands in a pre-stressed member before the concrete is poured into the form. primary member

A main structural support member. principle of superposition

The principle that states that the stresses, strains, and displacements due to different forces can be combined. This principle is only valid for linear analysis. product structure

Hierarchical breakdown or decomposition of a product into constituent parts, volum es, or units. (For example, a bill of m aterial is one possible t ype of product structure.) production planning

Functionality associated with the work breakdown and sequence of the construction of a model. purlin

Horizontal structural member extending between trusses, used as beams for supporting the roof. rafters

Beams or truss members that support the purlins. rebar

A term for steel reinforcing bars that are used to reinforce concrete. rectangular bar

A structural shape referring to a four-sided solid bar. rectangular tube

A structural shape referring to a four-sided hollow member type. reference data

The data that is necessary to design plants or ships using the software. Reference data includes graphical information, such as symbols. It also contains tabular information, such as physical dimensions and piping specifications. reflect

A parameter that affects the placement orientation of member cross sections. At your option, the sections can be placed with their geometry reflected or mirrored about the local section y-axis. reinforced concrete plan

A framing plan that identifies all beams and slabs by letter and number. The slab, beam, and bend schedules give all details for preparation and placement (number, size, spacing, bending, and location) of the reinforcing steel.


316

Glossary resource estimation

Rough estimate of material, manpower, and facility utilization for the d esign and construction of the model. retaining wall

A structural wall, either gravity or cantilever, used to hold back dirt or other materials. route

1) A line connecting a series of points in space and constituting a proposed or traveled route. 2) The set of links and junctions joined in series to establish a connection. rule-based joint

A feature that enables you to offset the work point of two members that intersect at a node. The rules vary depending on the structural type, member orientation, and construction practices. Ruled joints are typically used when a connection detail calls for the physical member ends to be noncoincident with the centerline of an intersection member. sag ties

Tie rods between purlins in the plane of a roof, used to carry the component of the roof load parallel to the roof. Tie rods are used to support girts. SAISC (South A frican Insti tute of Steel Constructi on)

An organization responsible for defining South African steel construction standards. schema

A database that creates the structure of another database. For example, a schema specifies the queries, tables, fields, and data types in a database. secondary member

A member that is not a significant load-bearing member. section

A structural member whose parameters are defined in a table. section name

An alphanumeric code used to refer to a particular member in a table; for example W18X35. section ori entation

The position of physical member cress section relative to the physical member local coordinate system. section table

A library of standard structural shapes containing the necessary parametric properties of each section size, such as depth, width, and inertias.


317

Glossary shear stiffness

A physical member property that indicates whether to include shear stiffness in the analytical element stiffness matrix of a member. shear walls

A wall designed to resist lateral loading from winds, underground disturbances, or blasts. shell structure

External portion of the surface of the model. site

The top level in the Project Management hierarchy. A Site configuration may contain several Catalogs, each shared by multiple Models. skewed member

A structural member that is not at right angles to its connecting members. slab

A flat concrete area usually reinforced with wire mesh and rebar. sleeve

A part that connects two pipes or two ducts, for example. A sleeve can be used to prevent water from leaking through a hole. span

A group of contiguous physical members that are not intersected by a brace- or column-type physical member. specifications

Contracted requirements for the model. splice (structure)

To fasten together two physical members, usually columns end-to-end, to form a single continuing length. steel reinfor ced concrete

An association of concrete and steel where the concrete is there to stand the compression forces and the steel the traction forces. The resulting s tructure can withstand traction and flexion. stiffener

An angle, plate, or channel fastened to a member to prevent buckling. stress

Forces acting on structural members due to various types of loads. These forces can be shear, tension, compression, or torsion.


318

Glossary stringer

A longitudinal member used to support loads directly. structure analysis

Analysis routines that provide stress and deflection data for structural designs. Loading conditions can be both static and dynamic. Finite element analysis is the most common type of structure analysis. strut

A compression member in a framework. stud

A bolt, threaded on both ends, used to connect components. suspended floor

A concrete floor system built above and off the ground. system

A conceptual design grouping that organizes parts in hierarchical relationships. A system represents a functional view of the model and includes information such as system name, type, properties, and design specifications for the objects assigned to the system. tag number

User-specific, unique number assigned to an object (for example, CV-101 f or a control valve, HE-2002 for a heat exchanger). target point

The origin for coordinate measurements displayed by PinPo int. You can position the target point anywhere on the drawing sheet or view. tilt-up walls

Concrete walls that are poured in forms on the ground and then tilted up into place by cranes or hoists. transition

A cross-sectional type that results in a tapered length of member and involves a gradual change in section size. See also uniform. truss

A rigid framed structure consisting of straight members joined to form a pattern of interconnecting triangles for carrying loads. uniform

A cross-section type that results in a uniform length of member and involves an abrupt change in section size. See also transition.


319

Glossary unit/module modeler

Facility of the system to structure collections of equip ment and components into a single identifiable object. user attributes

A customized property in the reference data. The Custom Interfaces sheets in the Excel workbooks define these properties. You can list the customized properties on the individual part class sheets. vertex

A topological object that represents a point in the three-dimensional model. web

The center section separating the flanges of an I-section, tee, or channel. weight and CG analysis

Routines that compute the weight of commodity materials as configured in a given design (for example, plate and pipe) and determine total weight and center of gravity (CG) for a collection of material and equipment, as well as the c omplete model. welding

Weld requirements for joining materials. Welding length analysis is the calculation of required weld dimensions; also called leg length analysis. wizard

Software routine attached to an application that provides guidance and expert help to you to complete one of the functionalities of the application. work order

Plant authorization for completing work; synonymous with a job order. working plane

The available 2-D plane of movement for endpoint selection. workspace

Area that represents the portion of the model data needed to perform the intended task and includes the user modeling settings. Workspace Explor er

Tree or list representation of objects in your workspace. X-section

Cross section; a graphically placed cross section repre senting the member section size. yield strength

The stress beyond which a material sustains permanent deformation.


320

Index A About • 20 abstract part • 303 actuator • 303 Add a bolt data table with a default selection code • 62 Add a flanged or clamped component data table • 63 Add a gasket data table with a default selection code • 61 Add a new bolt diameter table • 32 Add a new bolt length table • 35 Add a new data table to a category • 57 Add a new data table to a group folder • 59 Add a new end prep table • 98 Add a new end type table • 51 Add a new material table • 38 Add a new schedule table • 40 Add a new size table • 30 Add a new specification • 124 Add a new support assembly • 181 Add a new thickness table • 42 Add DBCode Table • 96 Add Group Component • 133 Add Group Pipe Support Assembly • 178 Add Index Code Table • 95 Add MAINSIZE • 52 Add Multi Component Pane • 139 Add multiple new components to a spec • 140 Add New Diameter • 33 Add New Length • 36 Add New MAINSIZE • 52 Add New Size • 31 Add new topworks table • 92 Add new user shape • 89 Add Pipe Support Assembly • 178 Add Pipe Support Library • 154 Add Schedule • 40 Add single new component to a spec • 136 Add Specification • 123 Add Standard Diameter • 32 Add Standard EndPrep • 99 Add Standard Length • 35 Add Standard Size • 30 Add Sub Folder • 91 Add Table Panel • 23


AISC (American Institute of Steel Construction) • 303 AISI • 303 anchor bolts • 303 angle • 303 arc element • 303 arrangement (accommodation) • 303 arrangement (HVAC) • 303 arrangement (outfitting) • 303 assembly • 303 Assign gaskets and bolts to equipment nozzles • 78 Assign gaskets and bolts to flange weld neck in the catalog • 66 Assign gaskets and bolts to the flange in the project • 68 Assign gaskets and bolts to valves in the project • 68 Assign selection codes in the project from defaults in the catalog • 64 Assign selection codes to components without catalog defaults • 142 attribute • 303 axis • 304

B bar • 304 Base Catalog Data • 115 basic design • 304 bay • 304 BCSA (British Constructional Steelwork Association) • 304 beam • 304 bearing plate • 304 bent • 304 bill of material (BOM) • 304 Bolt Diameter Table • 31 Bolt Diameter Table Properties • 226 Bolt Length Calculation • 255 Bolt Length Table • 34 Bolt Length Table Properties • 227 Bolts • 253 brace • 304

C cans • 304 cantilever • 304

321

Index Caps • 240 catalog • 304 Catalog Data • 108, 113 Catalog Panel • 157 Catalog Properties • 225 Cell Name Reference - Component Properties • 165 Cell Name Reference - Specification Properties • 162 change history • 305 change management • 305 change propagation • 305 channel • 305 chord • 305 circular tube • 305 CISC (Canadian Institute of Steel Construction) • 305 class • 305 clip angle • 305 Clipboard Panel • 21 codelist • 305 column • 305 commodity code • 305 commodity item • 305 Common Component Properties • 237 component • 305 Component Size Setup • 181 Component Tables • 119 Component Types • 120 concurrent access • 306 coordinate • 306 coordinate system • 306 cope • 306 Copy • 22 Couplings • 241 Create a custom end type • 44 Create a new properties field • 118 Create a Stub End end type • 46 cross section • 306 Crosses • 243 Cut • 23 cutback • 306 cutting plane • 306

D damage records • 306 data interchange • 306 Data Table • 54 Data Table List Mode Panel • 121 Data Tables folder • 114 Data Tables Properties • 236 database • 306


database backup • 306 database break and recovery • 306 database copy • 307 database management • 307 DBCode Table • 95 DBCode Tables folder • 115 DBCode Tables Properties • 295 degree • 307 degree of freedom • 307 Description Format Dialog Boxes • 193 design alternative • 307 design approval log • 307 design documents • 307 design object • 307 design progress check • 307 design review • 307 design service • 307 design standard • 307 detail schedule • 308 diagonals • 308 Display Panel • 113, 176, 211 Display the bolt diameter part number in CADWorx Plant • 33 Display the bolt length part number in CADWorx Plant • 36 Display the material assigned to the component in CADWorx Plant • 208 distributed systems • 308 distribution systems • 308 documentation • 308 Drawing a Stub with a stub-end or ad apter lap end type set • 48 Drawing a Stub without an end type set • 48 drawing tool • 308 Drawing with custom end types • 45 driftpin • 308

E easting • 308 edge • 308 edge distance • 308 Edit a field • 119 Edit a project custom data field • 119 Edit a support assembly • 182 Edit a support component • 192 Edit bolt diameter table • 33 Edit bolt length table • 36 Edit data table features • 93 Edit end prep table • 99 Edit end type table • 52 Edit material table • 39 Edit Pipe Support Component Pane • 183

322

Index Edit Project Specs features • 143 Edit schedule table • 40 Edit size table • 31 Edit Table Features • 24 Edit thickness table • 42 Editing Panel • 174 Elbows • 245 End Prep Table • 97 End Prep Tables Properties • 296 End Type Table • 49 End Type Tables folder • 114 End Type Tables Properties • 231 EndType Tables • 120 equipment • 308 equipment catalog • 308 erection clearance • 308 Example of Direction and Alignment Vectors using Other • 189 Example of Direction and Alignment Vectors using Pipe • 187 Example of Direction and Alignment Vectors using Steel • 191 Exit Spec Editor • 20 Export a material assignment setup • 207 Export a single specification to Excel • 171 Export Data Panel • 112 Export multiple specifications or an entire project to Excel • 171 Export Table To Text Excel • 112 Export to Excel • 161 Export to Text • 172 Export/Import Data Panel • 161

F fabricate • 309 face • 309 face plate • 309 face-to-face • 309 fasteners • 309 feature • 309 fence • 309 field adjustment • 309 File • 14 Find and Replace • 174 flange • 309 Flanges • 248 flavor • 309 flexure • 309 focus of rotation • 309 footing • 309 frame connection • 310 framing plan • 310


full penetration weld • 310 function points • 310 functional block diagram • 310 furnishings • 310

G Gaskets • 252 Gaskets/Bolts/Welds • 252 generic specific • 310 girder • 310 girt • 310 grade • 310 Group Data Table Manager Dialog Box • 54 GUIDs • 311 gusset plate • 311

H Help • 13 Home Catalog Tab • 21 Home Project Tab • 122 hook element • 311 HVAC • 311 HVAC analysis • 311

I Import a material assignment setup • 208 Import a single specification using a CADWorx catalog • 150 Import a single specification using an AutoCAD Plant 3D catalog • 149 Import AutoCAD Plant 3D Catalog Data • 28 Import AutoCAD Plant 3D Specification Data • 147 Import AutoPLANT Catalog Data • 26 Import AutoPLANT Specification Data • 144 Import By Spec • 100 Import data from Excel to a specification • 173 Import DBCode Table From File • 96 Import From Data File • 101 Import Legacy Pipe Support Library • 156 Import Legacy Specification • 160 Import multiple specifications using a CADWorx catalog • 151 Import Pipe Support Legacy From Assembly File • 104 Import Pipe Support Legacy From Data File • 105 Import Specification From SRD File • 152 Import Update From Excel • 172 IndexCode Table • 94

323

Index IndexCode Tables folder • 114 IndexCode Tables Properties • 294 initial design • 311 initial structural plan • 311 inline • 311 Insert and route from a generic nozzle containing selection codes • 86 Insert components with different selection codes assigned • 69 Insert Multiple Rows • 97 Insert piping components on equipment containing selection codes • 83 Insert Row • 38 instantiation • 311 interference checking • 311 Intergraph CADWorx Catalog and Specification Editor • 7 I-Section • 311

J job order • 311 joist • 312

K Keywords • 10 kinematics analysis • 312 knee brace • 312

L Laterals • 259 Layer Manager Dialog Box • 196 leg length analysis • 312 Legacy Catalog Data Panel • 99 Legacy Specification Panel • 160 library • 312 life cycle database • 312 link • 312 lintel • 312 List Items Dialog Box • 118 load (structure) • 312 logical member • 312 Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes • 134

Matching End Type Table Dialog Box • 197 material analysis • 313 Material Assignment Setup • 198 material list • 313 material properties • 313 Material Table • 37 Material Tables folder • 114 Material Tables Properties • 228 member name • 313 member part • 313 member system • 313 Miscellaneous folder • 115 move from point • 313 move to point • 313

N natural surface • 313 New and Edit Component Pane • 125 New Catalog • 15 New Category • 53 New End Type • 42 New Field Dialog Box • 116 New Group Table • 53 New Pipe Support Libraries • 18 New Project • 16 New Topworks Table • 91 New User Shape Table • 88 node • 313 northing • 313 nozzle • 313 nozzle standout • 314 NPD (Nominal Piping Diameter) • 314

O object • 314 O-Lets • 260 Open • 19 orientation vector • 314 origin • 314 origin point • 314 orthogonal • 314 orthographic • 314 orthotropic material • 314 Other Editing Features • 23

M

P

machinery • 312 macro • 312 maintenance envelope • 312 maintenance parts • 312 maintenance records • 313

P&ID • 314 package • 314 panel • 314 parameter • 314 part class • 315


324

Index part number • 315 parts • 315 Paste • 21 PDS (Plant Design System) • 315 physical member • 315 Pipe • 262 Pipe Support Assembly and Component Properties • 223 Pipe Support Description Format Dialog Boxes • 212 Pipe Support Libraries Properties • 221 Pipe Support Library • 177 Pipe Support Library File Home Tab • 210 Pipe Support Library File View Tab • 211 Pipe Support Library Properties • 222 Pipe Support Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes • 214 Pipe Support Panel • 154 PipeSupport • 264 Pitch • 315 PLANT 3D Size Table Detail Dialog Box • 142 plate • 315 port • 315 post tensioning • 315 precast concrete • 315 pre-stressed concrete • 315 pretensioning • 316 primary member • 316 principle of superposition • 316 product structure • 316 production planning • 316 Project Catalog Data • 176 Project Data • 109 Project Properties • 217 Project Specs • 176 Properties • 115, 192, 211 Property Descriptions • 217 purlin • 316

Q Quick Access Toolbar • 12

R rafters • 316 rebar • 316 Recent Files • 20 rectangular bar • 316 rectangular tube • 316 Reducers • 271 reference data • 316


reflect • 316 reinforced concrete plan • 316 Remove Row • 23 resource estimation • 317 retaining wall • 317 Review Table Links • 158 Review Table Links Dialog Box • 158 Review Update • 158 route • 317 rule-based joint • 317

S sag ties • 317 SAISC (South African Institute of Steel Construction) • 317 Sanitary • 273 Save • 19 Save As • 19 Save As Pipe Support Libraries • 19 Schedule Assignment Setup • 208 Schedule Table • 39 Schedule Tables folder • 114 Schedule Tables Properties • 229 schema • 317 secondary member • 317 section • 317 section name • 317 section orientation • 317 section table • 317 Selection Codes • 60 Selection codes in user shapes • 75 Selection Codes Tutorial • 65 Set material assignment for a specific component • 206 Set material assignment for a specific component with a specific end type • 207 Set material assignment for all components • 204 Set material assignment for all components based on size • 205 Set selection code defaults • 65 Set selection codes on gasket and bolt components in the project • 66 Setup a drawing • 69 shear stiffness • 318 shear walls • 318 shell structure • 318 site • 318 Size Table • 29 Size Tables folder • 114 Size Tables Properties • 226 skewed member • 318

325

Cad Wor x Spec Editor Users Guide

Recommend Documents